(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Children's Library | Advanced Microdevices Manuals | Linear Circuits Manuals | Supertex Manuals | Sundry Manuals | Echelon Manuals | RCA Manuals | National Semiconductor Manuals | Hewlett Packard Manuals | Signetics Manuals | Fluke Manuals | Datel Manuals | Intersil Manuals | Zilog Manuals | Maxim Manuals | Dallas Semiconductor Manuals | Temperature Manuals | SGS Manuals | Quantum Electronics Manuals | STDBus Manuals | Texas Instruments Manuals | IBM Microsoft Manuals | Grammar Analysis | Harris Manuals | Arrow Manuals | Monolithic Memories Manuals | Intel Manuals | Fault Tolerance Manuals | Johns Hopkins University Commencement | PHOIBLE Online | International Rectifier Manuals | Rectifiers scrs Triacs Manuals | Standard Microsystems Manuals | Additional Collections | Control PID Fuzzy Logic Manuals | Densitron Manuals | Philips Manuals | The Andhra Pradesh Legislative Assembly Debates | Linear Technologies Manuals | Cermetek Manuals | Miscellaneous Manuals | Hitachi Manuals | The Video Box | Communication Manuals | Scenix Manuals | Motorola Manuals | Agilent Manuals
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Lycoming College catalog"

CATALOG '8 5- '8 6 



LYCOMING 
COLLEGE 




Founded 1812 



Williamsport, Pennsylvania 



Digitized by the Internet Archive 

in 2010 with funding from 

Lyrasis Members and Sloan Foundation 



http://www.archive.org/details/lycomingcollegec198586lyco 



CATALOG '8 5- '8 6 




LYCOMING 
COLLEGE 




Founded 1812 



Williamsport, Pennsylvania 



Communicating with Lycoming College 



Please address specific inquiries as follows: 

Director of Admissions 

Admissions: requests for publications 

Treasurer: 

Payment of bills; expenses. 

Director of Financial Aid: 

Scholarships and loan fund; financial assistance. 

Dean of College: 

Academic programs; faculty; faculty activities. 

Dean of Student Services: 

Some activities; residence halls; religious life; health services; 
academic support services. 

Registrar: 

Student records; transcript requests; academic policies. 
Career Development Center: 

Career counseling; employment opportunities. 

Executive Director for College Advancement 

Institutional relations; annual fund; gift programs. 

Director of Alumni and Parent Relations 
Alumni information; parent support 

Director of Public Relations 

Public information; publications; sports information 

All correspondence should be addressed to: 
Lycoming College 
Williamsport, Pennsylvania 17701 

The College telephone number is (717) 326-1951. 



Visitors 



Lycoming welcomes visitors to the campus. If you would like a guided tour, call 
the Office of Admissions before your visit to arrange a mutually convenient time. 



Lycoming College welcomes applications from prospective students regardless of age. sex. race, 
religion, handicap, finances, national or ethnic origin, or color. Lycoming does not discriminate on the 
basis of age, sex. race, religion, handicap, finances, national or ethnic origin, or color in the 
administration of any of its policies and programs. 



Contents 

Welcome to Lycoming 3 

The Academic Program 5 

The Curriculum 21 

Student Services 60 

Admission 62 

Financial Matters 64 

The Campus 68 

Academic Calendar, 1985-1986 70 

Directory 71 

The Alumni Association 79 

Index 81 



The general regulations and policies Muted in this catalog are in affect for the 1985-86 academic year. Students 
beginning their first term at Lycoming College in the fall of 1985 or the spnngof 1 986 are thereafter governed by the 
policies staled in this catalog Requircnicnls governing a student's major are those in effect at the time a major is 
formally declared and officially accepted by the major department. 

If changes are made in subsequent editions of the catalog to either general requirements or major requirements, 
students may be permitted the option of following their original program or a subsequent catalog version, but the 
College always reserves the right to determine which requirements apply. 

II a student interrupts his or her education without a leave of absence, the catalog requirements in effect at the time of 
readmission will apply Students on an approved leave of absence retain the same requirements they had when they 
entered, if their leaves do not extend beyond one year. 

Lycoming College reserves the right to amend or change the policies and prcKcdures stated in this catalog without 
prior notice to those who may be affected by them. The provisions of this publication are not to be regarded as an 
irrevocable contract between the applicant and/or the student and Lycoming College. 



Welcome to Lycoming 



Lycoming is an independent, coeduca- 
tional college dedicated to providing the 
type of learning that can be used for a 
lifetime — the liberal arts and sciences. 

Lycoming's academic relevance 
derives from its enduring commitment to 
the value of this type of education, as 
offered by a superior teaching faculty. 
The College's principal aim is to help 
students develop a central core of inte- 
grated values, skill, information, and 
strategies while they learn to communi- 
cate, reason, make decisions, under- 
stand, and use their imagination. This 
type of education can lead to productive 
and fulfilling lives in many fields while 
allowing lifelong growth and develop- 
ment. 

Lycoming awards bachelor of arts 
degrees in 30 major fields, a bachelor of 
fine arts degree in sculpture, and a 
bachelor of science degree in nursing. 
The curriculum is challenging. Because 
it is built upon the two principles of the 



liberal arts known as distribution and 
concentration, it allows students to study 
in breadth and depth. 

Students who have special interests 
not met entirely by a major field can 
design their own majors. Or, if they are 
interested in teaching, medicine, law, 
dentistry, or the ministry, they can take 
courses needed to enter their advanced 
study. 

Students also can study engineering, 
forestry or environmental studies, 
podiatric medicine, optometry, medical 
technology, and sculpture through 
cooperative programs operated by 
Lycoming with other colleges and uni- 
versities. Or, they can study abroad or in 
Harrisburg, Pa., Washington, D.C., or 
New York City through other off- 
campus study programs. 

Most students complete their program 
of study in four years, usually by taking 
four courses each fall and spring semes- 
ter. But students also can take one course 




during Lycoming's May term, or two 
courses during the summer term. 

Recognizing students" concerns about 
careers, Lycoming offers extensive 
counseling through the Career Develop- 
ment Center and advisory committees for 
prelaw, prehealth professions, and pre- 
medical students. The College also oper- 
ates a wide-ranging internship program 
that allows students to earn academic 
credit while working at area businesses, 
government offices, and nonprofit orga- 
nizations. 

Lycoming's ratio of faculty to students 
is 15 to one, which means that most 
classes are small and there is abundant 
opportunity for individual attention. All 
faculty members teach. More than 70 
percent of Lycoming's faculty hold the 
highest degrees in their fields from the 
nation's outstanding colleges and univer- 
sities. And. faculty members take their 
advising seriously. They care about stu- 
dents, and encourage and guide them so 
they receive the education they want. 

Eighteen buildings sit on Lycoming's 
main campus. Most of them have been 
built since 1950. The modem buildings 
include the eight residence halls; the 
library; the Academic Center, which 
houses the Arena Theatre, planetarium, 
computer center, and art gallery; the stu- 
dent union; the physical education/ 
recreation center, including a six-lane, 
25-yard pool; a completely renovated 
fine arts center with excellent facilities to 
accommodate sculpture, painting, 
drawing, printmaking, ceramics and 
photography; and a music building, 
which houses individual music practice 
rooms and an electronic-music studio. 

Lycoming houses approximately 900 
of its 1,250 students in the residence 
halls, which include double and single 
rooms. Most students find the campus 
friendly and comfortable, with all of the 
buildings easy to reach from anywhere 
on campus. Students come from a variety 
of economic classes, religious beliefs, 
and geographic areas, although most stu- 
dents call Pennsylvania, New Jersey, or 
New York their home. They work and 
play together in an atmosphere of respect 
and tolerance. 

The College offers a variety of extra- 



curricular activities, including an Artist 
Series. Student government groups help 
to plan campus activities and social 
events. Numerous clubs, honor 
societies, social fraternities and sorori- 
ties, the student newspaper, yearbook 
and literary magazine, and the band and 
widely acclaimed choir meet other stu- 
dent interests. Students who like to per- 
form or compete can act on the Arena 
Theatre stage or play on intercollegiate 
or intramural sports teams. Intercollegi- 
ate teams for men include football, soc- 
cer, basketball, wrestling, tennis, golf, 
swimming, track and field, and cross 
country. Intercollegiate teams for 
women include basketball, tennis, field 
hockey, swimming, track and field, and 
cross country. 

In addition, students who like hiking, 
backpacking, skiing, camping, fishing, 
hunting, kayaking, spelunking, and 
other outdoor sports will find Lycom- 
ing's location ideal. 

Lycoming is situated on a slight 



prominence near downtown Williams- 
port, a small city nestled along the West 
Branch of the Susquehanna River in 
northcentral Pennsylvania's rolling hills 
and valleys. Yet, the College is within a 
four-hour drive of metropolitan centers 
such as New York City, Philadelphia, 
Pittsburgh, Washington. D.C.. Balti- 
more. Syracuse, Rochester, and the New 
Jersey shore points. The Williamsport- 
metro area is home to about 75.000 per- 
sons. 

Lycoming enjoys a relationship with 
The United Methodist Church. It sup- 
ports the Methodist tradition of provid- 
ing an education for persons of all faiths. 

Fully accredited. Lycoming is a mem- 
ber of the Middle States Association of 
Colleges and Schools, and the University 
Senate of The United Methodist Church. 
It is a member of the Association of 
American Colleges, the Pennsylvania 
Association of Colleges and Universi- 
ties, the Commission for Independent 
Colleges and Universities, the National 



Commission on Accrediting, and the 
National Association of Schools and 
Colleges of The United Methodist 
Church. 

HISTORY 

Lycoming College was founded in 1812 
as the Williamsport Academy, an 
elementary and secondary school. 
Thirty-six years later, the academy 
became the Williamsport Dickinson 
Seminary under the patronage of The 
Methodist Episcopal Church. The semi- 
nary operated as a private boarding 
school until 1929, when a college curri- 
culum was added and it became the Wil- 
liamsport Dickinson Seminary and 
Junior College. In 1947, the junior col- 
lege became a four-year degree-granting 
college of liberal arts and sciences. It 
adopted the name Lycoming, derived 
from the Indian word "lacomic," 
meaning "Great Stream." The word 
Lycoming has been common to north- 
central Pennsylvania since colonial days. 




Academic Program 



THE BACHELOR OF 
ARTS DEGREE 

Lycoming is committed to the principle 
that a liberal arts education is the best 
hope for an enlightened citizenry. Con- 
sequently, the bachelor of arts degree is 
conferred upon the student who has com- 
pleted an educational program incorpor- 
ating the two principles of the liberal arts 
known as distribution and concentration. 
The objective of the distribution princi- 
ple is to insure that the student achieves 
breadth in learning through the study of 
the major dimensions of human inquiry; 
the humanities, the social sciences, and 
the natural sciences. The objective of the 
concentration principle is to provide 
depth of learning through completion of 
a program of study in a given discipline 
or subject area known as the major. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE 
BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE 

Every degree candidate is expected to 
complete the following requirements in 
order to qualify for graduation: 

— complete the distribution 
program. 

— complete a major consisting of at 
least eight courses while achieving 
a minimum grade point average of 
2.0 in those courses. 

— earn one year of credit in physical 
education. All students must dem 
onstrate competence in swimming. 
(Medical exemptions may be 
granted by the College physician 
after an examination and review of 
the student's medical history and 
family physician's report.) 

— pass a minimum of 128 semester 
hours (32 unit courses) with a mini- 
mum cumulative average of 2.0. 
Additional credits beyond 128 
semester hours may be completed 
provided the minimum 2.0 cumu- 
lative average is maintained. 

— complete in residence the final 
eight courses offered for the degree 
at Lycoming. 

— satisfy all financial obligations 
incurred at the College. 

— complete the above requirements 



within seven years of continuous 
enrollment following the date of 
matriculation. 

All exemptions or waivers of specific 
requirements are made by the Committee 
on Academic Standing. 



THE BACHELOR OF 
FINE ARTS DEGREE 

The bachelor of fine arts degree is speci- 
fically designed to train professional 
artists. The BFA in sculpture is a synthe- 
sis of three diverse forms of education: a 
studio art program that emphasizes the 
skills and concepts of the visual lan- 
guage; an apprenticeship that takes tech- 
nical expertise as the departure point, 
and the scholastic method employed in 
both art history and the general- 
education component. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR 
THE BACHELOR OF 
FINE ARTS DEGREE 

Every BFA degree candidate is expected 
to complete the following requirements 
in order to qualify for graduation: 

— complete the 12-course Art 
Department course of study. 

— complete the distribution program. 

— complete a total of 32 course units 
achieving a minimum grade point 
average of 2.0 in those courses 
taken within the College. 

— complete one of the field speciali- 
zation apprenticeships at the John- 
son Atelier Technical Institute of 
Sculpture. 

— earn one year of credit in physical 
education. All students must dem- 
onstrate competence in swimming. 
(Medical exemptions may be 
granted by the College physician 
after an examination and review of 
the student's medical history and 
family physician's report.) 

— complete in residence the final 
eight courses offered for the degree 
at Lycoming. 

— satisfy all financial obligations 
incurred at the College. 



— have a public exhibition of original 
art work and make an oral defense. 

THE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE 
IN NURSING DEGREE 

The program of study leading to the 
bachelor of science in nursing degree is 
designed to prepare men and women as 
beginning practitioners of professional 
nursing, qualified for first-level posi- 
tions in a variety of health settings or for 
graduate study in nursing. Upon satis- 
factory completion of the program, a 
graduate is eligible to write the State 
Board of Nursing examination for licen- 
sure as a registered nurse. The goal of the 
program is to develop a liberally edu- 
cated and self-directed individual who is 
prepared to contribute to the welfare of 
the nation through the practice of profes- 
sional nursing which supports the prom- 
otion and restoration of health of indivi- 
duals and families in a variety of settings. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR 

THE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE 

IN NURSING DEGREE 

Every BSN degree candidate is expected 
to complete the following requirements 
in order to qualify for graduation: 

— complete the 13-course major with 
a minimum cumulative average of 
2.0, including the required May 
term following the junior year. 

— complete the distribution require- 
ment as modified for the BSN 
degree. 

— complete a minimum of 128 
semester hours (32 units) with a 
minimum cumulative average of 
2.0. 

— earn one year of credit in physical 
education. All students must dem- 
onstrate competence in swimming. 
(Medical exemptions may be 
granted by the College physican 
after an examination and review of 
the student's medical history and 
family physician's report.) 

— complete in residence the final 
eight courses offered for the degree 
at Lycoming. 



— satisfy all financial obligations 
incurred at the College. 

— complete the degree requirements 
within a five-year period after 
admission to the nursing major. 
Candidates who are unable to meet 
this requirement must petition for 
an extension. 



THE DISTRIBUTION PROGRAM 

A course can be used to satisfy only one 
distribution requirement. Courses for 
which a grade of "S" is recorded may 
not be used toward the fulfillment of the 
distribution requirements. (Refer to page 
10 for an explanation of the grading 
system. ) A course in any of the following 
distribution requirements refers to a 
full-unit (four semester hours) course 
taken at Lycoming, any appropriate 
combination of fractional unit courses 
taken at Lycoming which accumulate to 
four semester hours, or any single course 
of three or more semester hours trans- 
ferred from another institution. For the 
BSN degree, see special modified distri- 
bution requirements as listed below. 

English — All students are required to 
pass English 6 and one other English 
course, excluding English 3 and 5. 
English 6 should be taken during the 
freshman year and must be taken no later 
than the second semester (usually the 
spring semester) of the sophomore year. 
In addition, all students who have not 
been exempted from English 5 must 
receive a mark of "Satisfactory" in 
English 5 before being permitted to 
enroll in English 6. Students are placed 
in English 5 or 6 on the basis of their 
performance on the Achievement 
Examination in English Composition. 
English 3 may not be used to satisfy the 
distribution requirement in English. 

Foreign Language or Mathematics 

— Students are required to meet a mini- 
mum basic requirement in either a fore- 
ign language or the mathematical sci- 
ences. 

Foreign Language. Students may 
choose from among French, German, 



Greek, Hebrew, or Spanish and are 
required to pass two courses on the inter- 
mediate or higher course level. Place- 
ment at the appropriate course level will 
be determined by the faculty of the 
Department of Foreign Languages and 
Literatures. Students who have com- 
pleted two or more years of a given 
language in high school are not admitted 
for credit to the elementary course in the 
same foreign language except by written 
permission of the chairman of the depart- 
ment. French 28 and Spanish 32 will 
meet part of this requirement only if the 
section taught in the language is com- 
pleted. 

Mathematics. Students are required to 
demonstrate competence in basic algebra 
and to pass three units of mathematical 
science other than Mathematics 5. Com- 
petence in basic algebra may be demon- 
strated either by passing the basic algebra 
section of the Mathematics Placement 
Examination or by passing Mathematics 
5. By demonstrating higher competence 
on the Mathematics Placement Exami- 
nation, students may reduce the require- 
ment to two units of mathematical sci- 
ence. No more than one unit may be 
taken in computer science. 

Religion or Philosophy — Students 
are required to pass two courses in either 
religion or philosophy. Any two religion 
courses may be used to fulfill the 
philosophy/religion distribution require- 
ment, with this exception: only one 
course from the combination Religion 
20-21 may be selected for distribution. 

Fine Arts — Students are required to 
pass two courses as indicated in art, 
literature, music, or theatre. 

Art. Any two courses. 

Literature. Any two literature courses 
selected from the offerings of the Depart- 
ments of English and Foreign Languages 
and Literatures (French, German, or 
Spanish). 

Music. Any combination of music 
offerings totaling the equivalent of eight 
semester hours, for example: 

— a course or courses from 
those numbered Music 10 through 



Music 46. 
— applied music (private lessons) 
and/or ensemble (orchestra, choir, 
band) earned fractionally as fol- 
lows: 

(1) for private lessons (Music 60 
through 66) a one-half hour les- 
son per week earns one-half 
hour of credit; a one-hour lesson 
earns one hour of credit. Note: 
There are extra fees for these 
lessons. (For details see Depart- 
ment of Music course offerings 
described elsewhere in this 
catalog.) 

(2) credit may be earned for partici- 
pation in the Williamsport Sym- 
phony Orchestra (Music 67), 
the College choir (Music 68) 
and/or band (Music 69); howev- 
er, a student may earn no more 
than one hour each semester 
even though participating in 
orchestra, choir, and/or band. 
(For further details, please see 
the Department of Music offer- 
ings elsewhere in this catalog.) 

Theatre. The fine arts distribution 
requirement may be satisfied by select- 
ing any two of the following recom- 
mended courses: Theatre 10, 11, 14, 18, 
32, 33, or other courses with the consent 
of the instructor. 

Natural Science — Students are 
required to pass any two courses in one of 
the following disciplines: astronomy and 
physics, biology, or chemistry. 



History and Social Science — Stu- 
dents are required to pass two courses as 
indicated in economics, history, political 
science, psychology, or sociology/ 
anthropology. 

Economics. Any two courses. 

History. Any two courses, except 
History 31. 

Political Science. Any two courses. 

Psychology. Psychology 10 and one 
other course. 

Sociology /Anthropology. Sociology/ 
Anthropololgy 10 plus another course. 



THE DISTRIBUTION PROGRAM 
FOR THE BSN DEGREE 

English — standard require- 
ment as shown above. 
Mathematical Sciences — compe- 
tence in basic algebra as demon- 
strated by completion of, or 
exemption from Math 5; Mathe- 
matics 13; and Computer Science 
15 
Religion and Philosophy — Religion 

20 and Philosophy 19 
Fine Arts/Foreign Language — two 
courses from one department as 
follows: 

Art — any two (2) courses 
Literature — any two literature 
courses selected from the depart- 
ments of English and Foreign 
Languages and Literatures 
Music — any combination of eight 
(8) credits, including applied 
music, ensemble, and music 
department courses 
Theatre — any two (2) courses from 
among Theatre 10, 11, 14, 18. 
32, 33, or other courses with the 
consent of the instructor. 
Language — any two (2) courses at 
the intermediate or higher level. 
No student who has had two or 
more years of a given foreign 
language in high school shall be 
admitted to the elementary 
courses in that same language for 
credit, except by written permis- 
sion of the chairman of the 
department. 
Natural Science — Chemistry 8, 15 
Social Science — Psychology 10 and 
17; Sociology and Anthropology 
— one from among Soc 10, 14,20, 
28, and 29. 
Physical Education — standard 
requirement as shown on page 5. 



THE MAJOR 

Students are required to complete a series 
of courses in one departmental or inter- 
disciplinary (established or individual) 
major. Specific course requirements for 
each major offered by the College are 



listed in the curriculum section of this 
catalog. Students must earn a 2.0 or 
higher grade-point average in those 
courses stipulated as comprising the 
major. (This requirement is not met by 
averaging the grades for all courses com- 
pleted in the major department.) Stu- 
dents must declare a major by the begin- 
ning of their junior year. Departmental 
and established interdisciplinary majors 
are declared in the Office of the Regi- 
strar, whereas individual interdisciplin- 
ary majors must be approved by the 
Committee on Curriculum Develop- 
ment. Students may complete more than 
one major, each of which will be 
recorded on the transcript. Students may 
be removed from major status if they are 
not making satisfactory progress in the 
major. This action is taken by the Dean 
of the College upon the recommendation 
of the department, coordinating com- 
mittee (for established interdisciplinary 
majors), or Curriculum Development 
Committee (for individual interdisciplin- 
ary majors). The decision of the Dean of 
the College may be appealed to the 
Academic Standing Committee by the 
student involved or the recommending 
department or committee. 

Departmental Majors — Departmental 
majors are available in the following 
areas: 

Accounting 

Art 

Astronomy 

Biology 

Business Administration 

Chemistry 

Computer Science 

Economics 

English 

Foreign Languages and Literatures 

French, German, Spanish 
History 
Mathematics 
Music 
Nursing 
Philosophy 
Physics 

Political Science 
Psychology 
Religion 



Sociology/ Anthropology 
Theatre 

Established Interdisciplinary Majors 

— The following established interdis- 
ciplinary majors include course work in 
two or more departments: 

Accounting-Mathematical Sciences 

American Studies 

Criminal Justice 

International Studies 

Literature 

Mass Communication 

Near East Culture and Archaeology 

Individual Interdisciplinary Majors 

— Students may design a major that is 
unique to their needs and objectives and 
which combines course work in more 
than one department. This major is 
developed in consultation with the stu- 
dent's faculty adviser and with a panel of 
faculty members from each of the spon- 
soring departments. The application is 
acted upon by the Curriculum Develop- 
ment Committee. The major normally 
consists of 10 courses beyond those 
taken to satisfy the distribution require- 
ments. Students are expected to com- 
plete at least six courses at the junior or 
senior level. Examples of individual 
interdisciplinary majors are Racial and 
Cultural Minorities, Illustration in the 
Print Medium, Environmental Law, 
Advertising, Art/History, Art/Business, 
Human Behavior, and Images of Man. 

Major in Sculpture Leading to Bache- 
lor of Fine Arts Degree — Through a 
cooperative program with the Johnson 
Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture, 
Princeton, New Jersey, students may 
earn a BFA degree in sculpture. The 
major consists of a core academic pro- 
gram, a course of study in art, elective 
courses, and an apprenticeship at the 
Johnson Atelier. 



THE MINOR 

The College awards two kinds of minors, 
departmental and interdisciplinary, in 
recognition of concentrated course work 
in an area other than the student's major. 
All minors are subject to the following 
limitations: 

— a minor must include at leasl 
two courses which are not counted 
in the student's major. 

— a student may receive at most two 
minors. 

— students with two majors may 
receive only one minor; students 
with three majors may not receive a 
minor. 

— students may not receive a minor in 
their major discipline unless their 
major discipline is Art and the 
minor is Art History. (A discipline 
is any course of study in which a 
student can major. Tracks within 
majors are not separate discip- 
lines.) 

— a student may not receive a minor 
unless his average in the courses 
which count for his minor is a mini- 
mum of 2.00. 

— courses taken S/U may not be 
counted toward a minor. 

Students must declare their intention to 
minor by signing a form available in the 
Registrar's Office, getting required 
faculty signatures, and returning the 
completed form to the Records Room. 
When students complete a minor, the 
title will be indicated on their official 
transcript. Students must meet the 
requirements for the minor which are in 
effect at the time they declare a minor or 
which are in effect subsequent to that 
time and before they graduate. 



Departmental Minors — Require- 
ments for a departmental minor vary 
from department to department. Students 
interested in pursuing a departmental 
minor should consult that department for 
its policy regarding minors. 

Departmental minors are available in 
the following areas: 



ACCOUNTING 

Financial Accounting 

Managerial Accounting 

Federal Income Tax 
ART 

Art History 

Sculpture 

Painting 
BIOLOGY 
CHEMISTRY 
ECONOMICS 
ENGLISH 

English Literature 

Writing 
FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND 

LITERATURES 

French 

German 

Spanish 
HISTORY 

American History 

European History 

History 
MASS COMMUNICATION 
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 

Computer Science 

Mathematics 
PHILOSOPHY 

Philosophy 

Philosophy and Law 

Philosophy and Science 

The History of Philosophy 
POLITICAL SCIENCE 

Political Science 

Foreign Affairs 

Legal Studies 
PSYCHOLOGY 
RELIGION 
SOCIOLOGY/ANTHROPOLOGY 

Sociological & Anthropological 
Views of Religion 
THEATRE 

Theatre History & Literature 

Performance 

Technical Theatre 



Interdisciplinary Minors — Interdis- 
ciplinary minors include coursework in 
two or more departments. Students inter- 
ested in interdisciplinary minors should 
consult the faculty coordinator of that 
minor. An interdisciplinary minor is 
available in the following area: BIBLI- 
CAL LANGUAGES. 



ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 

One advantage of a small college is the 
rich experience gained by the close asso- 
ciation of students and faculty. The 
advisement program at Lycoming 
enables students to discuss academic and 
other problems as well as opportunities 
with faculty advisers, instructors, and 
the staffs of the Dean of the College and 
the Dean of Student Services. 

During the summer orientation, fresh- 
men are assigned a faculty adviser who is 
prepared to assist new students with the 
challenges of an unfamiliar social and 
academic environment. All students are 
required to have a faculty adviser. When 
students have declared a major, they are 
then assigned an adviser from within the 
major department or program. 

Although the advisement program is 
an important part of the Lycoming 
academic experience, students are 
expected to accept full responsibility for 
their academic programs, including 
satisfactory completion of program and 
College-wide requirements. 

Special advising for selected profes- 
sions is provided by the health, legal, and 
theological professions advisory com- 
mittees. Students interested in these pro- 
fessions should register with the appro- 
priate committee during their first 
semester of enrollment at Lycoming or 
immediately after they decide to enter 
these professions. 



Preparation for Health Professions 

— The program of pre-professional edu- 
cation for the health professions (allo- 
pathic, dental, osteopathic, podiatric and 
veterinary medicine, optometry, and 
pharmacy) is organized around a sound 
foundation in biology, chemistry, 
mathematics, and physics and a wide 
range of subject matter from the humani- 
ties, social sciences, and fine arts. At 
least three years of undergraduate study 
is recommended before entry into a pro- 
fessional school; the normal procedure is 
to complete the bachelor of arts degree. 
Students interested in one of the health 
professions or in an allied health career 
should make their intentions known to 



the admissions office when applying and 
to the Health Professions Advisory Com- 
mittee (HPAC) during their first semes- 
ter. The committee advises students con- 
cerning preparation for and application 
to health-professions schools. All pre- 
health professions students are invited to 
join the student Pre-Health Professions 
Association. (See also descriptions of the 
nursing program and of the cooperative 
programs in podiatric medicine, 
optometry, and medical technology.) 

Preparation for Legal Professions 

— Lycoming offers a strong academic 
preparation for students interested in law 
as a profession. Admission to law school 
is not predicated upon a particular major 
or area of study; rather, a student is 
encouraged to design a course of study 
(traditional or interdisciplinary major) 
which is of personal interest and signifi- 
cance. While no specific major is recom- 
mended, there are certain skills of parti- 
cular relevance to the pre-law student: 
clear writing, analytical thinking, and 
language comprehension. These skills 
should be developed during the under- 
graduate years. 

Pre-law students should register with 
the Legal Professions Advisory Com 
mittee (LPAC) upon entering Lycoming 
and should join the Pre-Law Society on 
campus. LPAC assists the pre-law stu- 
dent through advisement, compilation of 
recommendations, and dissemination of 
information and materials about law and 
the legal profession. It sponsors Pre- 
LSAT workshops to help prepare stu- 
dents for the law boards. The Pre-Law 
Society has sponsored films, speakers, 
and field trips, including visits to law 
school campuses. 

Preparation for Theological Profes- 
sions — The Theological Professions 
Advisory Commiteee (TPAC) acts as a 
"center" for students, faculty, and cler- 
gy to discuss the needs of students who 
want to prepare themselves for the mini- 
stry, religious education, advanced 
training in religion, or related vocations. 
Also, it may help coordinate internships 
for students who desire practical experi- 
ence in the parish ministry or related 



areas. Upon entering Lycoming, stu- 
dents should register with TPAC if they 
plan to investigate the religious voca- 
tions. 

In general, students preparing to 
attend a theological seminary should 
examine the suggestions set down by the 
Association of Theological Schools 
(available from TPAC). Recommended 
is a broad program in the liberal arts, a 
major in one of the humanities (English, 
history, languages, literature, philoso- 
phy, religion) or one of the social sci- 
ences (American studies, criminal jus- 
tice, economics, international studies, 
political science, psychology, 
sociology-anthropology), and a variety 
of electives. Students preparing for a 
career in religious education should 
major in religion and elect five or six 
courses in psychology, education, and 
sociology. This program of study will 
qualify students to work as an education- 
al assistant or a director of religious edu- 
cation after graduate study in a theologi- 
cal seminary. 



REGISTRATION 

During the registration period, students 
select their courses for the next semester 
and register their course selections in the 
Office of the Registrar. Course selection 
is made in consultation with the student's 
faculty advisor in order to insure that the 
course schedule is consistent with Col- 
lege requirements and student goals. 
After the registration period, any change 
in the student's course schedule must be 
approved by both the faculty advisor and 
Office of the Registrar. Students may not 
receive credit for courses in which they 
are not formally registered. 

During the first five days of classes, 
students may drop any course without 
any record of such enrollment appearing 
on the permanent record, and they may 
add any course that is not closed. Stu- 
dents wishing to drop a course between 
the fifth day and the 1 2th week of classes 
must secure a withdrawal form from the 
Office of the Registrar, which is pre- 
sented to the instructor of the course in 
question, who assigns a withdrawal 



grade based on the level of the student's 
performance from the beginning of the 
course to the date of withdrawal. With- 
drawal grades are not computed in the 
grade point average. Students may not 
withdraw from courses after the 12th 
week of a semester and the comparable 
period during the May and summer 
terms. 

In two-credit ( '/: unit) courses meeting 
only during the last half of any semester, 
students may drop/add for a period of 
five days, effective with the mid-term 
date shown on the academic calendar. 
Withdrawal from half-semester courses 
with a withdrawal grade may occur 
within six weeks of the beginning of the 
course. It is understood that the period of 
time at the beginning of the semester and 
at the mid-point of the semester will be 
identical; for example, a period of five 
days as indicated above. 

THE UNIT COURSE SYSTEM 

Instruction at Lycoming College is 
organized, with few exceptions, on a 
departmental basis. Most courses are 
unit courses, meaning that each course 
taken is considered to be equivalent to 
four semester hours of credit. Exceptions 
occur in applied music courses, which 
are offered for either one-half of one 
semester hour of credit, and in depart- 
ments that have elected to offer certain 
courses for the equivalent of two semes- 
ter hours of credit. Further, independent 
studies and internships carrying two 
semester hours of credit may be 
designed. The normal student course 
load is four courses during the fall and 
spring semesters. Students who elect to 
attend the special sessions may enroll in 
one course during the May term and one 
or two courses in the summer term. A 
student is considered full time when 
enrolled for a minimum of three courses 
during the fall or spring semesters, one 
course for the May term, and two courses 
for the summer term. Students may 
enroll in five courses during the fall and 
spring semesters if they are Lycoming 
Scholars or were admitted to the Dean's 
List at the end of the previous semester. 
Exceptions may be granted by the Dean 



of the College. Overloads are not per- 
mitted during the May and summer 
terms. 



THE SYSTEM OF GRADING 
AND REPORTING OF GRADES 

The evaluation of student performance in 
credit courses is indicated by the use of 
traditional letter symbols. These sym- 
bols and their definitions are as follows: 

A Excellent — Signifies superior 
achievement through mastery of content 
or skills and demonstration of creative 
and independent thinking. 
B High Pass — Signifies better-than- 
average achievement wherein the student 
reveals insight and understanding. 
C Pass — Signifies satisfactory 
achievement wherein the student's work 
has been of average quality and quantity. 
The student has demonstrated basic com- 
petence in the subject area and may 
enroll in additional course work. 
D Low Pass — Signifies unsatisfactory 
achievement wherein the student met 
only the minimum requirements for 
passing the course and should not con- 
tinue in the subject area without depart- 
mental advice. 

F Failing — Signifies that the student 
has not met the minimum requirements 
for passing the course. 
1 Incomplete Work — Assigned in 
accordance with the restrictions of 
established academic policy. 
R A Repeated Course — Students shall 
have the option of repeating courses for 
which they already have received a pass- 
ing grade in addition to those which they 
have failed. No credit is received for the 
second attempt. Grades will be aver- 
aged. 

S Passing Work, no grade assigned — 
Converted from traditional grade of F. 
U Failing work, no grade assigned — 
converted from traditional grade of F. 
X Audit — Work as an auditor for which 
no credit is earned. 

W Withdrawal — Signifies withdrawal 
from the course early in the term when it 
cannot be determined that the student is 



passing or failing. 

WP Withdrawal, passing — The stu- 
dent was passing at the time of withdraw- 
al; no credit is earned. 
WF Withdrawal, failing — The student 
was failing at the time of withdrawal; no 
credit is earned. 

The cumulative grade point average 
(GPA) is calculated by multiplying qual- 
ity points by credits and dividing the total 
quality points by the total credits. A 
quality point is the unit of measurement 
of the quality of work done by the stu- 
dent. 





Quality Points 




Earned 


Grade 


for each semester 




hour 


A Excellent 


4 


B High Pass 


3 


C Pass 


2 


D Low Pass 


1 


F Failing 






The grade point average for the major 
is calculated in the same manner for the 
courses required for the major. 

A minimum of 2.00 is required for the 
cumulative grade point average and for 
the grade point average in the major to 
meet the requirements for graduation. 
You cannot compute your cumulative 
GPA by averaging your semester GPA' s . 

Use of the satisfactory/unsatisfactory 
grading option is limited as follows (this 
does not apply to Education 5 and Engl- 
ish 5): 

— students may enroll on an 
S/U basis in no more than one 
course per semester and no more 
than four courses during the under- 
graduate career. 

— S/U courses completed after decla- 
ration of the major may not be used 
to satisfy a requirement of that 
major, including courses required 
by the major department which are 
offered by other departments. 
(Instructor-designated courses are 
excepted from this limitation.) 

— courses for which a grade of S is 
recorded may not be used toward 



fulfillment of any distribution 
requirement. 

- students may not enroll in English 
6 on an S/U basis. 

- a course selected on an S/U basis 
which is subsequently withdrawn 
will not count toward the four- 
course limit. 

- instructor-designated courses may 
be offered during the May term 
with the approval of the Dean of 
the College. Such courses are not 
counted toward the four-course 
limit. 

- S/U grades are not computed in the 
grade point average. 

- students electing the S/U option 
may designate a minimum accep- 
tance letter grade of A or B. If the 
letter grade actually earned by the 
student equals or exceeds this mini- 
mum, that letter grade is entered on 
the student's permanent record and 
is computed in the grade point 
average. In such a case, the course 
does not count toward the four- 
course limit. If the student does not 
indicate a minimum acceptable 
letter grade or if the letter grade 
actually earned is lower than the 
minimum designated by the stu- 
dent, the Registrar substitutes an S 
for any passing grade (A, B, C, or 
D) and a U for an F grade. 

- students receiving either an S or U 
grade are not eligible for the 
Dean's List for that semester. 

- students must declare the S/U 
option before the end of the period 
during which courses may be 
added during any given semester, 
half-semester, or term. 

- instructors are not notified which 
of their students are enrolled on an 
S/U basis. 

- students electing the S/U option are 
expected to perform the same work 
as tho.se enrolled on a regular basis. 

Incomplete grades may be given 
if, for absolutely unavoidable rea- 
sons (usually medical in nature), 
the student has not been able to 
complete the work requisite to the 
course. An incomplete grade must 



10 



be removed within six weeks of the 
next regular semester. 

Students shall have the option of 
repeating courses for which they 
already have received a passing 
grade in addition to those which 
they have failed. Recording of 
grades for all repeated courses shall 
be governed by the following con- 
ditions: 

— a course may be repeated 
only one time. 

— both attempts will be recorded on 
the student's transcript. 

— credit for the course will be given 
only once. 

— for the purpose of determining the 
student's GPA, the average grade 
received for the two attempts will 
be used as if it were the grade for a 
single course. 

— a repeated course will be counted 
toward the total number of unsuc- 
cessful attempts. 



ATTENDANCE 

The academic program at Lycoming is 
based upon the assumption that there is 
value in class attendance for all students. 
Individual instructors have the preroga- 
tive of establishing reasonable absence 
regulations in any course. The student is 
responsible for learning and observing 
these regulations. 



STUDENT RECORDS 

The policy regarding student educational 
records is designed to protect the privacy 
of students against unwarranted intru- 
sions and is consistent with Section 438 
of the General Education Provision Act 
(commonly known as the Family Educa- 
tional Rights and Privacy Act of 1974, as 
amended). The details of the College 
policy on student records and the proce- 
dures for gaining access to student 
records are contained in the current issue 
of The Pathfinder, which is available in 
the library and the Office of the Dean of 
the College. 



ACADEMIC STANDING AND 
ACADEMIC HONESTY 

Students will be placed on academic 
probation if either the number of hours 
completed or cumulative grade point 
average falls below the following stan- 
dards: 

Semester Hours Cumulative 

(Full-time) Completed GPA 

1 12 1.66 

2 24 1.85 

3 40 1 .90 

4 56 2.00 

5 72 2.00 

6 88 2.00 

7 104 2.00 

8 120 2.00 

In order to meet graduation require- 
ments, students must complete 128 cre- 
dit hours. Students who are enrolled part 
time or for fewer than the normal four 
courses per term will be expected to 
complete an equivalent proportion of 
their program each semester. 

Students will be subject to suspension 
from the College if they: 

— are on probation for two con- 
secutive semesters; 

— achieve a grade point average of 
1.00 or below during any one 
semester. 

Students will be subject to dismissal 
from the College if they: 

— can not resonably complete all 
requirements for a degree; 

— exceed 24 semester hours of unsuc- 
cessful course attempts (grades of 
F, U, W, -WP, WF, and R) except 
in the case of withdrawal for medi- 
cal or psychological reasons. 

The integrity of the academic process of 
the College requires honesty in all phases 
of the instructional program. The Col- 
lege assumes that students are committed 
to the principle of academic honesty. 
Students who fail to honor this commit- 
ment are subject to dismissal. Procedural 
guidelines and rules for the adjudication 



of cases of academic dishonesty are 
printed in The Faculty Handbook and 
The Pathfinder (the student academic 
handbook ) . copies of which are available 
in the library. 



CREDIT BY EXAMINATION 

Advanced Placement — Entering fresh- 
men who have completed an advanced 
course while in secondary school and 
who have taken the appropriate 
advanced-placement examination of the 
College Entrance Examination Board 
(CEEB) are encouraged to apply for cre- 
dit and advanced placement at the time of 
admission. A grade of three or above is 
considered satisfactory. Students should 
inform the Registrar's Office and their 
academic advisor immediately when 
advanced placement examinations have 
been taken. 

College Level Examination Pro- 
gram (CLEP) — Students may earn 
college credit for superior achievement 
through CLEP. By achieving at the 75th 
percentile or above on the General 
Examinations and the 65th percentile or 
above on approved Subject Examina- 
tions, students may earn up to 50 percent 
of the course requirements for a bachelor 
of arts degree. Although these examina- 
tions may be taken after enrollment, new 
students who are competent in a given 
area are encouraged to take the examina- 
tion of their choice during the second 
semester of their senior year so that 
Lycoming will have the test scores avail- 
able for registration advisement for the 
first semester of enrollment. Further 
information about CLEP may be 
obtained through the secondary-school 
guidance office or the Office of Admis- 
sions at Lycoming College. Students 
should inform the Registrar's Office and 
their academic advisor immediately 
when CLEP examinations have been 
taken. 

ACADEMIC HONORS 

Dean's List — Students are admitted to 
the Dean's List at the end of the fall and 



11 



spring semesters if they have completed 
at least 15 credits with other than S/U or 
R grades, and have a minimum grade 
point average of 3.50 for the semester. 

Graduation Honors — Students are 
awarded the bachelor of arts degree, the 
bachelor of fine arts degree, or the 
bachelor of science in nursing degree 
with honors when they have earned the 
following grade point averages based on 
all courses attempted at Lycoming, with 
a minimum of 64 credits (16 units) 
required for a student to be eligible for 
honors: 

summa cum laude 3.90-4.00 

magna cum laude 3.50-3.89 

cum laude 3.25-3.49 

Academic Honor Awards, Prizes, 
and Societies — Superior academic 
achievement is recognized through the 
conferring of awards and prizes at the 
annual Honors Day convocation and 
Commencement and through election to 
membership in honor societies. 

Societies 

Blue Key Freshmen Men 

Gold Key Freshmen Women 

Beta Beta Beta Biology 

Omicron Delta Epsilon.. Economics 

Phi Alpha Theta History 

Phi Sigma Tau Philosophy 

Sigma Pi Sigma Physics 

Pi Sigma Alpha.... Political Science 

Psi Chi Psychology 

Pi Gamma Mu Social Science 

Phi Kappa Phi ... General Academic 

Prizes and Awards 

American Chemical Society Award — 
The award, sponsored by the Susquehan- 
na Valley Chapter of the society, is given 
to the outstanding senior in chemistry 
who plans to enter the profession. 

Accounting Society Service Award — 
The award is given for outstanding ser- 
vice to the Lycoming College Account- 
ing Society. 

American Institute of Chemists Prize — 
The prize, given by the Philadelphia sec- 



tion of the institute, goes to the senior 
major for excellence in chemistry. 

Byron C. Brunstetter Science Award — 
The award is given for outstanding 
achievement in chemical and biological 
sciences. 

CRC Press Chemistry Achievement 
Award — The award is given to the 
freshman who has exhibited outstanding 
academic achievement in chemistry. 

Chieftain Award — The College's most 
prestigious award is given to the senior 
who has contributed most to Lycoming 
through support of school activities; who 
has exhibited outstanding leadership 
qualities; who has worked effectively 
with other members of the College com- 
munity; who has evidenced a good moral 
code; and whose academic rank is above 
the median for the preceding senior 
class. 

Civic Choir Award — The award is given 
to the College choir member who has 
outstanding musical ability and who has 
made significant leadership contribu- 
tions to the choir. 

Class of 1907 Prize — The prize is given 
to the senior who has been oustanding in 
the promotion of College spirit through 
participation in athletics and other activ- 
ities. 

Benjamin C. Conner Prize — The prize 
is given to the graduating student who 
has done outstanding work in mathema- 
tics. 

Durkheim Award — The award is given 
to the senior sociology/anthropology 
major who has done outstanding work in 
the field. 

Bishop William Perry Eveland Prize — 
The prize is given to the senior who has 
shown progress in scholarship, loyalty, 
.school spirit, and participation in school 
activities. 

Excellence in Two-Dimensional Art 
Award — The award is given to the 



outstanding senior art major in this field. 

Excellence in Three-Dimensional Art 
Award — The award is given to the 
outstanding senior art major in this field. 

Excellence in Theatre Performance 
Award — The award is given to the 
student who has been outstanding as a 
performer in the Arena Theatre. 

Excellence in Technical Theatre Award 
— The award is given to the student who 
has been outstanding as a technician for 
the Arena Theatre. 

Excellence in Political Science Award — 
The award goes to the senior political 
science major who has performed with 
excellence. 

J. W. Ferree Award — Given in memory 
of the first mathematics professor at 
Lycoming's forerunner, the Dickinson 
Seminary, the award goes to the student 
most active in mathematical sciences. 

Faculty Prize — The prize is given to the 
commuting student with satisfactory 
scholarship and who has been outstand- 
ing in promotion of school spirit through 
participation in school activities. 

Durani L. Furey HI Memorial Prize — 
The prize is given to the senior account- 
ing major who has shown outstanding 
achievement in accounting. 

Gillette Foreign Language Prizes — The 
prizes are given to the French, German, 
and Spanish majors who have achieved 
excellence in foreign languages. 

John P. Graham Award — Named in 
honor of a professor emeritus, the award 
is given to the senior English major who 
achieves the highest average in English. 

Edward J. Gray Prizes — The prizes are 
given to the graduating students with the 
highest and second highest averages. 

Dan Gustafson Award — In memory of a 
former member of the English Depart- 
ment, the award is given to the senior 



12 



English major whose analytical writing 
demonstrates the highest standards of 
literary and critical excellence. 

IRUSKA Awards — The awards denote 
membership in the society for juniors 
who are very active on campus. 

Junior Book Award — The award is 
given to the outstanding junior political 
science major. 

Elisha Benson Kline Prize — The prize is 
given to the senior mathematics major 
with outstanding achievement in the 
field. 

Charles J. Kocian Awards — The 
awards are given to the accounting, busi- 
ness administration, and economics 
majors who show the greatest proficien- 
cy in statistics; the mathematics major 
who shows the greatest proficiency in 
applied mathematics; the graduating 
senior who shows the greatest proficien- 
cy in computer science and operations 
research; the graduating senior, business 
administration major, with highest grade 
point average and the graduating senior 
with highest average in the class. 

Don Lincoln Larrabee Law Prize — The 
prize is given to the graduating student 
who has shown outstanding scholarship 
in legal principles. 

C Daniel and Jeanne Little Award — 
Presented in memory of two Lycoming 
alumni, the award is given to the out- 
standing student in public administra- 
tion. 

The Makisu Award — The award is given 
for outstanding service to the college 
community, for dedication above and 
beyond the realm of one's obligations to 
the College. 

John C. McCune Memorial Prizes — 
The prizes are given to the senior majors 
in mathematics, biology, chemistry, 
physics, philosophy, and psychology 
who have attained the highest averages. 

Ethel McDonald Pax Christi Award — 



The award is given for outstanding but 
quiet consistency in the life of faith and 
the practice of Christianity, noteworthy 
personal integrity and humble loving 
compassion expressed in daily life. 

WalterG. Mclver Award — Named after 
Lycoming's former choir director, the 
award is given to the choir member who 
has made outstanding campus contribu- 
tions outside of choir. 

Pennsylvania Institute of Certified Pub- 
lic Accountants Award — The award is 
given to the senior accounting major who 
has demonstrated high scholastic stand- 
ing and qualities of leadership. 

Pocahontas Award — The award is 
given to Lycoming's outstanding female 
athlete. 

Psi Chi Sen'ice Award — The award is 
given for contributions to the Psychology 
Department. 

Research and Writing Prize in History — 
The prize is given to the student who 
does the best work in History 45. 

Mar)- L. Russell Award — Named in 
honor of a professor emeritus of music, 
the award is given for outstanding musi- 
cal achievement. 

Sadler Prize — The prize is given to the 
student with the highest achievement in 
calculus, foundations of mathematics, 
algebra, and analysis. 

Senior Management Award — The 
award is given to the senior business 
major with the best senior project in 
Business Administration 41. 

Senior Scholarship Prize in History — 
The prize is given to the senior major 
with the highest average. 

Service to Lycoming Award — Spon- 
sored by the Office of Student Services, 
the award is given to students who have 
made outstanding contributions to 
Lycoming. 



Frances K. Skeath Award — The award 
is given to the senior with outstanding 
achievement in mathematics. 

J. Milton Skeath Award — The award is 
given for superior undergraduate 
achievement and potential for further 
work in psychology. 

John A. Streeter Memorial Award in 
Economics — The award is given to the 
graduating student with outstanding 
achievement in economics. 

Tomahawk Award — The award is given 
to Lycoming's outstanding male athlete. 

Trask Chemistry Prize — The prize is 
given to the senior chemistry major who 
has done outstanding work in the field. 

Wall Street Journal Awards — Two 
awards are given. One is given to the 
senior business major for excellence in 
the field and service to the College com- 
munity. A second award is given for 
excellence in economics. 

Sol "Woody" Wolf Award — The award 
is given to the junior athlete who has 
shown the most improvement. 

Women of Lycoming Scholarship — The 
scholarship is given to the junior woman 
student who has shown satisfactory 
scholarship, outstanding school spirit, 
and who is active in campus activities. 

Departmental Honors — Honors pro- 
jects are normally undertaken only in a 
student's major, and are available only to 
exceptionally well-qualified students 
who have a solid background in the area 
of the project and are capable of consid- 
erable self-direction. The prerequisites 
for registration in an honors program are 
as follows: 

— a faculty member from the 
department(s) in which the honors 
project is to be undertaken must 
agree to be the director and must 
secure departmental approval of 
the project. 

— the director, in consultation with 



13 



the student, must convene a com- 
mittee consisting of two faculty 
members from the department in 
which the project is to be underta- 
ken, one of whom is the director of 
the project, and one faculty mem- 
ber from each of two other depart- 
ments related to the subject matter 
of the study. 

— the honors committee must then 
certify by their signatures on the 
application that the project in 
question is academically legitimate 
and worthy of pursuit as an honors 
project, and that the student in 
question is qualified to pursue the 
project. 

— the project must be approved by the 
Committee on Individual Studies. 

Students successfully complete hon- 
ors projects by satisfying the following 
conditions in accordance with guide- 
lines established by the Committee on 
Individual Studies: 

— the student must produce a sub- 
stantial research paper, critical 
study, or creative project. If the 
end product is a creative project, a 
critical paper analyzing the tech- 
niques and principles employed 
and the nature of the achievement 
represented in the project shall be 
submitted. 

— the student must successfully 
explain and defend the work in a 
final oral examination given by the 
honors committee. 

— the honors committee must certify 
that the student has successfully 
defended the project, and that the 
student's achievement is clearly 
superior to that which would ordi- 
narily by required to earn a grade of 
"A" in a regular independent- 
studies course. 

— the Committee on Individual Stu- 
dies must certify that the student 
has satisfied all of the conditions 
mentioned above. 

Except in unusual circumstances, honors 
projects are expected to involve indepen- 
dent studv in two consecutive unit 



courses. Successful completion of the 
honors project will cause the designation 
of honors in that department to be placed 
upon the permanent record. Acceptable 
theses are deposited in the College 
library. In the event that the study is not 
completed successfully or is not deemed 
worthy of honors, the student shall be 
re-registered in independent studies and 
given a final grade for the course. 



SPECIAL FEATURES 

Independent Studies — Independent 
studies are available to any qualified 
student who wishes to engage in and 
receive academic credit for any academi- 
cally legitimate course of study for which 
he or she could not otherwise receive 
credit. It may be pursued at any level 
(introductory, intermediate, or 
advanced) and in any department, 
whether or not the student is a major in 
that department. Studies projects which 
duplicate catalog courses are sometimes 
possible, and are subject to the same 
provisions which apply to all studies 
projects. In order for a student to be 
registered in an independent-study 
course, the following conditions must be 
satisfied; 

— an appropriate member of the 
faculty must agree to supervise the 
project and must certify by signing 
the application form that the pro- 
ject is academically legitimate and 
involves an amount of work appro- 
priate for the amount of academic 
credit requested, and that the stu- 
dent in question is qualified to 
pursue the project. 

— the studies project must be 
approved by the chairman of the 
department in which the studies 
project is to be undertaken. 

— after the project is approved by the 
instructor and by the chairman of 
the appropriate department, the 
studies project must be approved 
by the Committee on Individual 
Studies. 

In addition, participation in 



independent-studies projects, with the 
exception of those which duplicate cata- 
log courses, is subject to the following: 

— students may not engage in more 
than one independent-studies pro- 
ject during any given semester. 

— students may not engage in more 
than two independent-studies pro- 
jects during their academic careers 
at Lycoming College. 

As with other academic policies, any 
exceptions to these two rules must be 
approved by the Academic Standing 
Committee. 

Internship Program — An internship is 
a course jointly sponsored by the College 
and a public or private agency or subdivi- 
sion of the College in which a student is 
enabled to earn college credit by partici- 
pating in some active capacity as an 
assistant, aide, or apprentice. At least 
one-half of the effort expended by the 
intern should consist of academic work 
related to agency situations. The objec- 
tives of the internship program are ( 1 ) to 
further the development of a central core 
of values, awarenesses, strategies, 
skills, and information through experi- 
ences outside the classroom or other 
campus situations, and (2) to facilitate 
the integration of theory and practice by 
encouraging students to relate their on- 
campus academic experiences more 
directly to society in general and to possi- 
ble career and other post-baccalaureate 
objectives in particular. 

Any junior or senior student in good 
academic standing may petition the 
Committee on Individual Studies for 
approval to serve as an intern. A maxi- 
mum of 16 credits can be earned through 
the internship program. Guidelines for 
program development, assignment of 
tasks and academic requirements, such 
as exams, papers, reports, grades, etc., 
are established in consultation with a 
faculty director at Lycoming and an 
agency supervisor at the place of intern- 
ship. 

Students with diverse majors have 
participated in a wide variety of intern- 
ships, including those with the Allen- 



14 



wood Federal Prison Camp, Lycoming 
County Commissioners Office, Depart- 
ment of Environmental Resources, Head 
Start, Lycoming County Historical Soci- 
ety, business and accounting firms, law 
offices, hospitals, social service agen- 
cies, banks, and Congressional offices. 

May Term — The May term is a four- 
week voluntary session designed to pro- 
vide students with courses listed in the 
catalog and experimental and special 
courses that are not normally available 
during the fall and spring semesters and 
summer term. Some courses are offered 
on campus; others involve travel. A 
number offer interdisciplinary credit. 
Illustrations of the types of courses 
offered during the May term are: 

(a) Study-Travel: Cultural tours of 
Germany, Spain, and France; Archae- 
logical expeditions to the Middle East; 
Anthropological expeditions to study 
tri-cultural communities in New Mexico; 
Utopian Communities; Revolutionary 
and Civil War Sites; Colonial America 
on Tour; Art on the East Coast; The New 
Kingdom in Ancient Egypt. 

(b) On-Campus: Field Geology, Field 
Ornithology, Energy Economics, Wri- 
ter's Seminar, Psychology of Group Pro- 
cesses, Collective Bargaining, Aquatic 
Biology, Medical Genetics, Energy 
Alternatives, White Collar Crime, Las- 
ers and their Applications, Selected 
Short Story Writers and their Works. 
Popular Forms of Contemporary Fiction, 
Administrative and Organizational 
Behavior of Police, Plant and Green- 
house Management, and Street Law. 

Although participation in the May 
term is voluntary, student response has 
been outstanding with approximately 20 
percent of the student body enrolling. In 
addition to the courses themselves, 
attractions include small and informal 
classes and reduced tuition rates. 

Study Abroad — Students have the 
opportunity to study abroad under aus- 
pices of approved universities and agen- 
cies. While study abroad is particularly 
attractive to students majoring in foreign 
languages and literatures, this opportun- 
ity is open to all students in good 



academic standing. Mastery of a foreign 
language is desirable but not required in 
all programs. Dr. Richard Barker, assis- 
tant professor of foreign languages and 
literatures, serves as coordinator for the 
Study Abroad Program. Interested stu- 
dents may contact him about opportuni- 
ties available and procedural questions. 

NOTE: Lycoming College cannot assume 
responsibility for the health, safety, or welfare 
of any student engaged in or en route to or from 
any off-campus study or activity not under the 
exclusive jurisdiction of this institution. 

Auditors — Any person may audit 
courses at Lycoming at one-fourth tui- 
tion per course. Laboratory and other 
special fees must be paid in full. Exami- 
nations, papers, and other evaluation 
devices are not required of auditors, but 
individual arrangements may be made to 
complete such exercises with the consent 
of the instructor. The option to audit a 
course must be declared during the same 
period (currently five days) at the begin- 
ning of each semester, half-semester, or 
term as drop/add and pass/fail and must 
be completed in the Registrar's Office. 

Part Time Students — Students who 
do not wish to pursue a degree at 
Lycoming College may, if space per- 
mits, register for credit or audit courses 
on either a part-time or full-time basis. 
Students who register for one or two 
courses are considered to be enrolled part 
time; students who register for three or 
four courses are considered to be 
enrolled full time. 

Anyone wishing to register as a 
non — degree student must fill out an 
application form in the Admissions 
Office, pay a one-time application fee of 
$20, and pay the tuition rate in effect at 
the time of each enrollment. After a 
non-degree student has attempted four 
courses, the Dean of the College reserves 
the right to grant or deny permission to 
continue to register in this category. 

All non-degree students are subject to 
the general laws and regulations of the 
College as stated in the College Catalog 
and the Student Handbook. The College 
reserves the right to deny permission to 
register to individuals who do not meet 



the standards of the College. 

Students who wish to change from a 
non-degree to a degree status must re- 
apply (with no application fee) and satis- 
fy all conditions for admission and 
registration in effect at the time of appli- 
cation for degree status. 

COOPERATIVE PROGRAMS 

Lycoming has developed several 
cooperative programs to provide stu- 
dents with opportunities to extend their 
knowledge, abilities, and talents in 
selected areas through access to the spe- 
cialized academic programs and facili- 
ties of other colleges, universities, 
academies, and hospitals. Although 
thorough advisement and curricular 
planning are provided for each of the 
cooperative programs, admission to 
Lycoming and registration in the pro- 
gram of choice do not guarantee admis- 
sion to the cooperating institution. The 
prerogative of admitting students to the 
cooperative aspect of the program rests 
with the cooperating institution. Stu- 
dents who are interested in a cooperative 
program should contact the coordinator 
during the first week of the first semester 
of their enrollment at Lycoming. This is 
necessary to plan their course programs 
in a manner that will insure completion 
of required courses according to the 
schedule stipulated for the program. All 
cooperative programs require special 
coordination of course scheduling at 
Lycoming. 

Engineering — Combining the 
advantages of a liberal-arts education 
and the technical training of an engi- 
neering curriculum, this program is 
offered in conjunction with Bucknell 
University and The Pennsylvania State 
University. Students complete three 
years of study at Lycoming and two years 
at the cooperating university. Upon satis- 
factory completion of the first year of 
engineering studies, Lycoming awards 
the bachelor of arts degree. When stu- 
dents successfully complete the second 
year of engineering studies, the cooper- 
ating university awards the bachelor of 
science degree in engineering. 



15 



At Lycoming, students complete the 
distribution program and courses in 
physics, mathematics, and chemistry. 
Engineering specialties offered at Buck- 
nell University include chemical, civil, 
electrical, and mechanical. The Pennsyl- 
vania State University offers aerospace, 
agricultural, chemical, civil, electrical, 
engineering science, environmental, 
industrial, mechanical, and nuclear engi- 
neering. 

Forestry or Environmental Studies 

— Lycoming College offers a coopera- 
tive program with Duke University in 
environmental management and fore- 
stry. Qualified students can earn the 
bachelor's and master's degrees in five 
years, spending three years at Lycoming 
and two years at Duke. All Lycoming 
distribution and major requirements 
must be completed by the end of the 
junior year. At the end of the first year at 
Duke, the B.A. degree will be awarded 
by Lycoming. Duke will award the pro- 
fessional degree of Master of Forestry or 
Master of Environmental Management 
to qualified candidates at the end of the 
second year. 

The major program emphases at Duke 
are Natural Resources Science/Ecology, 
Natural Resources Systems Science, and 
Natural Resources Economics/Policy. 
The program is flexible enough, howev- 
er, to accommodate a variety of individu- 
al designs. An undergraduate major in 
one of the natural sciences, social sci- 
ences, or business may provide good 
preparation for the programs at Duke, 
but a student with any undergraduate 
concentration will be considered for 
admission. All students need at least two 
courses each in biology, mathematics, 
and economics. 

Students begin the program at Duke in 
July after their junior year at Lycoming 
with a one-month session of field work in 
natural resource measurements. They 
must complete a total of 60 units which 
generally takes four semesters. 

Some students prefer to complete the 
bachelor's degree before undertaking 
graduate study at Duke. The master's 
degree requirements for these students 
are the same as for those students enter- 



ing after the junior year, but the 60-unit 
requirement may be reduced for com- 
pleted relevant undergraduate work of 
satisfactory quality. All credit reductions 
are determined individually and consider 
the student's educational background 
and objectives. 

Medical Technology — Students 
desiring a career in medical technology 
may either complete a bachelor of arts 
program followed by a clinical internship 
at any American Medical Association- 
accredited hospital, or they may com- 
plete the cooperative program. Students 
electing the cooperative program nor- 
mally study for three years at Lycoming, 
during which time they complete 24 unit 
courses, including the College distribu- 
tion requirements, a major, and require- 
ments of the National Accrediting Agen- 
cy for Clinical Laboratory Sciences 
( N A ACLS ) . The current requirements of 
the NAACLS are: four courses in chem- 
istry (one of which must be either organic 
or bio-chemistry): four courses in biolo- 
gy (including courses in microbiology 
and immunology), and one course in 
mathematics. 

Students in the cooperative program 
usually major in biology, following a 
modified major of six unit courses that 
exempts them from Ecology (Biology 
24) and Plant Sciences (Biology 25). 
Students must take either Microbiology 
(Biology 21) or Microbiology for the 
Health Sciences (Biology 26), and either 
Animal Physiology (Biology 23) or Cell 
Physiology (Biology 35). The coopera- 
tive program requires successful com- 
pletion of a one-year internship at an 
American Medical Association- 
accredited hospital. Lycoming is affil- 
iated with the following accredited hos- 
pitals: Divine Providence, Robert Pack- 
er, Lancaster, and Abington. Students in 
the cooperative program receive credit at 
Lycoming for each of eight unit courses 
in biology and chemistry successfully 
completed during the clinical internship. 
Successful completion of the Registry 
Examination is not considered a gradu- 
tion requirement at Lycoming College. 

Students entering a clinical internship 
for one year after graduation from 



Lycoming must complete all of the 
requirements of the cooperative pro- 
gram, but are not eligible for the biology 
major exemptions indicated above. 
Upon graduation, such students may 
apply for admission to a clinical program 
at any hospital. 

Optometry — Through the Acceler- 
ated Optometry Education Curriculum 
Program, students interested in a career 
in optometry may qualify for admission 
to the Pennsylvania College of Optomet- 
ry after only three years at Lycoming 
College. After four years at the Pennsyl- 
vania College of Optometry, a student 
will earn a Doctor of Optometry degree. 
Selection of candidates for the profes- 
sional segment of the program is com- 
pleted by the admissions committee of 
the Pennsylvania College of Optometry 
during the student's third year at 
Lycoming. (This is one of two routes that 
students may choose. Any student, of 
course, may follow the regular applica- 
tion procedures for admission to the 
Pennsylvania College of Optometry or 
another college of optometry to matricu- 
late following completion of his or her 
baccalaureate program.) During the 
three years at Lycoming College, the 
student will complete 24 unit courses, 
including all distribution requirements, 
and will prepare for his or her profession- 
al training by obtaining a solid founda- 
tion in biology, chemistry, physics, and 
mathematics. During the first year of 
study at the Pennsylvania College of 
Optometry, the student will take 39 
semester hours of basic science courses 
in addition to introductions to optometry 
and health care. Successful completion 
of the first year of professional training 
will complete the course requirements 
for the B.A. degree at Lycoming Col- 
lege. 

Most students will find it convenient 
to major in biology in order to satisfy the 
requirements of Lycoming College and 
the Pennsylvania College of Optometry. 
Such students are allowed to complete a 
modified biology major which will 
exempt them from two biology courses: 
Ecology (Biology 24) and Plant Sciences 
(Biology 25). (This modified major 



16 



requires the successful completion of the 
initial year at the Pennsylvania College 
of Optometry.) Students desiring other 
majors must coordinate their plans with 
the Health Professions Advisory Com- 
mittee in order to insure that they have 
satisfied all requirements. 

Podiatry — Students interested in 
podiatry may either seek admission to a 
college of pediatric medicine upon com- 
pletion of the bachelor of arts degree or 
through the Accelerated Podiatric Medi- 
cal Education-Curriculum Program 
(APMEC). The latter program provides 
an opportunity for students to qualify for 
admission to the Pennsylvania College of 
Podiatric Medicine (PCPM) or the Ohio 
College of Podiatric Medicine (OCPM) 
after three years of study at Lycoming. 
At Lycoming, students in the APMEC 
program must successfully complete 24 
unit courses, including the distribution 
program and a basic foundation in biolo- 
gy, chemistry, physics, and mathema- 
tics. During the first year of study at 
PCPM or OCPM. students must success- 
fully complete a program of basic sci- 
ence courses and an introduction to 
podiatry. Successful completion of the 
first year of professional training will 
contribute toward the fulfillment of the 
course requirements for the bachelor of 
arts degree at Lycoming. 

Most students in the cooperative pro- 
gram will major in biology: if so. they 
will be allowed to complete a modified 
major which will exempt them from two 
biology courses: Ecology (Biology 24) 
and Plant Sciences (Biology 25). (This 
modified major requires the successful 
completion of the initial year at PCPM or 
OCPM). 

Students interested in a career in 
podiatric medicine should indicate their 
intentions to the Health Professions 
Advisory Committee. 

Sculpture — The Art Department 
with the Johnson Atelier Technical 
Institute of Sculpture in Princeton, New 
Jersey, offers a BFA degree in sculpture. 
It uses a classical apprenticeship 
approach as its teaching method. This 
ancient method of teaching is combined 



at Johnson with the most modem and 
technically advanced foundry and fabri- 
cating techniques. 

The Art Department offers a synthesis 
program that interrelates the student 
experience at both institutions. This is 
achieved by having the student rotate 
between Lycoming and the atelier so that 
each form of education is preparation for 
the other. Lycoming offers a core 
academic program, a course of study in 
the Art Department, and elective course 
opportunities. Lycoming gives eight 
course units of college credit to the stu- 
dent for having successfully completed 
one of the apprenticeship programs at the 
Johnson Atelier. 

All work completed by the student at 
Lycoming by the end of the sophomore 
year will be applicable to a bachelor of 
arts degree with a major in art should the 
student decide to withdraw from the BFA 
program. If the student should withdraw 
from the cooperative program prior to 
completing the apprenticeship at the 
Johnson Atelier. Lycoming will give up 
to four units of credit or one semester's 
work for the internship. If, however, the 
student completes more work at the ate- 
lier than the four units, that extra work 
will not be credited to the bachelor of arts 
degree: it will only be used as part of the 
bachelor of fine arts degree, and then 
only if the course at the atelier is com- 
pleted. 

This course of study is very rigorous. 
It will require that the student be 
involved almost continuously, either at 
Lycoming or at the Johnson Atelier, 
during the four years it will take to com- 
plete the degree. (See Art Department 
listing for specific program.) 

Reserve Officers Training Corps 
Program (R.O.T.C.) — The program 
provides an opportunity for Lycoming 
students to enroll in R.O.T.C. Lycoming 
notes enrollment in and successful com- 
pletion of the program on student tran- 
scripts. Military Science is a four-year 
program divided into a basic course 
given during the freshman and sopho- 
more years and an advanced course given 
during the junior and senior years. Stu- 
dents who have not completed the basic 



course may qualify for the advanced 
course by completing summer camp 
between the sophomore and junior years. 
Students enrolled in the advanced course 
receive an annual stipend of 51,000. 
Students successfully completing the 
advanced course and advanced summer 
camp between the junior and senior years 
will qualify for a commission as a Sec- 
ond Lieutenant in the United States 
Army upon graduation, and will incur a 
service obligation in the active Army or 
Army Reserves. The only expense to the 
student for this program is the $60 
advanced course uniform deposit. 

Student Enrichment Semester — 

This voluntary program is designed to 
expand academic and life opportunities 
for students and to provide for participa- 
tion in specialized programs and courses 
not available at Lycoming. Other mem- 
bers of the program are Bucknell and 
Susquehanna Universities, the Williams- 
port Area Community College, and 
Bloomsburg, Lock Haven, and Mans- 
field Universities. Student other than 
freshmen enroll full or part time for cre- 
dit, normally for one semester or term, at 
any participating institution in selected 
courses. Students in the program remain 
fully enrolled as degree candidates at 
their home institutions. A special oppor- 
tunity within the program is the cross- 
registration arrangement with the Wil- 
liamsport Area Community College, 
whereby students may enroll for less than 
a full-time course load while remaining 
enrolled in courses at Lycoming. 

Washington, United Nations and 
London Semester and Capitol Semes- 
ter Internship Program — With the 
consent of the Department of Political 
Science, selected students are permitted 
to study in Washington. D.C.. at The 
American University for one semester. 
They may choose from seven different 
programs: Washington Semester. Urban 
Semester, Foreign Policy Semester, 
International Development Semester, 
Economic Policy Semester, Science and 
Technology Semester, American Studies 
Semester. 

With the consent of either the Depart- 



17 



merit of History or Political Science, 
selected students may enroll at Drew 
University in Madison, New Jersey, in 
the United Nations Semester, which is 
designed to provide a first-hand 
acquaintance with the world organiza- 
tion. Students with special interests in 
world history, international relations, 
law, and politics are eligible to partici- 
pate. 

The London Semester programs of 
Drew and The American Universities 
emphasize European history, politics. 
and culture. Interested students partici- 
pate with the consent of either the 
Departments of History or Political Sci- 
ence. 

The Capitol Semester Internship Pro- 
gram is available to eligible students on a 
competitive basis. The program is co- 
sponsored by Pennsylvania's Office of 
Administration and Department of Edu- 
cation. Paid Internships are available to 
students in most majors. Interested stu- 
dents should contact the Career Develop- 
ment Center or the Assistant Dean of the 
College for additional information. 

The Philadelphia Urban Semester — 

A full semester liberal arts program for 
professional development and field study 
is now available to Lycoming students. 
The program components are: field 
placement; City Seminar: evening semi- 
nars; and living and learning in the city. 
The program is open to students major- 
ing in any discipline or program. The 
Philadelphia Urban Semester is spon- 
sored and administered by the Great 
Lakes Colleges Association (Albion. 
Antioch, Denison, De Pauw, Earlham. 
Hope, Kalamazoo. Kenyon, Oberlin. 
Ohio Wesleyan, Wabash, Wooster). 
Additional information is available from 
Dean Grogan. 

Normally the above special-semester 
programs are open only to juniors. 

NOTE: Lycoming College cannot assume 
responsibility for the health, .safety, or welfare 
of students engaged in or en route to or from any 
off-campus studies or activities which are not 
under the exclusive jurisdiction of this institu- 
tion. 



THE SCHOLAR PROGRAM 

The Lycoming College Scholar Pro- 
gram is a special program designed to 
meet the needs and aspirations of highly 
motivated students of superior intellectu- 
al ability. The Lycommg Scholar satis- 
fies the general distribution require- 
ments, but on a more exacting level and 
with more challenging courses than the 
average student. Lycoming Scholars also 
participate in special courses and .semi- 
nars and in serious independent study 
culminating in a senior project super- 
vised by their major department. 

Students are admitted to the program 
by invitation of the Scholar Council, the 
group which oversees the program. The 
council consists of four students elected 
by current scholars and four faculty 
selected by the Dean of the College. The 
guidelines governing selection of new 
scholars are flexible: academic excel- 
lence, intellectual curiosity, and creativ- 
ity are all taken into account. Students 
who desire to participate in the Scholar 
Program but are not invited may petition 
the Scholar Council for consideration. 

To remain in the program, students 
must maintain a GPA of 3.0 or better. 
Students dropping below this average 
will be placed on Scholar probation until 
their average improves, or they are asked 
to leave the program. To graduate as a 
Scholar, a student must have at least a 
3.0 cumulative average. Scholars must 
take the First Year Scholar Seminar dur- 
ing their first semester in the program. In 
addition, the following distribution 
requirements must be met. (Slightly 
modified requirements exist for students 
in the cooperative programs; a list of 
these requirements can be obtained from 
the Scholar Council.) 

Scholar Distribution Requirements 
for Students in AB 
and BFA Programs. 

A. English. Scholars must display 
above-average writing skills by the end 
of the sophomore year, as certified by the 
Department of English and the Scholar 
Council. This requirement may be met 
by obtaining a sufficiently high score on 
an appropriate CLEP examination or by a 



grade of "B" in English 6. Students not 
meeting the requirement in either of 
these ways by the end of the freshman 
year will be asked to do extra work until 
the competency is reached. Beyond 
English 6, the requirement is one litera- 
ture course numbered 20 or higher. 

B. Language/Mathematical Sciences. 
Scholars must satisfy the requirement in 
either language or mathematical sci- 
ences. Language: Scholars must com- 
plete two courses numbered 10 or higher 
(excluding courses taught in English). 
Mathematical Sciences: The mathema- 
tics placement test determines whether a 
Scholar must take two or three courses 
for distribution. These courses must be 
numbered 12 or higher. If only two 
courses are required. Mathematics 17 
may not be included. Only one computer 
science course may be used to fulfill the 
mathematical sciences requirement. 

C. Philosophy/Religion. Scholars 
must satisfy this requirement in either of 
the two areas. Philosophy: Two courses 
numbered 20 or higher. Religion: Two 
courses numbered 22 or higher. 

D. Fine Arts. Scholars must satisfy the 
requirement in one of four areas. Art: 
Two options are available in art. Either 
two courses from Art 22, 23, 24, 31, 32, 
33. and 34 (Art History), or two courses 
from Art 11, 15, 20, and 25 (Studio Art). 
Music: Two courses from Music 17, 30. 
or higher. Theatre: Two courses from 
Theatre 14 or higher, exluding Theatre 
18. Literature: Two literature courses 
from English 20 or higher. Foreign Lan- 
guages and Literature 25. or other for- 
eign^ languages and literatures courses 
taught in English. 

E. Natural Sciences. Scholars must 
satisfy the requirements in one of three 
areas. Astronomy/ Physics: Two courses 
numbered 1 1 or higher. Biology: Two 
courses numbered 10 or higher. Chem- 
istrx: Two courses numbered 10 or high- 
er. 

F. History/Social Sciences. Scholars 
must satisfy the requirements in one of 
five areas. Economics: Two courses 
numbered 10 or higher. History: Two 
courses, one of which must be numbered 
20 or higher. Political Science: Two 
courses numbered 15 or higher. Psxchol- 



18 



ogy: Two courses including Psychology 
10 and one course numbered 24 or higher 
(excluding Psychology 38). Sociology/ 
Anthropology: Two courses including 
Sociology 10 and one course numbered 
30 or higher. 

Scholar Distribution Requirements 
for students in BSN Program. 

A. English. Same as for AB and BFA 
degrees. 

B. Mathematical Science. Same as for 
AB and BFA degrees. (Note that the 
Nursing major requires Mathematics 13 
and Computer Science 15.) 

C. Philosophy/Religion. Met by tak- 
ing Philosophy 19 and Religion 20 pro- 
vided that in each course the student 
write an additional paper which must 
receive a grade of B or better. 

D. Fine Arts/Language. Same as for 
AB and BFA scholars. 

E. Natural Sciences. Met by Biology 
13, Biology 14. Biology 26 (required for 
the major). 

F. History/Social Science. Met by 



Psychology 10. Psychology 17, 
(required for the major) and one course in 
Sociology 30 or higher. (This sociology 
course may be taken in lieu of the intro- 
ductory guided elective in Sociology for 
the BSN.) 

All Scholar Students must complete 
the following: 

G. Physical Education. Scholars must 
satisfy the same physical education 
requirements stipulated by the College 
for all students. 

H. Designated Courses. In addition to 
completing the distribution require- 
ments. Scholars will be required to com- 
plete four upper-level courses (numbered 
30 and above) chosen from a list of 
"designated" courses selected and 
maintained by the Scholar Council. Each 
full-time Lycoming instructor is invited 
to nominate one of his/her courses hav- 
ing special depth and merit for inclusion 
on this list. The Scholar Council may 
alter the list from time to time. A scholar 
may use no more than two such desig- 




nated courses from any one department 
to satisfy this requirement. Normally. 
Scholars will not begin taking designated 
courses until their sophomore year. 

I. Senior Project. In the senior year, 
scholars must successfully complete an 
independent studies or departmental 
honors project which has been approved 
in advance by the Independent Studies 
Committee and the Scholar Council. 
This project must be presented orally and 
be accepted by the Scholar Council. 

J. Scholars must complete a major and 
32 units, exclusive of the First Year 
Scholar Seminar. 

K. In the case of transfer students and 
those who seek to enter the program after 
their freshman year and in other cases 
deemed by the Scholar Council to 
involve special or extraordinary circum- 
stances, the Council shall make adjust- 
ments to the Scholar distribution 
requirements provided that in all cases 
such exceptions and adjustments would 
still satisfy the regular College distribu- 
tion requirements. 




19 



Curriculum 



Numbers 1-9 Elementary courses in 
departments where such courses are 
not counted as part of the student's 
major. 
Number 10-19 Freshman level courses 
Numbers 20-29 Sophomore level 

courses 
Numbers 30-39 Junior level courses 
Numbers 40-49 Senior level courses 
Numbers 50-59 Non-catalog courses 

(offered on a limited basis) 
Numbers 60-69 Applied Music 
Numbers 70-79 Internships 
Numbers 80-89 Independent Study 
Numbers 90-99 Independent Study for 
Department Honors 

Courses not in sequence are listed sepa- 
rately, as: 

Drawing Art 1 1 

Color Theory Art 12 

Courses which imply a sequence are 
indicated with a dash between, meaning 
that the first semester must be taken prior 
to the second, as: 

Intermediate French 

French 10-11 

All students have the right of access to all 
courses. 



ACCOUNTING 



Professor: Richmond (Chairperson) 
Assistant Professors: Kuhns, Wienecke 

The purpose of the accounting major is 
to help prepare the student for a career 
within the accounting profession. The 
major has two tracks. Track I is designed 
for students whose primary interests lie 
in the financial area or public accounting 
and provides preparation for the Certi- 
fied Public Accountant Examination; 
Track II is designed for students with an 
interest in management accounting and 
provides preparation for the Certified 
Management Accountant Examination. 

Track I — Financial Accounting 
requires: Accounting 10, 20-21, 30, 40, 
41, 43, 45, Mathematics 13, Computer 
Science 15, and one unit to be selected 



from Accounting 25, 26. 3 1 , 42, 46, 47, 
and 48 or Internship. Business 10 may be 
substituted for Accounting 10 if a student 
changes majors. Duplicate credit will not 
be granted. 

Students seeking entry into the public 
accounting field are advised to investi- 
gate the professional requirements for 
certification in the state in which they 
intend to practice so that they may meet 
all educational requirements prior to gra- 
duation. All Track 1 majors are advised 
to enroll in Economics 10 and 1 1, Busi- 
ness 35, 36, and 38, and one of the 
following: Business 33, Economics 20, 
or 37. 

Track II — Management Accounting 
requires: Accounting 10, 20-21, 30-31. 
44, Mathematics 13, Computer Science 
15, Business 38-39, and 40. All Track II 
majors are advised to enroll in Econom- 
ics 10-11 and Business 35-36. Students 
planning to sit for the Certified Manage- 
ment Accountant Examination are 
advised to enroll in Accounting 40, 
41-42, 43, and a one-half unit (2 credits) 
internship during the fall semester of the 
senior year together with Accounting 43 
or a one-half unit (2 credits) independent 
study. Business 10 may be substituted 
for Accounting 10 if a student changes 
majors. Duplicate credit will not be 
granted. 

Three minors are offered by the 
Department of Accounting. The follow- 
ing courses are required to complete a 
minor in Financial Accounting: 
Accounting 10, 20, 21, 43, 47 and any 
other accounting course or independent 
study. A minor in Managerial Account- 
ing requires the completion of Account- 
ing 10, 20, 30, 31, and 44. To obtain a 
minor in Federal Income Tax, a student 
must complete Accounting 10, 20, 21, 
41, and 42. 



10 ELEMENTARY 

ACCOUNTING THEORY 
An introductory course in recording, classify- 
ing, summarizing, and interpreting the basic 
business transaction. Problems of classifica- 
tion and interpretation of accounts and prepa- 
ration of financial statements are studied. Not 
open to students who have received credit 
for Business 10. Prerequisite: Second- 
semester freshman or consent of instructor. 



20-21 INTERMEDIATE 

ACCOUNTING THEORY 
An intensive study of accounting statements 
and analytical procedures with an emphasis 
upon corporate accounts, various decision 
models, price-level models, earnings per 
share, pension accounting, accounting for 
leases, and financial statement analysis. Pre- 
requisite: Accounting 10. 

25 FINANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS 
Deals with the analysis of financial statements 
as an aid to decision making . The theme of the 
course is understanding the financial data 
which are analyzed as well as the methods by 
which they are analyzed and interpreted. This 
course should prove of value to all who need a 
thorough understanding of the uses to which 
financial statements are put as well as to those 
who must know how to use them intelligently 
and effectively. This includes accountants, 
secunty analysts, lending officers, credit anal- 
ysts, managers, and all others who make deci- 
sions on the basis of financial data. Prere- 
quisite: Accounting 10 or Business 10. May 
term. 

26 GOVERNMENT AND 
FUND ACCOUNTING 
This course is designed to introduce account- 
ing for not-for-profit organizations. Munici- 
pal accounting and reporting are studied. Pre- 
requisite: Accounting 10 or Business 10. 
One-half unit of credit. 

30-31 COST AND BUDGETARY 
ACCOUNTING THEORY 
Methods of accounting for material, labor, 
and factory overhead expenses consumed in 
manufacturing using job order, process, and 
standard costing. Application of cost 
accounting and budgetary theory to decision 
making in the area of make or buy, expansion 
of production and sales, and accounting for 
control are dealt with. Prerequisites: 
Accounting 20 and Mathematics 1 3 or consent 
of instructor. 

40 AUDITING THEORY 

A study of the science or art of verifying, 
analyzing, and interpreting accounts and 
reports. The goal of the course is to emphasize 
concepts which will enable students to under- 
stand the philosophy and environment of 
auditing. Special attention is given to the 
public accounting profession, studying audit- 
ing standards, professional ethics, the legal 
liability inherent in the attest function, the 
study and evaluation of internal control, the 
nature of evidence, the growing use of statisti- 
cal sampling, the impact of electronic data 
processing, and the basic approach to plan- 
ning an audit. Finally, various audit reports 
expressing independent expert opinions on the 
fairness of financial statements are studied. 



21 



Prerequisites: Accounting 21. Mathematics 
13. and Computer Science 15. 

41 FEDERAL INCOME TAX 
ACCOUNTING AND PLANNING 

Analysis of the provisions of the Interna! 
Revenue Code relating to income, deductions, 
inventories, and accounting methods. Practi- 
cal problems involving determination of 
income and deductions, capital gains and los- 
ses, computation and payment of taxes 
through withholding at the source and through 
declaration are considered. Planning transac- 
tions so that a minimum amount of tax will 
result is emphasized. Prerequisite: Account- 
ing 10 or consent of instructor. 

42 FEDERAL INCOME TAX 
ADMINISTRATION AND PLANNING 
An analysis of the provisions of the Internal 
Revenue Code relating to partnerships, 
estates, trusts, and corporations. An extensive 
series of problems is considered, and effective 
tax planning is emphasized. Prerequisite: 
Accounting 41. 

43 ADVANCED ACCOUNTING I 

An intensive study of partnerships, install- 
ment and consignment sales, branch account- 
ing, bankruptcy and reorganization, estates 
and trusts, government entities, non-profit 
organizations, and accounting and reporting 
for the SEC. Prerequisite: Accounting 21. 
One-half unit of credit. 

44 CONTROLLERSHIP 

Control process in the organization. General 
systems theory, financial control systems, 
centralization-decentralization, performance 
measurement and evaluation, forecasts and 
budgets, and marketing, production and 
finance models for control purposes. Prere- 
quisite: Accounting 31 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Alternate years. 

45 AUDITING PRACTICE 

An audit project is presented, solved and the 
auditor's report written. THIS COURSE IS 
LIMITED TO STUDENTS WHO HAVE 
EITHER COMPLETED OR ARE 
ENROLLED IN ACCOUNTING 40. One- 
half unit of credit. Grade will be recorded as 
S" or "U". 

46 SEMINAR ON APB OPINIONS 
AND FASB STANDARDS 

A seminar course for accounting majors with 
library assignments to gain a workable under- 
standing of the highly technical opinions of 
the Accounting Principles Board and stan- 
dards of the Financial Accounting Standards 
Board. One term paper. Possible trip to New 
York City to attend a public hearing of the 
Financial Accounting Standards Board. Pre- 
requisite: Accounting 10. May term. 



47 ADVANCED ACCOUNTING II 

Certain areas of advanced accounting theory, 
including business combinations, consoli- 
dated financial statements, and accounting 
and reporting for the Securities and Exchange 
Commission are covered. Prerequisite: 
Accounting 21. One-half unit of credit. 

48 CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS 
FOR CPA CANDIDATES 

Problems from the Accounting Practice sec- 
tions of Past C.P.A. examinations, which 
require a thorough knowledge of the core 
courses in their solution, are assigned. The 
course is intended to meet the needs of those 
interested in public accounting and prepara- 
tion for the Certified Public Accountant's 
examination. Prerequisite: Accounting 30 or 
consent of instructor. One-half unit of credit. 
Grade will be recorded as "S" or "U" . 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns in accounting typically work off cam- 
pus under the supervision of a public or private 
accountant. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index! 
Typical examples of recent studies in 
accounting are; computer program to generate 
financial statements, educational core for 
public accountants, inventory control, and 
church taxation. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENT HONORS 

(See index) 



ACCOUNTING — 
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 

Assistant Professor: Kuhns 
(Coordinator) 

The accounting-mathematical sciences 
interdisciplinary major is designed to 
offer, within a liberal-arts framework, 
courses which will aid in constructing 
mathematical models for business deci- 
sion making. Students obtain the neces- 
sary substantial background in both 
mathematical sciences and accounting. 
Required accounting courses are: 
Accounting 10, 20. 2 1 , 30, 3 1 , 4 1 , 42. In 
mathematical sciences required courses 
are: Computer Science 15 and 37 and 
Mathematics 12, 18, 19. 38 and 13 or 32. 
Recommended courses include: Mathe- 
matics 20, 33; Business 23, 24, 35, 36, 
38, 39; Computer Science 26; Econom- 



ics 10, 11; Psychology 15, 24; and 
Sociology 10. 



AMERICAN STUDIES 

Professor: Piper 
(Coordinator) 

The American studies major offers a 
comprehensive program in American 
civilization which introduces students to 
the complexities underlying the develop- 
ment of America and its contemporary 
life. The 13 major courses include: 

FOUR CORE COURSES — The 

primary integrating units of the major, 
these team-taught courses will teach you 
how to think of ideas from different 
points of view and how to correlate infor- 
mation and methods from various dis- 
ciplines: 

America As a Civilization 

(First semester of major study) 
American Studies — Research and 

Methodology (Second semester) 
American Tradition in the Arts and 

Literature (Third semester) 
Internship or Independent Study 

(Junior and/or senior year) 

CONCENTRATION AREAS — Six 

courses in one option and three in the 
other are needed. Six primary 
concentration-option courses in Ameri- 
can Arts or American Society build 
around the insights gained in the core 
courses. They focus particular attention 
on areas most germane to academic and 
vocational interests. The three additional 
courses from the other option give fur- 
ther breadth to understanding of Ameri- 
ca. Students also will be encouraged to 
take elective courses relating to other 
cultures. 

American Arts Concentration Option 

American Art — Art 24 
American Art of the 20th Century — Art 23 
19th Century American Literature — English 22 
20th Century American Literature — Engish 23 
American Music — Music 18 or 19 
American Theatre 



22 



American Society 
Concentration Option 

U.S. Social and Intellectual History to 1877 — 

History 42 

U.S. Social and Intellectual History since 1877 — 

History 43 

American Economic Development 

Racial and Cultural Minorities — Sociology 34 

American Political Tradition 

Students should design their American 
Studies major in consultation with the 
program coordinator or a member of the 
American Studies Committee. 

10 AMERICA AS A CIVILIZATION 

An analysis of the historical, sociocultural. 
economic, and political perspectives of 
American civlization with special attention to 
the inter-relationships between these various 
orientations. 

1 1 AMERICAN STUDIES — RESEARCH 
AND METHODOLOGY 

The study and application of various research 
methods, including new trends in historical 
study, quantitative analysis, cross-cultural 
studies, and on-site inspection. 

12 AMERICAN TRADITION IN 
THE ARTS AND LITERATURE 

The relationship of the arts and literature to the 
various historical periods of American life. 

70-79 or 80-89 INTERNSHIP OR 

INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
An opportunity to relate the learning in the 
core courses and the concentration areas to an 
actual supervised off-campus learning situa- 
tion or independent study project. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
HONORS (See index) 



ART 

Associate Professors: Bogle 

(Chairperson), Shipley 
Part-time Instructor: Hanks 
Adjunct Faculty at Johnson Atelier: 

Van Tongeren, Barre, Lash, Pitynski 

The Art Department offers two degree 
programs: a bachelor of arts degree and a 
bachelor of fine arts in sculpture. 



The B.A. degree: 

To complete a bachelor of arts degree 
with a major in art. a student must com- 
plete one of the following three tracks: 

Track I — Two-Dimensional 

The two-dimensional track consists of 
Drawing I and II (Art 11 and 21). Figure 
Modeling I (Art 16), Two-Dimensional 
Design (Art 15), and Painting I and 11 
(Art 20 and 30). Printmaking I and II (Art 
28 and 38) may be substituted for Paint- 
ing I and II (Art 20 and 30). Students 
must also take Art 22 and 23 (Survey of 
Art) and two additional courses in art 
history (Art 24, 31, 32, 33, 34. 39). 
Studio Research (Art 46) is required 
along with participation in a senior 
exhibition. 

Track II — Three-Dimensional 

The three-dimensional track consists 
of Drawing I and II (Art 11 and 21), 
Figure Modeling (Art 16), Sculpture I 
and II (Art 25 and 35), and either Figure 
Modeling II (Art 26) or Sculpture III (Art 
45). Students must also take Art 22 and 
Art 23 (Survey of Art) and two additional 
courses in art history (Art 24, 3 1 , 32, 33, 
34, 39). Studio Research (Art 46) is 
required along with participation in a 
senior exhibition. 

Track III — Commercial Design 

The commercial design track consists 
of Drawing I and II (Art II and 21), 
Color Theory (Art 12), Two- 
Dimensional Design (Art 15), Figure 
Modeling I (Art 16), Survey of Art (Art 
22 and 23), Photography I (Art 27), 
Special Projects in Commercial Design 
(Art 42), Layout and Design (GCO 511), 
Typographic Composition (GCO 512), 
and Process Camera (GCO 521 ). Course 
descriptions for the last three required 
courses are shown under Mass Commu- 
nication offerings available at Williams- 
port Area Community College. 

The following courses are recom- 
mended: Photography II (Art 37), Intern- 
ship (Art 70-79), Advertising (Business 
32), Writing for Special Audiences 
(English 16), Introduction to Mass Com- 
munication (Mass Comm 10), Social 
Psychology (Psy 24). 



The BFA degree in sculpture: 

The student completes a specified 
course of study in the Art Department, 
the Lycoming College distribution 
requirements, and one of the field spe- 
cialization apprenticeship programs at 
the Johnson Atelier in Princeton, New 
Jersey. 

The Art Department course of study 
consists of 12 courses in studio and art 
history: Figure Modeling I and II (Art 16 
and 26), Sculpture I and II (Art 25 and 
35), Drawing I and II (Art 11 and 21), 
Introduction to Photography (Art 27), 
2-D Design (Art 15), Survey of Art (Art 
22 and 23), and two additional courses in 
Art History (Art 24, 31. 32, 33, 34, 39). 

Twelve additional course units are 
required of the student. The student must 
meet the requirements of the distribution 
program within these courses. 

The student must also complete one of 
the field specialization apprenticeships at 
the Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of 
Sculpture in Princeton, New Jersey. This 
requires the student to be at the Johnson 
Atelier for a period of between 16 and 
23 '/2 months. The student receives eight 
course units of credit at Lycoming Col- 
lege for successfully completing the field 
specialization apprenticeship at Johnson 
Atelier. It is expected that the work for 
the apprenticeship component will be 
completed during the summers and the 
junior year. 

Admission to the BFA degree program 
is on the basis of meeting the admission 
standards of Lycoming College, and 
passing a portfolio review and interview 
by members of the Lycoming College 
Art Department. 

Three minors are being offered by the 
Art Department. Requirements for each 
follow: Art History: Art 22, 23, and two 
advanced history courses; Sculpture: Art 
16, 26, 25, and 35 plus one of the fol- 
lowing: 21 , 29, or 45; Painting: Art 1 1 . 
15, 20, 30, and either 21 or 23. 



1 1 DRAWING I 

Study of the human figure with gesture and 
proportion stressed. Student is made familiar 
with different drawing techniques and media. 
Some drawings from nature. Offered in alter- 
nate semesters with Drawing II and III. 



23 



i: COLOR THEORY 

A study of ihe physical and emotional aspects 
of color. Emphasis will be placed on the study 
ofcolorasan aesthetic agent for the artist. The 
color theories of Johannes Itten will form the 
base for this course with some study of the 
theories of Albert Munsell. Faber Berren. and 
Wilhelm Ostwald. 

I? TWO-DIMENSIONAL DESIGN 

The basic fundamentals found in the two- 
dimensional arts: line, shape, form, space, 
color, and composition are taught in relation- 
ship to the other two-dimensional arts. Per- 
ceptual theories and their relationships to what 
and why we see what we see in art are dis- 
cussed with each problem. 

16 FIGURE MODELING I 

Understanding the figure will be approached 
through learning the basic structures and prop- 
ortions of the figure. The course is conceived 
as a three-dimensional drawing class. At least 
one figure per student will be cast. 

19 CERAMICS I 

Emphasis placed on pottery design as it relates 
to function of vessels and the design parame- 
ters imposed by the characteristics of clay. 
The techniques of ceramics are taught to 
encourage expression rather than to dispense 
merely a technical body of information. 

20 PAINTING I 

An introduction of painting techniques and 
materials Coordination of color, value, and 
design within the painting is taught Some 
painting from the figure. No limitations as to 
painting media, subject matter, or style. Pre- 
requisite: An 15 or consent of inslruclor. 

21 DRAWING II 

Continued study of the human figure. Empha- 
sis is placed on realism and figure-ground 
coordination with the use of value and design . 
Prerequisite: Art II 

11 SURVEY OF ART: PRE-HISTORY 
THROUGH THE MIDDLE AGES 
A survey of Western architecture, sculpture, 
and painting. Emphasis is on the interrelation 
of form and content and on the relatedness of 
Ihe visual arts to their cultural environment: 
Paleolithic Art. Near East, Egypt, Greece, 
Rome, and Medieval Europe. 

23 SURVEY OF ART: FROM THE 
RENAISSANCE THROUGH THE 
MODERN AGE 

A survey of Western architecture, sculpture, 
and painting. Emphasis is on the Interrelation 
of form and content and on the relatedness of 
the visual arts to their cultural environment: 
I4th-20th centuries. 



24 AMERICAN ART OF THE I8TH 
AND 19TH CENTURIES 

The development of the arts in America from 
Colonial times through the 19th Century; from 
the unknown folk artist to popular artists such 
as Winslow Homer and Thomas Eakins. 

25 SCULPTURE I 

An introduction to the techniques, materials, 
and ideas of sculpture. Clay, plaster, wax, 
wood, and other materials will be used. The 
course will be concerned with ideas about 
sculpture as expression, and with giving 
material form to ideas. 

26 FIGURE MODELING II 

Will exploit the structures and understandings 
learned in Figure Modeling 1 to produce lar- 
ger, more complex figurative works. There 
will be a requirement to cast one of the works 
in plaster. Prerequisites: Art 16 and consent of 
instructor. 

11 INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY 
Objectives of the course are to develop techni- 
cal skills in the use of photographic equipment 
(cameras, films, darkroom, printmakerl and 
to develop sensitivity in the areas of composi- 
tion, form, light, picture quality, etc. Each 
student must own or have access to a 35mm 
camera. 

28 PRINTMAKING I 

Introduction to the techniques of silkscreen. 
intaglio, monotype, and lithography pnnting. 
One edition of at least six pnnts must be 
completed in each area. Prerequisite: Art II 
or 15 or consent of instructor. 

29 CERAMICS II 

Continuation of Ceramics I. Emphasis on use 
of the wheel and technical aspects such as 
glaze making and kiln firing. Prerequisite: Art 
19. 

30 PAINTING II 

Emphasis is placed on individual style and 
technique. Artists and movements in art are 
studied. No limitations as to painting media, 
subject matter, or style. Prerequisite: Art 20. 

31 20TH CENTURY EUROPEAN ART 
Stylistic developments in Europe from 1 880 to 
the present, including Cubism. Fauvism, 
Expressionism, Dada, and Surrealism. Picas- 
so. Matisse. Kandinsky. and Mondrian are 
among the major artists studied. 

32 AMERICAN ART OF THE 
20TH CENTURY 

Painting, sculpture, and architecture in the 
United States from 1900 to the present with 
emphasis on developments of the 1950's and 
1960's: an inquiry Into the meaning and his- 
torical roots of contemporary art. 



33 I9TH CENTURY EUROPEAN ART 

Emphasis on painting, sculpture, and 
architecture of Western Europe from 1760 to 
1900, including the work of late 18th-century 
artists David and Goya and 19th-century 
developments from Romanticism through 
Post-Impressionism. 

34 ART OF THE RENAISSANCE 
Painting, sculpture, and architecture in Italy 
and the Northern countries from the late 13th 
century through the early 1 6th century. Artists 
Include Giotto, Donatello, Alberti, Leonardo 
da Vinci, Michelangelo, Van Eyck, Durer, 
and Bruegel. 

35 SCULPTURE II 

A continuation of Sculpture I (Art 25). 
Emphasis is on advanced technical process. 
Casting of bronze and aluminum sculpture 
will be done in the school foundry. Prerequis- 
ite: Art 25. 

37 PHOTOGRAPHY II 

To extend the skills developed in Photography 
I by continued growth in technical expertise 
including instruction in the use and capabili- 
ties of large format view cameras. Emphasis is 
placed on conceptual and aesthetic aspects of 
photography. Prerequisite: An 27. 

38 PRINTMAKING II 

Further study of the techniques of silk.screen, 
intaglio, monotype, and lithography printing 
with emphasis on multi plate and viscosity 
pnnting Two editions of at least six prints 
must be completed in each of two areas. Pre- 
requisite: An 28. 

39 WOMEN IN ART 

A survey of women artists from a variety of 
viewpoints — aesthetic, historical, social, 
political and economic — which seeks to 
understand and integrate the contributions of 
women artists into the mainstream of the his- 
tory of art . No prerequisite. 

40 PAINTING III 

Professional quality is stressed. There is some 
experimentation w ith new painting techniques 
and styles. 

41 DRAWING III 

Continued study of human figure, individual 
style, and professional control of drawing 
techniques and media are now emphasized. 

42 SPECIAL PROJECT IN 
COMMERCIAL DESIGN 
Concentrated research, preparation, and 
execution of one major project in commercial 
design chosen by the student in consultation 
with the instructor. Preliminary concepts, pre- 
paratory layout and design and finished work 
will culminate in a portfolio and presentation. 



24 



Prerequisite: permission of the An Depari- 
menl. 

45 SCULPTURE III 

In Sculpture III the student is expected to 
produce a series of sculptures that follow a 
conceptual and technical line of development. 
Prerequisites: Art 16, 25. and 35. 

46 STUDIO RESEARCH 

Independent research in an elective studio 
area, conducted under the supervision of the 
appropriate faculty member, includes creation 
of vs'ork which ma\ be incorporated in the 
senior group exhibition. Student works in 
private studio assigned by the department. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Commercial design, interior design, and 
photography programs in local businesses, 
and museum work at the Lycoming County 
Historical Museum. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Recent studies in anatomy. Aspects of the art 
nouveau. lithography, photography, pottery, 
problems in illustration, and watercolor. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 



ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS 

Professor: Fineman (on leave) 
Associate Professor: Erickson 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Fisher, Keig 

The department offers two majors. 
The major in astronomy is specifically 
(designed to train students in the field of 
planetarium education: it also may serve 
as a basis for earning state certification as 
a secondary school teacher of general 
science. The major in physics can pre- 
pare students for graduate work in phys- 
ics, astronomy, and related physical sci- 
ences, for the cooperative program in 
engineering, for state certification as sec- 
ondary school teachers of physics, or for 
technical positions in industry. 

Astronomy 

The major in astronomy requires 
Astronomy 11, either 12 or 13, 30. 44, 
45 and 46; Physics 25 and 26: Mathema- 



tics 18 and 19: and Chemistry 10 and 1 1 
or 30 and 3 1 . Juniors and seniors major- 
ing in astronomy are also required to 
register for four semesters of Astronomy 
49 (non-credit colloquia). In addition, 
the following cognate courses are recom- 
mended: Physics 27 and 33: Philosophy 
21. 22. and 33: Music 22: and Art 27. 

3 OBSERVATIONAL ASTRONOMY 

A methods course providing the opportunity 
to make a vanety of astronomical observa- 
tions, both visually and photographically, 
with and without telescopes. The planetarium 
is used to familianze the student with the sky 
at vanous times dunng the year and from 
different locations on eanh. May or summer 
term only. 

4 FIELD GEOLOGY 

A methods course introducing the field tech- 
niques needed to study the geology of an area. 
Max or summer term only. 

5 HISTORY OF ASTRONOMY 

A comprehensive view of the evolution of 
astronomical thought from ancient Greece to 
the present, emphasizing the impact that astro- 
nomical discovenes and the conquest of space 
have had on Western culture. May or summer 
term only. 

1 PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY (B) 

1 1 PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY (A) 

A summary of current concepts of the universe 
from the solar system to distant galaxies. 
Describes the techniques and instruments used 
in astronomical research. Presents not only 
what is reasonably well known about the uni- 
verse, but also considers some of the major 
unsolved problems. Astronomy I and 1 1 share 
the same three hours of lecture and mo hours 
of laboratory each week. II has one addition- 
al hour each week for more advanced mathe- 
matical treatment of the material. Credit may 
not he earned for both I and II. Corequisite 
for II: Mathematics 17 or consent of instruc- 
tor. 

2 EARTH SCIENCE (B) 

12 EARTH SCIENCE (A) 

A study of the physical processes that continu- 
ally affect the planet Earth, shaping our envi- 
ronment. Descnbes how past events and life- 
forms can be reconstructed from preserved 
evidence to reveal the history of our planet 
from its ongin to the present. Emphasizes the 
ways in which geology, meteorology, and 
oceanography interrelate with man and the 
environment. Astronomy 2 and 12 share the 
same three hours of lecure and two hours of 
laboratory each week. 12 has one additional 
hour each week for more advanced mathe- 
matical treatment of the material. Credit may 



not be earned for both 2 and 12. Corequisite 
for 12: Mathematics 17 or consent of instruc- 
tor. 

13 METEOROLOGY 

The general propenies of the atmosphere and 
their measurements will be discussed in terms 
of basic physical and chemical laws. Two 
basic themes will guide the approach, i.e. . the 
atmosphere behaves like a giant heat engine, 
and weather patterns exist from a micro-to- 
macro scale. May or summer term only. Alter- 
nate years. 

30 PLANETARIUM TECHNIQUES 

A methods course covering major aspects of 
planetarium programming, operation and 
maintenance. Students are required to prepare 
and present a planetarium show. Upon suc- 
cessfully completing the course, students are 
eligible to become planetarium assistants. 
Three hours of lecture and demonstration and 
three hours of practical training per week. 
Prerequisites: Astronomy I or II (Principles 
of Astronomy) or consent of instructor. Alter- 
nate years. 

44 RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY 

A detailed presentation of the special theory of 
relativity, and a short view of the general 
theory and its classical proofs. Man's con- 
cepts of the universe, with particular attention 
to alternative modem cosmological models. 
Discussion of the Cosmological Principle, its 
rationale, and its implications. Four hours of 
lecture per week. Prerequisites: Astronomy 
1 1 1 Principles of Astronomy A) and Physics 25 
(Introductory Physics with Calculus I). Alter- 
nate years. Cross-listed as Physics 44. 

45 STELLAR EVOLUTION 

The physical pnnciples governing the internal 
structure and external appearance of stars. 
Mechanisms of energy generation and trans- 
port within stars. The evolution of stars from 
initial formation to final stages. The creation 
of chemical elements by nucleosynthesis. 
Four hours of lecture per week. Prerequisites: 
Astronomy 1 1 (Principles of Astronomy A ) 
and Physics 26 (Introductory Physics with 
Calculus II). Alternate years. 

46 STELLAR DYNAMICS AND 
GALACTIC STRUCTURE 

The motion of objects in gravitational fields. 
Introduction to the n-body problem. The rela- 
tion between stellar motions and the galactic 
potential. The large scale structure of galaxies 
in general and of the Milky Way Galaxy in 
particular. Four hours of lecture per week. 
Prerequisites: Astronomy II (Principles of 
Astronomy A) and Physics 25 (Introductory 
Phvsics with Calculus I). Alternate years. 



25 



49 ASTRONOMY AND 
PHYSICS COLLOQUIA 

This non-credil but required course forjuniors 
and seniors majoring in astronomy and phys- 
ics offers students a chance to meet and hear 
active scientists in astronomy, physics, and 
related scientit~ic areas talk about their own 
research or professional activities. In addi- 
tion, majors in astronomy and physics must 
present two lectures, one given dunng the 
Junior year and one given during the senior 
year, on the results of a literature survey or on 
individual research. Students majoring in this 
department are required to attend four semes- 
ters during the junior and senior years. A letter 
grade will be given when the student gives a 
lecture. Otherwise the grade will be S/U. 
Students in the Cooperative Program in Liber- 
al Arts and Engineenng are required to attend 
two semesters and present one lecture during 
their junior year. One hour per week. Cross- 
lisled as Physics 49. 

1Q)-19 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Independent studies may be undertaken in 
most areas of astronomy. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



Physics 

The major in physics requires Physics 
25. 26. 31, 32. and four additional phys- 
ics courses numbered 27 and above. Up 
to two courses chosen from Astronomy 
II. 12. 1 3 . 45 , and 46 may substitute for 
two of the four physics electives. Also 
required are Mathematics 18 and 19, and 
Chemistry 10 and 11 or 30 and 31. 
Juniors and seniors majoring in physics 
are required to register for four semesters 
of Physics 49 (non-credit colloquia). In 
addition, the following cognate courses 
are recommended: Mathematics 20 and 
21 (these are required for the cooperative 
engineering program and by most gradu- 
ate schools): Computer Science 15 
(required for the cooperative engineering 
program); and Philosophy 21, 22, and 
33, A foreign language is recommended 
for students planning on graduate study. 

6 ENERGY ALTERNATIVES 

A physicist's definition of work, energy, and 
power. The various energy sources available 
for use, such as fossil fuels, nuclear fission 



and fusion, hydro, solar, wind, and geother- 
mal. The advantages and disadvantages of 
each energy conversion method, including 
availability, efficiency, and environmental 
effects. Present areas of energy research and 
possible future developments. Projections of 
possible future energy demands. Exercises 
and expenments in energy collection, conver- 
sion, and utilization. May or summer term 
only. 

1.5-16 PHYSICS WITH LIFE 

SCIENCE APPLICATIONS 
The basic concepts, principles, and laws of 
physics are presented in this noncalculus 
introductory physics course. Topics include 
mechanics, elastic properties of matter, 
fluids, thermodynamics, electricity and mag- 
netism, waves, optics, and radioactivity. 
Many of the examples and problems used to 
illustrate the physics are selected from the life 
sciences. Three hours of lecture, one hour of 
recitation, and one three-hour laboratory per 
week. Prerequisite: Mathematics 17 or con- 
sent of instructor. (Credit may not be earned 
for both 15 and 25 or for both 16 and 26.1. 



25-26 



INTRODUCTORY PHYSICS 
WITH CALCULUS 



A mathematically rigorous introduction to 
physics designed for majors in physics, astro- 
nomy, chemistry, and mathematics. Topics 
include mechanics, thermodynamics, electr- 
icity and magnetism, waves, optics, and mod- 
em physics. Five hours of lecture and recita- 
tion and one three-hour laboratory per week. 
Corequisite: Mathematics 18-19 (Calculus I 
and 11). (Credit may not be earned for both 15 
and 25 or for both 16 and 26). 

27 ELECTRONICS 

D.C. and A.C. circuit and network theory, 
active devices such as transistors, operational 
amplifiers, integrated circuits, and introduc- 
tion to digital electronics will be covered. 
Three lectures and two mo-hour laboratory 
sessions per week. Prerequisites: Physics 16 
or 26. and Mathematics 9 or 18 or consent of 
instructor. Alternate years. 

31 MECHANICS 

Kinematics and dynamics of single particles 
and systems of particles. Rigid bodies. Intro- 
duction to the mechanics of continuous media. 
Moving reference frames. Lagrangian 
mechanics. Four hours of lecture and three 
hours of laboratory per week. Prerequisites: 
Physics 25 (Introductory Physics with Calcu- 
lus I) and Mathematics 19 (Calculus II). 

32 ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 

The electromagnetic field, electrical poten- 
tial, magnetic field, and electric and magnetic 
properties of matter. Electric circuits Max- 
well's equations. Laboratory includes elec- 
tronics as well as classical electricity and 



magnetism. Four hours of lecture and three 
hours of laboratory per week. Prerequisite : 
Physics 26 (Introductory Physics with Calcu- 
lus 111 

33 OPTICS 

Geometrical optics, optical systems, physical 
optics, interference, Fraunhofer and Fresnel 
diffraction, and coherence and lasers will be 
covered. Three hours of lecture and three 
hours of labratory per week. Prerequisites: 
Physics 16 or 26. and Mathematics 9 or 18 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

37 THERMODYNAMICS AND 
STATISTICAL MECHANICS 

Classical thermodynamics will be presented, 
showing that the macroscopic properties of a 
system can be specified without a knowledge 
of the microscopic properties of the consti- 
tuents of the system. Then statistical mechan- 
ics will be developed . showing that these same 
macroscopic properties are determined by the 
microscopic properties. Four hours of lecture 
and recitation per week. Prerequisites: Phys- 
ics 26 (Introductory Physics with Calculus II) 
and Mathematics 19 (Calculus II). Alternate 
years. 

38 ATOMIC AND 
MOLECULAR PHYSICS 

The development of the principles and 
methods of quantum mechanics from the ear- 
liest evidence of quantization. Structure and 
spectra of atoms and molecules. Extension of 
quantum theory to the solid state. Four hours 
of lecture and recitation and one three-hour 
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Physics 26 
(Introductory Physics with Calculus III and 
Mathematics 19 (Calculus II). Alternate 
years. 

44 RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY 

A detailed presentation of the special theory of 
relativity, and a short view of the general 
theory and its classical proofs. Man's con- 
cepts of the universe, with particular attention 
to alternative modem cosmological models. 
Discussion of the Cosmological Principle, its 
rationale, and its implications. Four hours of 
lecture per week. Prerequisites: Astronomy II 
(Principles of Astronomy A) and Physics 25 
(Introductory Physics with Calculus 1). Alter- 
nate years. Cross-listed as Astronomy 44. 

47 NUCLEAR AND 

PARTICLE PHYSICS 
The course will consider properties of nuclei, 
nuclear models, radioactivity, nuclear reac- 
tions (including fission and fusion), and prop- 
enies of elementary panicles. The interactions 
of nuclear particles with matter and the detec- 
tion of nuclear particles will be covered. It will 
be shown how observed phenomena lead to 
theories on the nature of fundamental interac- 
tions, how these forces act at the smallest 



26 



measurable distances, and what is expected to 
occur at even smaller distances. Four hours of 
lecture and recitation and mo hours of hiho- 
raloryper week^ Prerequisites: either Physics 
26 (Introductory Physics with Calculus II) or 
Phxsics 16 (Physics with Life Science Appli- 
cations II). Mathematics 19. and either Phys- 
ics iS (Atomic and Molecular Physics) or 
Chemistrx 10. .Alternate \ears. 

48 INTRODUCTION TO 
QUANTUM MECHANICS 

Basic concepts and formulation of quantum 
theory. The free particle, the simple harmonic 
oscillator, the hydrogen atom, and central 
force problems will be discussed. Both time- 
mdependent and time-dependent perturbation 
theory will be covered. Four hours of lecture 
and recitation. Prerequisite: either Physics 26 
(Introductory Physics with Calculus II) or 
Chemistry 3J (Physical Chemistry II). and 
Mathematics 21 (Differential Equations). 
Cross-listed as Chemistry 39. 

49 ASTRONOMY AND 
PHYSICS COLLOQUIA 

This non-credit but required course for juniors 
and seniors majoring in astronomy and phys- 
ics offers students a chance to meet and hear 
active scientists in astronomy, physics, and 
related scientific areas talk about their own 
research or professional activities. In addi- 
tion, majors in astronomy and physics must 
present two lectures, one given during the 
junior year and one given during the senior 
year, on the results of a literature survey or on 
individual research. Students majoring in this 
department are required to attend four semes- 
ters during the junior and senior years. A letter 
grade will be given when the student gives a 
lecture. Otherwise the grade will be S/U. 
Students in the Cooperative Program in Liber- 
al Arts and Engineenng are required to attend 
two semesters and present one lecture during 
their junior year. One hour per week. Cross- 
listed as Astronomy 49. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns in physics work off campus under the 
supervision of professional physicists 
employed by local industries or hospitals. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 

Independent studies may be undertaken in 
most areas of physics. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 



BIOLOGY 



Associate Professors: Angstadt 
(Chairperson), Diehl, Zaccaria 

Assistant Professors: Gabriel, 
Pottmeyer. Zimmerman 

A major consists of eight biology 
courses, including 10-11. 21, 22,23,24, 
and 25. With departmental consent. 
Biology 26 may be substituted for Biolo- 
gy 21. Only two courses numbered 
below 20 may count toward the major. 
Departmental internships cannot be used 
to fulfill the eighth required course. In 
addition, three units of chemistry and 
two units of mathematical science are 
required. The chemistry requirement 
must include at least one unit of organic 
chemistry chosen from Chemistry 15, 
20. or 21. The mathematical science 
courses must be chosen from Computer 
Science 15 and Mathematics 9. 13, 17 or 
above, or their equivalent. Certain spe- 
cific exceptions to the core program will 
be made for three-year students enrolled 
in cooperative programs. Such excep- 
tions are noted under the particular 
cooperative program described in the 
Academic Program chapter of the cata- 
log. Students interested in these prog- 
rams should contact the program director 
before finalizing their individual prog- 
rams. Credit may not be earned for both 
Biology 1 and 10 or for both Biology 2 
and 1 1 . Consent of instructor may 
replace Biology 10-11 as a prerequisite 
for all biology courses. 

A minor in Biology requires the com- 
pletion of four upper-level (20's or high- 
er) courses, with their appropriate prere- 
quisites. At least two of these must be 
from the 20"s series of courses. A minor 
with a special name (e.g.. Environmen- 
tal Science) may be designed by an indi- 
vidual. 

1-2 PRINCIPLES OF BIOLOGY 

An investigation of biological principles, 
including ecological systems, form and func- 
tion in selected representative organisms 
(especially man), cell theory, molecular biol- 
ogy, reproduction, inhentance, adaptation, 
and evolution. The course is designed primar- 
ily for students not planning to major in the 



biological sciences. Three hours of lecture 
and one two-hour laboratory per week. 

3 FIELD BIOLOGY FOR TEACHERS 

A methods course for students preparing to 
teach biology. Sources and methods of col- 
lecting and preserving various plant and ani- 
mal materials. Summer term only. 

5-6 HUMAN BIOLOGY 

An introduction to the physics and chemistry 
relative to biological systems. Human ana- 
tomy, physiology, and developmental biology 
will be surveyed. An introduction to micro- 
biology with emphasis given to host-pathogen 
relationships and the immune response. Three 
hours of lecture and one three-hour laborato- 
ry per week. Not open to students who have 
received credit for Biology 13-14. 

lO-1 1 INTRODUCTION TO BIOLOGY 

An introduction to the study of biology 
designed for students planning to major in the 
biological sciences. Major topics considered 
include the origin of life, cellular respiration 
and photosynthesis, genetics, development, 
anatomy and physiology, ecology, behavior, 
and evolution. Three hours of lecture and one 
three-hour labortory per week. 

13-14 HUMAN ANATOMY 
AND PHYSIOLOGY 

Using the organ-systems approach, the course 
is an introduction to the human body — its 
anatomy, physiology, and normal develop- 
ment — with particular attention to structure 
and function at all levels of its biological 
organization (molecular through organismal). 
Three hours of lecture, one hour of discus- 
sion, and one three-hour lab per week. Prere- 
quisite: Chemistry 15 or Chemistry 20 or 
consent of instructor. 

21 MICROBIOLOGY 

A study of microogranisms. Emphasis is 
given to the identification and physiology of 
microorganisms as well as to their role in 
disease, their economic importance, and 
industrial applications. Three hours of lecture 
and two two-hour laboratory periods per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. Not open 
to students who have received credit for Biolo- 
gy 26. 

22 GENETICS 

A general consideration of the principles gov- 
erning inheritance, including treatment of 
classical, molecular, cytological. physiologi- 
cal, microbial, human, and population gene- 
tics. Three hours of lecture and nvo two-hour 
laboralorv periods per week. Prerequisite: 
Biology 10-11. 

23 ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY 

The mechanisms and functions of animal svs- 



27 



lenis. including the autonomic, endocnne. 
digestive, cardio-vascular, respiratory, renal, 
nervous, and reproductive systems. Mamma- 
lian physiology is stressed. Three hours of 
lecture and one three-hour laboratory per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology lO-l I . 

24 ECOLOGY 

The study of the principles of ecology with 
emphasis on the role of chemical, physical, 
and biological factors affecting the distribu- 
tion and succession of plant and animal popu- 
lations and communities. Included will be 
field studies of local habitats as well as labo- 
ratory experimentation. Two hours of lecture 
and one four-hour laboratory per week. Pre- 
requisite: Biology 10-1 1. 

25 PLANT SCIENCES 

A survey of the structure, development, func- 
tion, classification, and use of plants and 
related organisms. The study will comprise 
four general topic areas: form, including mor- 
phology and anatomy of plants in growth and 
reproduction; function, concentrating on 
nutrition and metabolism peculiar to photo- 
synthetic organisms; classification systems 
and plant identification, and human uses of 
plants. Three hours of lecture and one three- 
hour laboralon per week. Prerequisite: Biol- 
ogy 10-11. 

26 MICROBIOLOGY FOR THE 
HEALTH SCIENCES 

A study of microorganisms with emphasis 
given to their taxonomy and their role in 
various aspects of human infectious disease. 
Mechanisms for treating and preventing 
infectious diseases will be presented. Labora- 
tory to include diagnostic culture procedures, 
antibiotic sensitivity testing, serology, anaer- 
obic techniques and a study of hemolytic 
reactions. Three hours of lecture and four 
hours of laboratory per week. Prerequisites: 
one year of introductory level biology, one 
year of chemistry or consent of instructor. Not 
open to students who have received credit for 
Biology 21. 

28 AQUATIC BIOLOGY 

A field-oriented course dealing with freshwa- 
ter ecosystems. Studies will include a survey 
of the plankton . benthos, and fish — as well as 
the physical and chemical characteristics of 
water that influence their distribution. Several 
local field trips and a one-week trip to a field 
station will familiarize students with thediver- 
sity of habitats and the techniques of limnolo- 
gists. May term onl\. Prerequisites: Biology 
10-11. 

.10 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 
OF VERTEBRATES 

Detailed examination of the origins, structure, 
and functions of the principal organs of the 
vertebrates Special attention is given to the 



progressive modification of organs from low- 
er to higher vertebrates Three hours of lecture 
and one four-hour laboratory per week. Pre- 
requisite: Biology 10-11. Alternate years. 

31 HISTOLOGY 

A study of the basic body tissues and the 
microscopic anatomy of the organs and struc- 
tures of the body which are formed from them. 
Focus is on norma! human histology. Three 
hours of lecture and one four-hour laboratory 
per week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-11 . Alter- 
nate years. 

32 PLANT AND 
GREENHOUSE MANAGEMENT 

A course concerned with the care of house- 
plants and the management of small green- 
houses. Class time will include lectures, dis- 
cussions, demonstrations, greenhouse 
exercises, and field trips to local greenhouses. 
Topics will include the theoretical and practi- 
cal aspects of the care and feeding, propaga- 
tion, light and water requirements, and dis- 
ease control for many of the common house 
and greenhouse plants. Prerequisite: Biology 
1-2 or 10-11. May term only. 

33 ECONOMIC AND 
SYSTEMATIC BOTANY 

Structure and classification of plants with 
emphasis on those species, particularly food 
and drug plants, having significance for 
human affairs. Three hours of lecture and one 
three-hour laboratory per week. Prerequis- 
ites: Biology 10-11. Biology 25. Alternate 
years. 

-34 INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY 

Comparative study of the invertebrate phyla 
with emphasis on phylogeny, physiology, 
morphology, and ecology. Two three-hour 
lecture! laboratory periods per week. Prere- 
quisite: Biology 10-11. Alternate years. 

35 CELLULAR PHYSIOLOGY 

Physicochemical background of cellular 
function: functions of membrane systems and 
organelles; metabolic pathways; bio-chemical 
and cellular bases of growth, development and 
responses of organisms Three hours of lec- 
ture and one three-hour laboratory per week. 
Prerequisites: Biology 10-1 1 and a year of 
chemistry. Alternate years. 

39 MEDICAL GENETICS 

This course is concerned with the relation- 
ships of heredity to disease. Discussions will 
focus on topics such as chromosomal abnor- 
malities, metabolic variation and disease, 
somatic cell genetics, genetic screening, and 
immunogenetics. Laboratory exercises will 
offer practical experiences in genetic diag- 
nostic techniques. Prerequisite: Biology 1-2 
or 10-11. May term only. 



40 PARASITOLOGY AND 
MEDICAL ENTOMOLOGY 

The biology of parasites and parasitism. 
Studies on the major groups of animal para- 
sites and anthropod vectors of disease will 
involve taxonomy and life cycles. Emphasis 
will be made on parasites of medical and 
veterinary importance. Three hours of lecture 
and one three-hour laboratory per week. Pre- 
requisite: Biology 10-11. Alternate years. 

41 VERTEBRATE EMBRYOLOGY 

A study of the development of vertebrates 
from fertilization to the fully formed fetus. 
Particular attention is given to the chick and 
human as representative organisms. Two 
three-hour lectureHaboratory periods per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-1 1 . Alternate 



42 ANIMAL BEHAVIOR 

A study of the causation, function, evolution, 
and biological significance of animal beha- 
viors in their normal environment and social 
contexts. Three hours of lecture and one 
four-hour laboratory each week. Prerequis- 
ite: Biology lO-l I. Alternate years. 

44 BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis is given to the metabolism of car- 
bohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins, and 
nucleic acids; integration of metabolism; and 
biochemical control mechanisms, including 
allosteric control, induction, repression, as 
well as the various types of inhibilive control 
mechanisms. Three hours of lecture, one 
three-hour laboratory and one hour of 
arranged work per week. Prerequisite: 
Chemistry 20-21 or Chemistry 15. or consent 
of instructor. Cross-listed as Chemistry 44. 
Alternate years. 

45 RADIATION BIOLOGY 

A study of the effects of ionizing and non- 
ionizing irradiations on cells, tissues and 
organisms. Consideration will be given to 
repair mechanisms and how repair deficien- 
cies elucidate the nature of irradiation dam- 
age. Three hours of lecture and one three- 
hour lab per week. Prerequisites: Biology 
10-11. one year of chemistry. Alternate years. 

46 PLANT ANATOMY 
AND PHYSIOLOGY 

A study of plant physiology as a function of 
plant anatomy. Metabolic relationships and 
environmental factors will be examined from 
a background of the structure and develop- 
ment of cells, tissues, organs, and whole 
plants. Three hours of lecture and one three- 
hour laboratory per week. Prerequisites: 
Biology 10-11. Biology 25. Alternate years. 

47 IMMUNOLOGY 

The course introduces concepts concerning 



28 



how pathogens cause disease and host defense 
mechanisms agamst infectious diseases. 
Characterization of and relationships between 
antigens, haptens, and antibodies are pre- 
sented. Serological assays will include: 
agglutination precipitations, immunofluores- 
cence. Immunoelectrophoresis, and comple- 
ment fixation. Other topics are: immediate 
and delayed hypersensitivities (i.e. allergies 
such as hay fever and poison ivy), immuno- 
logical renal diseases, immunohematology 
(blood groups, etc.). the chemistry and func- 
tion of complement autoimmunity, and organ 
graft rejection phenomena. Three hours of 
lecture, one ihree-hour laboratory, and one 
hour of arranged work per week. Prerequis- 
ite: Biology 10-11 . Alternate years. 

48 ENDOCRINOLOGY 

This course begins with a survey of the role of 
the endocrine hormones in the integration of 
body functions. This is followed by a study of 
the control of hormone synthesis and release, 
and a consideration of the mechanisms by 
which hormones accomplish their effects on 
target organs. Two three-hour lecture! 
laboratory periods per week. Prerequisite: 
Biology 10-11. Alternate years. 

49 BIOLOGY COLLOQUIUM 

This course offers the student a chance to 
become familiar with research in the Biologi- 
cal Sciences using techniques such as meeting 
and talking with active researchers, reading 
and critically analyzing the current literature, 
and discussing the ideas and methods shaping 
Biology. Students will be required to read and 
analyze scientific papers, actively participate 
in discussions, and. in the senior year, present 
the results of a literature survey or of individu- 
al research. Students majoring in this depart- 
ment are required to enroll during all semes- 
ters spent on campus in the junior and senior 
years. A letter grade will be given in a semes- 
ter when the student gives a lecture; in other 
semesters the grade will be S/U. Non-credit 
course. One hour per week. Prerequisites: 
Biology majors with junior or senior class 
standing. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Recent samples of internships in the depart- 
ment include ones with the Department of 
Environmental Resources, nuclear medicine 
or rehabilitative therapies at a local hospital. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Departmental studies are experimentally 
oriented and may entail either lab or field 
work. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 
Examples of recent honors projects have 



involved stream analysis, gypsy moth 
research, drug synthesis and testing. 



BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

Professor: Hollenback 
Associate Professor: Weaver 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professors: Gordon 
Lecturer: Larrabee 

To graduate with a major in business 
administration, a student must complete 
one of two tracks: 

Track I — Business Management 

This track is designed to train students 
in the functions of today's profit and 
nonprofit organizations. The program 
provides a well-balanced preparation for 
a wide variety of careers, including gen- 
era! administration, personnel adminis- 
tration, commercial banking, invest- 
ments and portfolio management, 
security analysis, corporate financial 
management, general marketing, sales, 
product management, advertising, retail 
merchandising, and production and man- 
ufacturing management. 

Required courses are Business 10, 11, 
23, 28-29, 38, 39, 40. and 41, and 
Mathematics 13. Business 32 or 43 may 
be substituted for Business 29, and Busi- 
ness 33 may be substituted for Business 
39. Accounting JO may be substituted for 
Business 10 if the student is transferring 
into the business administration major, 
but duplicate credit will not be granted. 

Majors are also urged to enroll in Eco- 
nomics 10 and 1 1, Business 35 and 36, 
Mathematics 12, and Computer Science 
15. Majors also are encouraged to take a 
foreign language. The additional elective 
offerings are intended to add depth in the 
areas of finance, marketing, and man- 
agement. 

Track II — Management Science 

This track is designed to train students 
in the quantitative aspects of business 
administration. It provides excellent 
undergraduate preparation for graduate 
study in management science, operations 



research, and quantitative business 
administration. The program also pro- 
vides a solid preparation for careers in 
production control, systems analysis, 
research, forecasting, industrial and 
technical sales and any of the functional 
areas of business where quantitative 
training would be an added qualification. 
Required courses are Business 10. 11. 
23. 38, 39, 46: Economics 10. 11, 41: 
Mathematics 18-19. 12, 13. 38, and 
Computer Science 15. Accounting 10 
may be substituted for Business 10 if the 
student is transferring into the business 
administration major. 



10 FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING 

An introduction to the art of measuring, com- 
municating, and interpreting financial activi- 
ty. Recording, classifying and summarizing 
business transactions, the interpretation of 
accounts, and the preparation of financial 
statements are studied. Not open to students 
who have received credit for Accounting 10. 

1 1 MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING 

An introduction to the various components of 
managerial accounting. Emphasis is placed on 
managerial problem solving techniques and 
the analysis of the results. Accounting sys- 
tems, costing procedures, cost-volume profit 
relationships, managerial control processes 
and the use of computers as aids to decision 
making are studied. Students will gain hands- 
on experience w ith various computer applica- 
tions of managerial accounting. Prerequisite: 
Business 10 or Accounting 10. 

23 QUANTITATIVE 

BUSINESS ANALYSIS 
Techniques of quantitative analysis useful in 
making business decisions. Topics include: 
decision theory, inventory models, network 
models, forecasting, and other selected appli- 
cations. Students will be introduced to com- 
puter applications of the quantitative models. 
Prerequisite: Mathematics 13 or consent of 
instructor. 

28-29 MARKETING MANAGEMENT 

Planning, organization, and control of the 
distribution activities of the firm, and an anal- 
ysis and evaluation of the marketing system, 
its institutions, and processes. Application of 
marketing principles and the development of 
strategies for specific marketing problems. 
Product, channel fiow. promotion, and pric- 
ing strategies explored. Readings, cases, and 
games. 

32 ADVERTISING 

Nature, scope, methods, and effects of prom- 



29 



otion. Techniques of analysis and control in 
the use of advertising and publicity as tools in 
developing business strategy. 

33 INVESTMENTS 

An introduction to the financial sector of the 
economy and the structure and functions of 
financial markets and the agencies involved; 
brokerage houses and stock exchanges; the 
various types of investments available. Tech- 
niques used to evaluate financial securities. 
Also covered are recent developments in 
investment theory. 

35 LEGAL PRINCIPLES I 

Lectures and analysis of cases on the nature, 
sources, and fundamentals of the law in gener- 
al, and particularly as relating to contracts, 
agency, and negotiable instruments. Open 
only to juniors and seniors. 

36 LEGAL PRINCIPLES II 

Lectures on the fundamentals and history of 
the law relating to legal association, real prop- 
erty, wills, and estates. Open only to juniors 
and seniors. 

38 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT I 

An introduction to working capital manage- 
ment and financial analysis and planning. 
Topics are covered through readings, cases 
and problem solving in the areas of decisions 
on current asset and liability structures, cash 
and marketable securities, accounts receiv- 
ables, inventory management and control, 
spontaneous financing, short-term borrowing, 
ratio and financial statement analysis, source 
and use statements, cash flow forecasting, and 
financial statements forecasting. Prerequis- 
ites: Mathematics 13. Business 10, II. and 
23. or consent of instructor. 

39 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT II 

A study of capital asset structure and long- 
term financial decisions. Topics are covered 
through readings, cases, and problem solving 
in the areas of capital budgeting, including 
risk and required rates of return, leveraging 
the firm, concepts of capital structures, 
dividend policy, external financing, term and 
lease financing, long-term debt, equity sec- 
urities, convertible securities and warrants. 
Prerequisite: Business iS or consent of 
instructor. 

40 MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS 
Structural characteristics and functional rela- 
tionships of a business organization as well as 
the problems encountered in coordinating the 
internal resources of a firm. Emphasis on 
administrative efficiency and procedures. 

41 BUSINESS POLICIES 

Planning, organization, and control of busi- 
ness operations; setting of goals; coordination 
of resources, development of policies. Analy- 



sis of strategic decisions encompassing all 
areas of a business . and the use and analysis of 
control measures. Emphasis on both the inter- 
nal relationship of various elements of pro- 
duction, finance, marketing, and personnel, 
and the relationship of the business entity to 
external stimuli. Readings, cases, and games. 
Prerequisites: Business 23. 28-29. 38-39. 
and 40. or consent of instructor. Seniors only. 

42 PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT 

An introduction to the managenal problems of 
recruiting, selecting, training, and retraining 
the human resources of the firm. Emphasis is 
placed on the interrelationship of personnel 
policies with management objectives and phi- 
losophies in such areas as fringe benefits, 
wage and salary policies, union activities, and 
health and safety. 

43 RETAIL MANAGEMENT I 

Planning, organization, and control of the 
retailing firm. Competitive strategy develop- 
ment through store location, layout, adminis- 
tration organization, buying, and pricing. 
Cases, readings, and papers. 

45 MARKETING RESEARCH 

This is a study of the principles and practices 
of Marketing Research. The focus is on the 
development and application of Marketing 
Research Studies. Topics covered include 
selection of a research design, project plan- 
ning and scheduling, data specification and 
gathering, quantitative methods to analyze 
data, interpretation of data, and research 
report wnting. Readings, cases, and research 
project. Prerequisite: Mathematics 13. Busi- 
ness 28. or consent of instructor. 

46 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 

An introduction to the planning, organization, 
and controlling of operations in a production 
facility. The course also incorporates quanti- 
tative techniques and computer applications 
used in the production and operations manage- 
ment environment. Topics include capacity 
and layout planning, facility location analysis, 
job design and work measurement, production 
scheduling, materials requirement planning 
models, and quality controls. Students will 
engage in the actual design of an inventory 
status file and MRP system. Prerequisites: 
Business 23 or consent of instructor. 

47 CREATIVE ADVERTISING 

A workshop concerned with theme, copy, and 
effective presentation of advertisements for 
print media, radio, and direct mail. Primarily 
an exploration of creativity through analysis 
of works of artists and writers with application 
to practical advertising, and tailored to the 
interests of individual students. May term. 

48 SALES SEMINAR 

The role of selling in the economy. The art of 



creative selling; application of theories from 
the behavioral sciences to selling through the 
analysis of sales situations and techniques. 

49 MANAGING THE 
SMALL BUSINESS 

How the potential businessman proceeds in 
establishing, operating, and profiting from a 
small business operation. Considered and 
analyzed are such aspects as marketing, man- 
aging, financing, promoting, insuring, estab- 
lishing, developing, and staffing the small 
retail, wholesale service, and manufacturing 
firm. May term. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Typical examples are marketing analysis for a 
paper products firm, planning a branch store, 
hotel and real estate management, banking 
and insurance. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Examples of recent studies are; the economic 
impact of a college on a community; a mark- 
eting strategy for a local firm enlerting the 
consumer market. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 
A recent project was a study of the evolution 
of anti-trust legislation in the United States. 



CHEMISTRY 

Professors: Hummer. Radspinner 
Associate Professor: Franz 

(Chairperson) 
Part-time Instructor: Baggett 

A major in chemistry consists of 
Chemistry 10-11. 20-21. 30-31, 32 and 
33; Physics 25-26: Mathematics 18. 19 
and one of the following courses: Mathe- 
matics 1 3 , 20. 2 1 , 32 , or Computer Sci- 
ence 15. Mathematics 20 and 21 and 
French or German are strongly recom- 
mended for students planning on gradu- 
ate study in chemistry. To be certified in 
secondary education, chemistry majors 
must also pass two biology courses num- 
bered 10 or higher. 

A minor in Chemistry requires com- 
pletion of four courses numbered 20 or 
higher; at least one must be taken from 
each of the following groups: Group A 
(20, 21,40, 41, 44, 45) and Group B (26 



30 



or 32, 30, 3 1 , 33. 39, 43). Named minors 
in specialized ares may be designed by 
students with departmental approval. 

8 CHEMICAL PRINCIPLES 

An introduction to the principles of inorganic 
chemistry. Topics include atomic and 
molecular structure, nomenclature, gases, 
solutions, acids and bases, kinetics, equili- 
brium, oxidation-reduction, and stoichiomet- 
ry. The approach is primarily descriptive, 
with illustrations drawn mostly from the 
health sciences. Along with Chemistry 15. 
this course is designed for those students who 
require only two semesters of chemistry, and 
is not intended for students planning to enroll 
in chemistry courses numbered 20 or above. 
Three hours lecture, one hour discussion, and 
one three-hour laboratory period each week. 
Prerequisite: high school algebra or Math 5. 
Not open for credit to students who have 
received credit for Chemistry 10. 

10 GENERAL CHEMISTRY I 

A quantitative introduction to the concepts 
and models of chemistry. Topics include 
stoichiometry. atomic and molecular struc- 
ture, nomenclature, bonding, thermochemi- 
stry, gases, solutions, and chemical reactions. 
The laboratory introduces the student to 
methods of separation, purification, and iden- 
tification of compounds according to their 
physical properties. This course is designed 
for students who plan to major in one of the 
sciences. Three hours lecture, one hour dis- 
cussion and one three-hour laboratory period 
each week. Prerequisite: placement in Chem- 
istry 10 is determined in part by a student's 
score on the mathematics placement e.xami- 
nation. Not open for credit to students who 
have received credit for Chemistry 8. except 
by permission of the Chemistry Department. 

1 1 GENERAL CHEMISTRY II 

A continuation of Chemistry 10. with empha- 
sis placed on the foundations of analytical, 
inorganic, and physical chemistry. Topics 
include kinetics, general and ionic equilibria, 
acid-base theory, electrochemistry, ther- 
modynamics, nuclear chemistry, coordination 
chemistry, and descriptive inorganic chemis- 
try of selected elements. The laboratory treats 
aspects of quantitative and qualitative inor- 
ganic analysis. Three hours lecture, one hour 
discussion, and one three-hour laboratory 
period each week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 10 
or consent of the Chemistry Department. 

15 BRIEF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

A descriptive study of the compounds of car- 
bon. This course will illustrate the pnnciples 
of organic chemistry with material relevant to 
students in medical technology, biology, 
nursing, forestry, education and the humani- 
ties. Topics include nomenclature, alkanes. 



arenes. functional denvatives. amino acids 
and proteins, carbohydrates and other natur- 
ally occurring compounds. This course is 
designed for students who require only one 
semester of organic chemistry. Three hours 
lecture, one hour discussion, and one four- 
hour laboratory period each week. Prere- 
quisite: Chemistry 8 or 10. Not open for credit 
to students who have received credit for 
Chemistry 20. 

20-21 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

A systematic study of the compounds of car- 
bon, including both aliphatic and aromatic 
series. The laboratory work introduces the 
student to simple fundamental methods of 
organic synthesis, isolation, and analysis. 
Three hours lecture and one four-hour labo- 
ratory period each week. Prerequisite: 
Chemistry II. 

26 CLINICAL ANALYSIS 

A presentation of selected wet-chemical and 
instrumental methods of quantitative analysis 
with an orientation toward clinical applica- 
tions in medical technology. Topics include: 
general methods and calculations; solutions; 
titrations; photometric analyses (colorimetric, 
atomic absorption, flame emmision); electro- 
chemical methods (ion-selective electrodes, 
coulometry). automation. Lecture, recitation, 
and laboratory daily. Prerequisite: Chemistry 
10-11 or consent of instructor. May not be 
taken for credit following Chemistry 32. May 
term only. 

30-31 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 

A study of the fundamental principles of 
theoretical chemistry and their applications. 
The laboratory work includes techniques in 
physicochemical measurements. Three hours 
lecture and one four-hour laboratory period 
each week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 11. 
Mathematics 19. and one year of physics or 
consent of instructor. 

32 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 

A study of the fundamental methods of gra- 
vimetric, volumetric, and elementary instru- 
mental analysis together with practice in labo- 
ratory techniques and calculations of these 
methods. Two hours lecture and mo three- 
hour labortory periods each week. Prerequis- 
ite: Chemistry 1 1 or consent of instructor. 

33 ADVANCED INORGANIC CHEMISTRY 
A study of modem theories of atomic and 
molecular structure and their relationship to 
the chemistry of selected elements and their 
compounds. Three hours lecture and one 
four-hour laboratory period each week. Pre- 
requisite: Chemistry 30. Mathematics 19. and 
one year of physics or consent of instructor. 



39 INTRODUCTION TO 
QUANTUM MECHANICS 

After presenting the origin, basic concepts, 
and formulation of quantum mechanics with 
emphasis on its physical meaning, the free 
particle, simple harmonic oscillator, and 
central-force problems will be investigated. 
Both time-independent and time-dependent 
perturbation theory will be covered. The eleg- 
ant operator formalism of quantum mechanics 
will conclude the course. Four hours of lec- 
ture and recitation. Prerequisites: Mathema- 
tics 21 . either Chemistry 31 or Physics 26. 
and consent of instructor. Cross-listed as 
Physics 48. 

40 ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 
Selected topics, which may include mechan- 
isms of organic reactions, synthesis, detailed 
structure and chemistry of natural products, 
polynuclear hydrocarbons, and aromatic 
heterocyclics. Three hours lecture. Prere- 
quisite: Chemistry 21 . 

41 QUALITATIVE ORGANIC ANALYSIS 
Theory and application of the systematic 
identification of pure organic compounds and 
mixtures. Two hours lecture and nvo three- 
hour laboratory periods each week. Prere- 
quisite: Chemistry 21 . 

43 ADVANCED 
ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 

A study of advanced analytical methods with 
emphasis on chromatographic, electrochemi- 
cal, and spectroscopic methods of instrumen- 
tal analysis. Three hours lecture and one 
four-hour laboratory period each week. Pre- 
requisite: Chemistry 31 and 32 or consent of 
instructor. 

44 BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis is given to the metabolism of car- 
bohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins, and 
nucleic acids; integration of metabolism; and 
biochemical control mechanisms, including 
allosteric control, induction, repression as 
well as the various types of inhibitive control 
mechanisms. Prerequisite: Chemistry 21 or 
IS or consent of instructor. Cross-listed as 
Biology 44. 

45 SPECTROSCOPY AND 
MOLECULAR STRUCTURE 

Theory and practice of molecular structure 
determination by spectroscopic methods. 
Three hours lecture. Pre- or co-requisites: 
Chemistry 31 . 33. or consent of instructor. 

48 CHEMISTRY COLLOQUIUM 

A seminar in which faculty, students, and 
invited professional chemists discuss their 
own reseach activities or those of others which 
have appeared in recent chemical literature. 
Prerequisite: Three semesters of non-credit 



31 



Chemistry Colloquium taken during the junior 
and senior years. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

The student will ordinarily work under super- 
vision in an industrial labortory and submit a 
wntlen report on his project. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
The student will ordinarily work on a laborato- 
ry research project and will write a thesis on 
his work. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 
The student will ordinarily work on a laborato- 
ry research project with emphasis being on the 
student's showing initiative and making a 
scholarly contribution. A thesis will be writ- 
ten. 



CRIMINAL JUSTICE 

Assistant Professor: Strauser 
(Coordinator) 

This major is designed to acquaint 
students with the American criminal jus- 
tice system and to provide an under- 
standing of the social, psychological, 
philosophical, and political contexts 
within which the system of criminal jus- 
tice functions. Its aim is to develop stu- 
dents" intellectual and scientific skills in 
raising and attempting to answer impor- 
tant questions about the system of justice 
and its place in society. The program 
offers opportunity for intern experience 
in the field, and prepares for careers in 
the areas of law enforcement, probation 
and parole, prisons, and treatment ser- 
vices. 

The major has two tracks. Track I 
prepares for careers in law enforcement. 
Track II prepares for careers in correc- 
tions. 

Track I — Law Enforcement. 

The major consists of 10 courses, dis- 
tributed as follows: 

A. Professional courses in criminal 
justice (three courses) 
Introduction to the Criminal Justice 
System (Sociology and Anthropolo- 
gy 15) 



Introduction to Law Enforcement 
(Sociology and Anthropology 23) 
The American Prison System 
(Sociology and Anthropology 39) 

B. Courses in the social, psychological, 
philosophical, and political context 
of the justice system (seven courses) 
Criminology (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 30) and either Juvenile Delin- 
quency (Sociology and Anthropolo- 
gy 21) or Racial and Cultural 
Minorities (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 34) (two courses) 
Anthropology 34 (two courses) 
Abnormal Psychology 
(Psychology 16) (one course) 
America as a Civilization (American 
Studies 10), Afro- American History 
(History 28) or United States Social 
and Intellectual History Since 1877 
(History 43) (one course) 

Law and Society (Political Science 
35) and Civil Rights and Liberties 
(Political Science 31) (two courses) 
Philosophical Issues in Criminal Jus- 
tice (Philosophy 18) (one course) 

C. Internship or practicum in law enfor- 
cement. (Recommended but not 
required for the major) 

Track II — Corrections. 

The major consists of 10 courses, dis- 
tributed as follows: 

A. Professional courses in criminal 
justice (three courses) 
Introduction to the Criminal Justice 
System (Sociology and Anthropolo- 
gy 15) 

The American Prison System 
(Sociology and Anthropology 39) 
Introduction to Human Services 
(Sociology and Anthropology 22) 

B. Courses in the social, psychological, 
philosophical, and political context 
of the justice system (seven courses) 
Criminology (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 30) and either Juvenile Delin- 
quency (Sociology and Anthropolo- 
gy 21) or Racial and Cultural 
Minorities (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 34) (two courses) 
Abnormal Psychology (Psychology 
16) (one course) 

America as a Civilization (American 
Studies 10), Afro-American History 



(History 28) or United States Social 
and Intellectual History Since 1877 
(History 43) (one course) 
Law and Society (Political Science 
35) and Civil Rights and Liberties 
(Political Science 31) (two courses) 
Philosophical Issues in Criminal Jus- 
tice (Philosophy 18) (One course) 
C. Internship or practicum in correc- 
tions. (Recommended but not 
required for the major). Prerequis- 
ites: Mathematics 13, Psychology 
31 , and Psychology 39. These prere- 
quisites may be waived in certain 
cases by the coordinating committee. 

Majors should seek advice concerning 
course selection from members of the 
coordinating committee and should note 
course prerequisites in planning their 
programs. 

ECONOMICS 



Professors: Opdahl (Chairperson), 
Rabold 

The major has two tracks. Track I is 
designed for the student whose primary 
interest lies in business management; 
Track II is designed for students with an 
interest in graduate work, teaching, gov- 
ernment or non-business careers, and for 
those with less well-defined interests. 

Track I — Managerial Economics 

requires: Economics 10, 1 1, 32, and 41; 
Business 10-1 1 or Accounting 10 and 20; 
Business 38 and 39, plus two electives 
from Economics 20, 3 1 , 35, 37, 43, and 
Business 40. Business 33 (Investments) 
may be substituted for Business 39 
(Financial Management II). 

Track II — Political Economy 

requires: Economics 10, 11, 30. 31,40, 
and five electives of which three must be 
in economics and two in political sci- 
ence, all selected with the advice and 
consent of the student's adviser or 
department chairperson. Economics 41 
(Managerial Economics) may be substi- 
tuted for Economics 30 (Intermediate 
Microeconomics). 



32 



In addition, the following courses are 
recommended: all majors — Math 13 
and Business 23; majors planning gra- 
dute work — Math 12-18: Track II 
majors — Business 10-1 1. 

A minor in Economics requires the 
completion of Economics 10 and 1 1 and 
three other economics courses numbered 
20 or above, selected by the student with 
prior approval of the department chair- 
person. 

2 CONSUMER ECONOMICS 

A course in "family" or "practical" eco- 
nomics, designed to teach students how they 
and their families can be intelligent consum- 
ers: that is, how they can spend, save, and 
borrow so as to maximize the value they 
receive for the income they have. Treats sub- 
jects such as intelligent shopping; the uses and 
abuses of credit; investing savings; buying 
insurance, automobiles, and houses; medical 
care costs; estates and wills, etc. Alternate 
years. 

10 PRINCIPLES OF 
POLITICAL ECONOMY I 
Macroeconomics. Deals with problems of the 
economic system as a whole. What influences 
the level of national income and employment? 
What is inflation and why do we have it? What 
is the role of government in a modem capita- 
listic system? How does business organize to 
produce the goods and services we demand? 
How are the American financial and banking 
systems organized? What is the nature of 
American unionism? What are the elements of 
government finance and fiscal policy? 

1 1 PRINCIPLES OF 
POLITICAL ECONOMY II 

This course focuses upon microeconomics 
and selected current economic problems. It 
deals with the relatively small units of the 
economy such as the firm and the family. 
Analyzes demand and supply. Discusses how 
business firms decide what and how much to 
produce and how goods and services are 
priced in different types of markets. Also 
considers such problems as economic growth, 
international trade, poverty, discrimination, 
ecology, and alternative economic systems. 

20 MONEY AND BANKING 

Covers business fluctuations and monetary 
and fiscal policy; the financial organization of 
society; the banking system; credit institu- 
tions; capital markets, and international finan- 
cial relations. Prerequisite: Economics 10 and 
11. 

22 ECONOMIC SYSTEMS OF THE WEST 
(CAPITALISM AND SOCIALISM) 
A comparative analysis of the underlying 



ideologies, the basic institutions, and the per- 
formance of selected economic systems extant 
in the West. Alternate years. 

23 SOVIET-TYPE ECONOMICS 

An analysis of the ideologies, institutions, and 
performance of Soviet-type economics, with 
emphasis upon Marxian theory and the eco- 
nomy of the U . S S . R. ; comparison of selected 
Eastern European and Chinese approaches to 
communism. Alternate years. 

24 URBAN PROBLEMS 

The application of economic theory to the 
study of significant social, political, and eco- 
nomic problems associated with urbanization, 
including poverty, employment, education, 
crime, health, housing, land use and the envi- 
ronment, transportation, and public finance. 
Analysis of solutions offered. ;4/rfrna/ev<'ari. 

25 ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS 

A study of the relationship between environ- 
mental decay and economic growth, with par- 
ticular reference to failures of the price and 
property-rights systems; application of cost/ 
benefit analysis, measures aimed at the crea- 
tion of an ecologically viable economy. Alter- 
nate years. 

30 INTERMEDIATE MICROECONOMICS 
An advanced analysis of contemporary theory 
regarding consumer demand, production costs 
and theory, profit maximization, market 
structures, and the determinants of returns to 
the factors of production. Prerequisites: Eco- 
nomics 10 and II. Alternate years. 

31 INTERMEDIATE MACROECONOMICS 
An advanced analysis of contemporary theory 
and practice with regard to business fluctua- 
tions, national income accounting, the deter- 
mination of income and employment levels, 
and the use of monetary and fiscal policy. 
Prerequisites: Economics 10 and II. Alter- 
nate years. 

32 GOVERNMENT AND THE ECONOMY 
An analytical survey of government's efforts 
to maintain competition through antitrust 
legislation; to supervise acceptable cases of 
private monopoly through public utility reg- 
ulation and via means of regulatory commis- 
sions, and to encourage or restrain various 
types of private economic activities. Prere- 
quisites: Economics 10 and 1 1 or consent of 
instructor. 

35 LABOR PROBLEMS 

The history of organized labor in the United 
States, including the structure of unions, 
employers' opposition to unions, the role of 
government in labor-management relations, 
the economic impact of unions. Alternate 
\ears. 



37 PUBLIC FINANCE 

An analysis of the fiscal economics of the 
public sector, including the development, 
concepts, and theories of public expenditures, 
taxation, and debt at all levels of American 
government. Includes also the use of fiscal 
policy as an economic control device. Prere- 
quisites: Economics 10 and II or consent of 
instructor. 

40 HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT 

A discussion of the origins, development, and 
significance of the economic ideas embodied 
in the works of Smith, Marx, Schumpeter. 
Keynes, and others. Prerequisites: Econom- 
ics 10 and 1 1 or consent of instructor. Alter- 
nate years. 

41 MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS 

The application of economic theory and 
methodology to the solution of business prob- 
lems. Subjects include: optimizing tech- 
niques, risk analysis, demand theory, produc- 
tion theory, cost theory, linear programming, 
capital budgeting, market structures, and the 
theory of pricing. Prerequisites: Economics 
10 and II. 

43 INTERNATIONAL TRADE 

A study of the principles, theories, develop- 
ment, and policies concerning international 
economic relations, with particular reference 
to the United States. Subjects covered include: 
U.S. commercial policy and its development, 
international trade theory, tariffs and other 
protectionist devices, international monetary 
system and its problems, balance of payments 
issues. Alternate years. Prerequisites: Eco- 
nomics 10 and II. 

45 DEVELOPMENT OF 

UNDERDEVELOPED NATIONS 
A study of the theories and problems of capital 
accumulation, allocation of resources, tech- 
nological development, growth, planning 
techniques, and institutions and international 
relations encountered by the developing 
nations. Alternate years. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Typically off campus in business, banking, or 
government, supervised by assigned employ- 
ee of sponsoring organization. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Superior students may select independent 
study in various courses, particularly in prepa- 
ration for graduate school. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



33 



EDUCATION 



Associate Professor: Keesbury 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Conrad 
Instructor: Cherrington 

Lycoming believes that the liberal arts 
provide the best preparation for future 
teachers, thus all education students 
complete a liberal-arts major in addition 
to the certification requirements. Stu- 
dents can be certified in elementary edu- 
cation or one or more of the following 
secondary areas: biology, chemistry. 
English, French, general science (with 
biology or astronomy/physics tracks), 
German, mathematics, physics, social 
studies, and Spanish. All teacher- 
education programs are approved by the 
Pennsylvania Department of Education, 
and Pennsylvania certificates are recog- 
nized in most other states whether 
through reciprocal agreements or by 
transcript evaluation. 

Education 20 and Psychology 38 are 
prerequisites to all other offerings in the 
Department of Education. Education 20 
should be taken at least two semesters 
before the professional semester. 

Students seeking elementary certifi- 
cation must complete Mathematics 7, 
Education 40, 41, 42, and 43 as prere- 
quisites to the professional semester 
(Education 45, 47, and 48). 

Students interested in the teacher- 
education program should consult with a 
member of the department no later than 
the first semester of the sophomore year. 
Application for the professional semester 
must be made during the Fall Semester of 
the junior year. The Department of Edu- 
cation will admit to the professional 
semester those applicants who are in 
good academic standing, have satisfac- 
torily completed the participation 
requirements, have paid the student 
teaching fee, and have received a posi- 
tive recommendation based upon: (a) 
letters from each student's major depart- 
ment, two additional faculty outside the 
Department of Education; ( b) a screening 
interview conducted by the Education 
Department, and (c) a writing sample 



from each student applicant. Major 
departments have different criteria for 
their recommendations. Therefore, stu- 
dents should consult with the chairperson 
of their major department about those 
requirements as soon as they begin to 
study for certification. 

5 DEVELOPMENTAL SEMINAR 

The course focuses on developing reading and 
study skills which are useful in college. Read- 
ing comprehension, vocabulary building, and 
critical reading are especially emphasized. 
Study skills, includmg time management, 
textbook reading, reading-study systems, 
notetakmg. test-taking skills, and library 
reference skills are also stressed. Open only to 
freshmen who are enrolled in Engish 5 or with 
consent of instructor. One-half unit of credit. 

20 INTRODUCTION TO 

THE STUDY OF EDUCATION 

A study of teaching as a profession with 
emphasis on the economic, social, political, 
and religious conditions which influence 
Amencan schools and teachers. Considera- 
tion is given to the school environment, the 
curriculum, and the children with the intention 
that students will examine more rationally 
their own motives for entering the profession. 

32 INSTRUCTIONAL MEDIA 
AND COMMUNICATIONS 
A study of the value, design, construction, 
and application of the visual and auditory aids 
to learning. Practical experience in the hand- 
ling of audio-visual equipment and materials 
is provided. Application of audio-visual tech- 
niques. Application of the visual and auditory 
aids to learning. Students will plan and carry 
out actual teaching assignments utilizing vari- 
ous A-V devices. 

39 PUBLIC SCHOOL CURRICULUM 

An examination of the vanous curricula of the 
public schools and their relationships to cur- 
rent practices. Special attention will be given 
to the meaning and nature of the curriculum, 
the desirable outcomes of the curriculum, 
conflicting and variant conceptions of cum- 
cular content, modem techniques of cumcular 
construction, criteria for the evaluation of 
curricula, the curriculum as a teaching instru- 
ment. Emphasis will be placed upon the curri- 
culum work within the teaching Tield of each 
individual. 

40 TEACHING LANGUAGE ARTS 
AND CHILDREN'S LITERATURE IN 
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

A course designed to consider the pnncipal 
means of communication, oral and written, 
including both practical and creative uses. 
Attention will be given to listening, speaking. 



written expression, linguistics and grammar, 
spelling, and handwriting. Stress will be 
placed upon the interrelatedness of the lan- 
guage arts. Children's literature will be 
explored as a vehicle for developing creative 
characteristics in children and for ensuring an 
appreciation of the creative writing of others. 
Observation and participation in Greater Wil- 
liamsport elementary schools. Prerequisites: 
Education 20 and Psychology 38 or consent of 
instructor. 

41 TEACHING THE SOCIAL STUDIES 
IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 
Studies and experiences to develop a basic 
understanding of the structure, concepts, and 
processes of anthropology, economics, geo- 
graphy, history, political science, and sociol- 
ogy as they relate to the elementary school 
social-science curriculum. Practical applica- 
tions, demonstrations of methods, and the 
development of integrated teaching units 
using tests, reference books, films, and other 
teaching materials. Observation and partici- 
pation in Greater Williamsport elementary 
schools. Prerequisites: Education 20 and 
Psychology 38 or consent of instructor. 

42 TEACHING SCIENCE IN 
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

Science methods and materials interpreting 
children's sciencetxperiences and guiding the 
development of their scientific concepts. A 
study of the science content of the curriculum, 
its material, and use. Observation and partici- 
pation in Greater Williamsport elementary 
schools. Prerequisites: Education 20 and 
Psychology 38 or consent of instructor. 

43 TEACHING READING IN 
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

A basic course in the philosophy and rationale 
for the implementation of an elementary 
developmental-reading program from kinder- 
garten through sixth grade. Emphasis is upon 
designing a reading instructional program 
which reflects the nature of the learning pro- 
cess and recognizes principles of child deve- 
lopment through examination of the princi- 
ples, problems, methods, and materials used 
in elementary reading programs. Observation 
and participation in Greater Williamsport 
elementary schools. Prerequisites: Psycholo- 
gy 38. Education 20. or consent of instructor . 

45 METHODS OF TEACHING IN THE 
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
The course emphasizes the relationship 
between the theoretical studies of physical, 
social, and cognitive development and the 
elementary classroom environment. Particu- 
lar consideration will be given to the appropri- 
ate age and developmental level of the stu- 
dents with an emphasis upon selection and 
utilization of methods in all the elementary 



34 



subject areas, including art and music. Spe- 
cific attention will be given to the develop- 
ment of strategies for structuring lesson plans, 
for maintaining classroom control, and for 
overall classroom management. Direct appli- 
cation will be made to the individual student- 
teaching experience. Prerequisites: Math 7. 
Education 40. 41, 42. and 43. or consent of 
instructor. 

46 METHODS OF TEACHING IN THE 
SECONDARY SCHOOL (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 

A study of materials, methods, and techniques 
with emphasis on the student's major. Stress is 
placed on the selection and utilization of vis- 
ual and auditory aids to learning . Students will 
teach demonstration lessons in the presence of 
the instructor and the members of the class and 
will observe supenor teachers in Greater Wil- 
liamsport secondary schools. Prerequisites: 
Education 20. Psychology JS. and the partici- 
pation experience. 

47 PROBLEMS IN CONTEMPORARY 
AMERICAN EDUCATION (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
Seminar in the issues, problems, and chal- 
lenges encountered by teachers in the Ameri- 
can public schools, especially those related to 
the student-teaching experience. 

48 STUDENT TEACHING IN THE 
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 

Two units. Exceeds state-mandated minimum 
requirements. Professional laboratory experi- 
ence under the supervision of a selected 
cooperating teacher in a public elementary 
school in Greater Williamsport. Organizes 
learning experiences. Actual classroom 
experience.* 

49 STUDENT TEACHING IN THE 
SECONDARY SCHOOL (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 

Two units. Exceeds slate-mandated minimum 
requirements. Professional laboratory experi- 
ence under the supervision of a selected 
cooperating teacher in a public secondary 
school in Greater Williamsport. Organized 
learning experience. Emphasis on actual 
classroom experience, responsibility in the 
guidance program, and out-of-class activi- 
ties.* 

*Sludent teachers are required to follow the calen- 
dar of the school district to which they are assigned , 



ENGLISH 



Professor: Van Marter 
Associate Professors: Jensen 

(Chairperson), Rife 
Assistant Professors: Gold, 

Moses, Wild 
Visiting Instructor: Hartsock 

A major consists of nine courses not 
including English 3, 5 or 6. These nine 
courses must include English 1 7 , 20, 2 1 , 
22, 23. and one from English 35 and 36. 

The remaining electives may include 
any course from English 12 and above 
not already taken to satisfy the preceding 
requirements. With the consent of the 
Department of English, an appropriate 
course from the offerings of other depart- 
ments may be substituted for an English 
elective. 

Majors seeking secondary certifica- 
tion in English are required to take Eng- 
lish 35 and English 38. 

The Department of English partici- 
pates with seven others in the American 
Studies interdisciplinary major, in which 
American literature courses constitute an 
important part of the American-arts con- 
centration area. 

Because of its emphasis on communi- 
cation skills, a major or a minor in Eng- 
lish is excellent preparation for a wide 
range of professions. In addition to pre- 
paring students for graduate work or for 
teaching, a major or a minor in English 
can be valuable for those interested in a 
career in law, ministry, publishing, edit- 
ing or writing, and business, to name a 
few. 

Two minors are available in the 
Department of English. A minor in 
English Literature consists of five litera- 
ture courses numbered 12 and above, 
three of which must be numbered 20 or 
above, and at least one of which must be 
numbered 30 or above. With the prior 
written consent of the department, one 
writing course may be substituted for a 
literature course. A minor in Writing 
consists of English 16 or 17; 18 and 38; 
28 or 37; and a senior practicum in an 
extended writing project. At least three 
of these courses must be numbered 20 or 



above. With prior written consent of the 
department, one literature course may be 
substituted for a writing course with the 
following restriction: 16 or 17 and a 
senior practicum are required for the 
writing minor. 

3 BASIC WRITING AND 

COMMUNICATION SKILLS 
Intensive practice in using basic grammar and 
spelling conventions and in writing sentences, 
paragraphs, and essays; major emphasis on 
the development and organization of con- 
cepts. This course does not substitute for 
English 5 or 6 and may not be taken to satisfy 
the English distnbution requirement. 

5 WORKSHOP IN 
DEVELOPMENTAL WRITING 
Classroom and laboratory instruction in or- 
ganizing and writing the detailed paragraph 
and illustrative expository theme, with major 
emphasis on spelling, grammar, and sentence 
structure. Writing assignments and classroom 
exercises designed to ensure mastery of the 
student's special problems in basic writing 

One-half unit grade of "S " will be assigned 
when the student has successfully completed 
all of the work in the course. Required of, and 
limited to. those who have not been exempted 
from English 5. 

6 COMPOSITION 

Extensive practice in analytical writing. Spe- 
cial emphasis on developing the composing 
skills needed to articulate and defend a posi- 
tion in various situations requiring the use of 
written English. 

12 INTRODUCTION TO LITERATURE 

An introduction to the study of literature 
designed for the general student and utilizing 
one of the following approaches: major liter- 
ary genres, selected literary masterpieces, or 
traditional themes in literature. 

16 WRITING FOR SPECIAL AUDIENCES 
Intensive practice in writing and presenting 
information to various audiences within the 
student's own discipline. Includes training in 
the use of graphics and in basic library 
research methods. Prerequisites: a grade ofC 
or belter in English 6 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

17 CRITICAL WRITING 

Designed to provide intermediate students of 
literature with the critical skills necessary for 
an understanding of poetry, fiction, drama, 
and film. Intensive reading and extensive 
practice in writing the critical essay. Required 
of English majors. 



35 



18 NEWSWRITING FOR 
THE PRINT MEDIA 

Analysis of and practice in the basic forms of 
newswriting: the elements of news, lead, 
style, and structure. Frequent workshop ses- 
sions for detailed critiques and discussion of 
student writing. Alternate years. 

20 BRITISH LITERATURE I 

Literary forms, themes, and authors from the 
Anglo-Saxon through the Neo-Classical per- 
iods. Such writers as Chaucer. Spenser. 
Shakespeare. Milton. Swift. Pope, and John- 
son; representative works from Beowulf to 
Sterne's Sentimenlal Journey. 

21 BRITISH LITERATURE II 

Literary movements and authors from the 
Romantic Period to the present. Particular 
empha.sis on such writers as Blake. Words- 
worth. Shelley. Keats. Tennyson. Browning. 
Arnold. Hardy. Yeats, Eliot 

22 AMERICAN LITERATURE I 

Brief survey of American literature and 
thought before 1 800. followed by more inten- 
sive study of the literature and thought of the 
period 1800-1900. Major focus on the works 
of Emerson. Thoreau. Poe. Hawthorne. Mel- 
ville. Whitman, Dickinson, and Howells. 

23 AMERICAN LITERATURE II 

Major writers, movements, and tendencies in 
American literature during the present cen- 
tury. Such forces as naturalism, realism, and 
modernism: such writers as James, Dreiser, 
Hemingway, Faulkner, Frost, Eliot, and Ste- 
vens. 

24 THE SHORT STORY 

Historical and critical study of the short story. 
Consideration of representative examples of 
the form with emphasis on American and 
European writers of the 19th and 20th centu- 
ries. 

25 THE NOVEL 

Historical study of the development of the 
novel from the 18th through the 20th centu- 
ries. Novels analyzed both as works of prose 
an and as turning points in the development of 
the novel. Alternate years. 

26 LITERATURE AND FILM 

The relationship between the conventions of 
literature and lilm with emphasis on examina- 
tion of representative literary and film works. 
Media comparison to reveal the problems of 
adaptation. 

28 CREATIVE WRITING WORKSHOP: 
FICTION AND POETRY 
A beginning course in the theory and practice 
of writing fiction and poetry. Students may 



concentrate in either genre or both. Alternate 
years. 

30 ROMANTIC LITERATURE 

A study of the major poetry and fiction, plus 
some non-fiction prose, written during the 
years. 1789-1832. Emphasis on the work of at 
least three poets, two novelists, and assorted 
prose writers. Alternate years. 

31 MODERN FICTION 

Study of the novels and short fiction of such 
major British and American figures as Con- 
rad. Forster. Woolf. Lawrence. Joyce. 
Hemingway, Faulkner. Nabokov, and Bel- 
low. 

32 MODERN POETRY 

A study of the poetry written in this century, 
beginning with Yeats and Eliot and continuing 
through such writers as Frost. Williams. 
Moore. Stevens, Auden, Lowell, Roethke, 
Thomas, Ginsberg, and Rich. Alternate 
years. 

33 COMEDY, TRAGEDY, AND 
THE MODERN THEATRE 
Introduction to the theories of comedy and 
tragedy as those theories help us to deepen our 
response to the theatre. Major focus on plays, 
including musicals, from Ibsen and Shaw to 
the present. Alternate years. 

34 WOMEN AND LITERATURE 

Through an examination — literary, social, 
and historical — of selected British and 
American literature by women, this course 
will seek to identify those elements which 
distinguish women's particular contribution to 
the literary canon. Alternate years. 

35 CHAUCER 

A study of the major works with emphasis on 
The Canterbury Tales and Troilus and Crisey- 
de. Some attention to the traditions out of 
which these works arose. Required of majors 
seeking secondary certification in English. 
Alternate years. 

36 SHAKESPEARE 

A study of representative plays: comedies, 
tragedies, histories, romances. Attention 
given to Shakespeare's life and times. Alter- 
nate years. 

37 PUBLIC RELATIONS AND 
PUBLICITY WRITING 
Communication and publicity techniques in 
the field of public relations focused on writing 
for the media. The news and feature release, 
newsletter, and house organ. Prerequisite: 
English IS or consent of instructor. Alternate 
years. 



38 LINGUISTICS AND THE ANALYSIS 
OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 
Introduction to methods of analyzing spoken 
and written English. Classroom work sup- 
ported by weekly tutorials, in which the stu- 
dent gains practical experience in identifying 
diagnosing, and correcting basic communica- 
tions problems. Required of majors seeking 
secondary certification in English. Alternate 
years. 

40 SELECTED WRITERS 

An intensive study of no more than three 
writers, selected on the basis of student and 
faculty interest. Possible combinations 
include; Frost, Hemingway, and Faulkner; 
O'Connor, Welty, and Porter; Spenser and 
Milton; Hawthorne, Melville, and Dickens; 
Woolf, Forster, and Lawrence: Joyce and 
Yeats. May be repealed for credit if the wri- 
ters are different. Alternate years. 

41 TOPICS IN LITERATURE 
Examination of a literary theme, idea, or 
movement as it appears in one or more types of 
literature and as it cuts across various epochs. 
Possible topics include: American Novelists 
and Poets of the Jazz Age and Depression; 
Religion and Literature; Gothic Tradition in 
American Literature; Realism in the Novel; 
Literary Modernism; Literature and Mytholo- 
gy; The Hero in Literature. May be repeated 
for credit if the topic is different. Alternate 



70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns typically work off campus in a profes- 
sion related to their career interest such as law. 
public relations, journalism, and others. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Recent studies include The Arthurian Legend. 
Shakespeare's Women, D.H. Lawrence, and 
T.S. Eliot: The Social Vision. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 
Recent projects include The Creative Process 
in Literature and Art and Images of Women in 
the I890's. 



FOREIGN LANGUAGES 
AND LITERATURES 

Associate Professors: Flam, Maples, 

MacKenzie (Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Barker, Gilmore 

Study of foreign languages and litera- 
tures offers opportunity to explore 



36 



broadly the varieties of human experi- 
ence and thought. It contributes both to 
personal and to international under- 
standing by providing competence in a 
foreign language and a critical acquain- 
tance with the literature and culture of 
foreign peoples. A major can serve as 
entree to careers in business, industry, 
government, publishing, education, 
journalism, social agencies, translating, 
and writing. It prepares for graduate 
work in literature or linguistics and the 
international fields of politics, com- 
merce, law, health, and area studies. 

French, German, and Spanish are 
offered as major fields of study. The 
major consists of at least eight courses 
numbered 10 or above. Majors seeking 
teacher certification and students plan- 
ning to enter graduate school are advised 
to begin study of a second foreign lan- 
guage. The department encourages the 
development in breadth of programs, 
including allied courses from related 
fields or a second major, and also indivi- 
dual or established interdisciplinary 
majors combining interest in several lit- 
eratures or area or cross-cultural studies; 
for example. International Studies. 20th 
Century Studies, the Major in Literature. 
Majors, teacher certification candidates, 
and all students are encouraged to spend 
at least a semester of study abroad by 
applying to one of the many programs 
available. The department maintains a 
file of such programs. 

Courses taught in English: Foreign 
Languages and Literatures 25, French 28 
(Section A) and Spanish 32 (Section A). 



Foreign Languages and Literatures 

25 CONTINENTAL LITERATURE 

A study of such major continental authors as 
Cervantes, Dostoevsky, Chekhov, Dante, 
Ibsen. Proust. Gide. Kafka. Hesse, Goethe. 
Sartre. Camus. Brecht. and lonesco. Works 
read in English translation will vary and be 
organized around a different theme or topic; 
recent topics have been existentialism, mod- 
ernism, drama, the Weimar era. and 20th 
century Scandinavian and German prose wri- 
ters. Prerequisite: None. May be repealed for 
credit with consent of instructor. May be 
accepted toward the English major with con- 
sent of the Department of English. 



38 FOREIGN LANGUAGE: 
SYSTEMS AND PROCESS 
Study of basic linguistic concepts as a tool for 
language learning and teaching. Discussion 
and application of languge teaching tech- 
niques, including work in the language labo- 
ratory. Designed for future teachers of one or 
more languages and normally taken in the 
junior year. Students should arrange through 
the Department of Education to fulfill in the 
same semester the requirements of a partici- 
pation experience in area schools. Prerequis- 
ite: consent of instructor. 

French 

A major consists of a minimum of 
eight courses numbered 10 or above, 
including at least two from 40, 42, 44, 
and 46. In addition, all majors who wish 
to be certified for teaching must pass 
courses 21-22, and Foreign Languages 
and Literatures 38 (the latter course with 
a C or better). 

A minor in French consists of at least 
four courses numbered 20 and above. 
Courses 10 and 11 may be counted to- 
ward the minor, but then the minor must 
consist of at least five courses, three of 
which must be numbered 20 and above. 

1-2 ELEMENTARY FRENCH 

The aim of the course is to acquire the funda- 
mentals of the language with a view to using 
them. Regular practice in speaking, under- 
standing, and reading. 

10-11 INTERMEDIATE FRENCH 

Review and development of the fundamentals 
of the language for immediate use in speaking , 
understanding, and reading with a view to 
building confidence in self-expression. Prere- 
quisite: French 2 or equivalent. 

21-22 FRENCH LANGUAGE PRACTICE 

Further training in speaking, listening com- 
prehension, reading, and writing. Includes 
extensive work in grammar. Prerequisite: 
French 1 1 or equivalent. 

28 MODERN FRANCE 

A course designed to familiarize students with 
political and social structures and cultural 
attitudes in contemporary French society. 
Materials studied may include such docu- 
ments as newspaper articles, interviews and 
sociological surveys, and readings in history, 
religion, anthropology, and the arts. Some 
attention to the changing education system 
and the family and to events and ideas which 
have shaped French society. May include 
some comparative study of France and the 
United States. 



English Section: Not applicable toward 
satisfying the foreign language distribution 
requirement. Prerequisite: none. 

French Section: Offers readings, papers, 
and interviews in French for students with 
sufficient language skill. Can be applied to- 
ward the foreign language distribution 
requirement. Prerequisite: French 21 or con- 
seru of instructor. 

40 FRENCH LITERATURE TO 1800 

Major authors and movements from the 
Medieval. Renaissance. Classical and 
Enlightenment periods. Includes the chanson 
de geste. Villon. Montaigne, Corneille. 
Racine, Moliere, Voltaire and Rousseau. Pre- 
requisite: French 22 or 28 or consent of 
instructor. Alternate years. 

42 FRENCH LITERATURE OF 
THE I9TH CENTURY 
The dimensions of the Romantic sensibility: 
Musset. Hugo, Vigny, Balzac, Stendhal 
Realism and Naturalism in the novels of 
Flaubert and Zola. Reaction in the poetry of 
Baudelaire, Rimbaud, Verlaine. and Mallar- 
me. Prerequisite: French 22 or 28 or consent 
of instructor. Alternate years. 

44 MODERN FRENCH THEATRE 

Major trends in French drama from the turn of 
the century to Existentialism and the Theatre 
of the Absurd. Giraudoux, Anouilh, Sartre, 
Camus, Beckett lonesco. Genet, Adamov. 
and others. Prerequisite: French 22 or 28 or 
consent of instructor. 

46 FRENCH LITERATURE OF 
THE 20TH CENTURY 
Representative poets and novelists of modem 
France. Readings selected from the works of 
authors such as Proust. Gide. Aragon. Giono, 
Mauriac. Celine. Malraux. Saint-Exupery. 
Camus, the "new novelists" (Robbe-Gnllet. 
Butor. Sarraute. Le Clezio). and the poetry of 
Apollinaire, Valery. the Surrealists (Breton. 
Reverdy. Eluard. Char), Samt-John Perse. 
Supervielle, Prevert, and others. Some atten- 
tion to works of French-speaking African 
writers. Prerequisite: French 22 or 28 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

49 ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE 

Intensive practice for advanced students who 
wish to improve further their spoken and writ- 
ten French. Includes work in oral comprehen- 
sion, phonetics, pronunciation, oral and wnt- 
ten composition, and translation. 
Prerequisite: one course from French 40. 42. 
44. 46 or consent of instructor. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See mdex) 



37 



Examples of recent studies in French include 
translation, existentialism, the classical peri- 
od, enlightenment literature, and Saint- 
Exupery. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

{See index) 

German 

A major consists of a minimum of 
eight courses numbered 10 or above. 
One unit of Foreign Languages and Lit- 
eratures 25 may be included in the major 
with permission. German 40 or German 
47 is required of all majors. 

All majors who wish to be certified for 
teaching must pass German 33 and 34. In 
addition to the eight courses for the major 
they must also pass Foreign Languages 
and Literatures 38 with a grade of C or 
better. All majors are urged to enroll in 
History 41. Music 36, Political Science 

20 and Theatre 35. 

A minor in German consists of at least 
four courses numbered 20 and above. 
Courses 10 and 1 1 may be counted to- 
ward the minor, but then the minor must 
consist of at lest five courses, three of 
which must be numbered 20 and above. 

1-2 ELEMENTARY GERMAN 

Aim of course is to acquire the fundamentals 
of the language with a view to using them. 
Regular practice in speaking, understanding, 
and reading 

1011 INTERMEDIATE GERMAN 

Review and development of fundamentals of 
the language for immediate use in speaking, 
understanding, and reding with a view to 
huilding confidence in self-expression. Prere- 
quisite: German 2 or equivalent. 

2 1 -22 COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW AND 

LANGUAGE PRACTICE 
A two-semester course designed to review and 
develop skills in speaking, listening, writing 
and reading Grammar and vocabulary build- 
ing are stressed with intensive review, writing 
practice and some reading on contemporary 
issues in German-speaking countries. As the 
course progresses, greater emphasis is placed 
on speaking, listening comprehension, and 
translation. Some attention is given to the 
development of the language and its relation- 
ship to English. Prerequisite: German II or 
equivalent. 

33 SURVEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE 
AND CIVILIZATION I 
Designed to acquaint the student with impor- 



tant periods of German literature, representa- 
tive authors, and major cultural developments 
in Germany. Austria, and Switzerland. The 
course deals with literature and culture from 
the Early Middle Ages through the 1 8th cen- 
tury. Prerequisite: German 22 or consent of 
instructor. 

34 SURVEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE 
AND CIVILIZATION II 
Designed to acquaint the student with impor- 
tant periods of German literature, representa- 
tive authors, and major cultural developments 
in Germany, Austria, and Switzerland. The 
course deals with literature and culture from 
the 19th century to the present. Prerequisite: 
German 22 or consent of instructor. 

40 GOETHE 

A study of the life and works of Goethe. 
Goethe's significance in the Classical period 
and later. Readings in the major works. Prere- 
quisite: German 33 or 34 or consent of 
instructor. 

41 CLASSICAL GERMAN DRAMA 

The development of das klassische Drama 
with emphasis on works of Lessing, Goethe, 
Kleist, and Schiller. Prerequisite: German 33 
or 34 or consent of instructor. 

43 THE NOVELLE 

The German Novelle as a genre relating to 
various literary periods. Prerequisite: Ger- 
man 33 or 34 or consent of instructor. 

45 GERMAN POETRY 

A study of selected poets or the poetry of 
various literary periods. Possible topics 
include: Romantic poetry, Heine, Rilke, and 
Benn Prerequisite: German 33 or 34 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

47 CONTEMPORARY GERMAN 
LITERATURE 

Representative poets, novelists and dramatists 
of contemporary Germany, Switzerland and 
Austria covering the period from 1945 to the 
present. Readings selected from writers such 
as: Borchert, Boll, Brechi, Benn, Frisch, Diir- 
renmatt, Bichsel. Handke, Walser, Grass and 
others. Prerequisite: German 33 or 34 or 
consent of instructor. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Examples of recent studies in German include 
Classicism, Germanic Mythology, Hermann 
Hesse, the dramas of Frisch, and Diirrenmatt. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



Greek 

Greek is not offered as a major. An 
interdisciplinary minor in Biblical Lan- 
guages requires the completion of Greek 
21, 22 and Hebrew 21 and 22. 

1-2 NEW TESTAMENT GRAMMAR 
AND READINGS 

Fundamentals of New Testament Greek gram- 
mar and readings of selected passages of the 
Greek text. Alternate years. 

21 READINGS IN THE 
SYNOPTIC GOSPELS 

A comparative study of the synoptic tradition 
in Greek. Prerequisite: Greek 2 or equivalent. 
Alternate years. 

22 READINGS IN THE 
PAULINE EPISTLES 

Selected readings from the letters of Paul in 
Greek. Prerequisite: Greek II or equivalent . 
Alternate years. 

Hebrew 

Hebrew is not offered as a major. An 
interdisciplinary minor in Biblical Lan- 
guages requires the completion of Greek 
21, 22 and Hebrew 21 and 22. 

I -2 OLD TESTAMENT GRAMMAR 
AND READINGS 

Fundamentals of Old Testament Hebrew 
grammar and readings of selected passages of 
the Hebrew text. Alternate years. 

21 READINGS IN OLD 
TESTAMENT NARRATIVE 

A critical reading of the Hebrew text of 
selected narrative portions of the Old Testa- 
ment with special attention being given to 
exegetical questions. The text read varies 
from year to year. Prerequisite: Hebrew 2 or 
equivalent. Alternate years. 

22 READINGS IN THE PROPHETIC 
BOOKS AND WISDOM LITERATURE 

A critical reading of the Hebrew text of 
selected portions of Old Testament prophecy 
and wisdom literature with special attention 
being given to exegetical questions. The text 
read varies from year to year. Prerequisite: 
Hebrew 21 or equivalent. Alternate years. 

Spanish 

A major consists of eight courses num- 
bered 10 or above. Foreign Languages 
and Literatures 38 does not count toward 
the major. 

All majors who wish to be certified for 
teaching in secondary school must pass 



38 



Foreign Languages and Literatures 38 
(grade of C or better) and Spanish 49. 

A minor in Spanish consists of at least 
four courses numbered 20 and above. 
Courses 10 and 1 1 may be counted 
toward the minor, but then the minor 
must consist of at least five courses, three 
of which must be numbered 20 and 
above. 

1-2 ELEMENTARY SPANISH 

Aim of course is to acquire the fundamentals 
of the language with a view to using them. 
Regular practice in speaking, understanding, 
and reading. 

10-11 INTERMEDIATE SPANISH 

Review and development of fundamentals of 
the language for immediate use in speaking, 
understanding, and reading with a view to 
building confidence in self-expression. Prere- 
quisite: Spanish 2 or equivalent. 

21-22 COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW AND 
LANGUAGE PRACTICE 
This course consists of a thorough review of 
grammar, drills for oral comprehension and 
expression, discussion of readings and the 
writing of compositions. It is designed to 
develop the student's ability to read, write and 
converse in Spanish with confidence. Prere- 
quisite: Spanish J J or equivalent. 

32 HISPANIC CULTURE 

To introduce students to the Spanish-speaking 
people — their values, customs and institu- 
tions, with reference to the geographic and 
historical forces governing present-day Spain 
and Spanish America. Prerequisite: Spanish 
22 or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

33 SURVEY OF SPANISH 
LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION 
Designed to acquaint the student with impor- 
tant periods of Spanish literature, representa- 
tive authors, and major socio-economic deve- 
lopments. The course deals with the literature 
from the beginning to the present. Prerequis- 
ite: Spanish 22 or consent of instructor . Alter- 
nate years. 

35 SURVEY OF SPANISH-AMERICAN 
LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION 
Designed to acquaint the student with impor- 
tant periods of Spanish-American literature, 
representative authors, and major socio- 
economic developments. The course deals 
with the literature, especially the essay and 
poetry, from the 16th century to the present. 
Prerequisite: Spanish 22 or consent of 
instructor. Alternate \ears. 



44 SPANISH LITERATURE OF 
THE GOLDEN AGE 

A study of representative works and principal 
literary figures in the poetry, prose, and drama 
of the 16th and 17th centuries. Prerequisite: 
Spanish 33. 35. or consent of instructor. 

45 MODERN HISPANIC LITERATURE 
Readings of important works of drama, poet- 
ry, and prose from the major periods of 19th 
and 20th century Spanish and Latin-American 
literature. Prerequisite: Spanish 33. 35. or 
consent of instructor. 

49 ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE 
Intensive practice for advanced students who 
wish to improve further their spoken and writ- 
ten Spanish. Includes work in oral com- 
prehension, pronunciation, oral and written 
composition, and translation. Prerequisite: 
One Spanish course at the 30' s level or con- 
sent of instructor. Alternate years. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 

(See index) 
Recent studies include literary, linguistic, and 
cultural topics and themes such as urban 
problems as reflected in the modem novel. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



HISTORY 

Professor: Piper 

Associate Professor: Larson 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Morris 

A major consists of 10 courses, 
including 10, 11, and 45. At least seven 
courses must be taken in the department. 
The following courses may be counted 
toward fulfilling the major requirements: 
American Studies 10, Political Science 
39, Religion 26 and 28. Other appropri- 
ate courses outside the department may 
be counted upon departmental approval . 
For history majors who student teach in 
history, the major consists of nine 
courses. In addition to the courses listed 
below, special courses, independent 
study, and honors are available. Special 
courses recently taught and anticipated 
include a biographical study of European 



Monarchs, the European Left, the 
Industrialization and Urbanization of 
Modem Europe, Utopian Movements in 
America, the Peace Movement in Ameri- 
ca, The Vietnam War, and American 
Legal History. History majors are 
encouraged to participate in the intern- 
ship program. 

Three minors are offered by the 
Department of History. The following 
courses are required to complete a minor 
in Amer/caw ///iron; History 12, 13, and 
three courses in American history num- 
bered 20 and above. A minor in Euro- 
pean History requires the completion of 
History 10. 11, and three courses in 
European history numbered 20 and 
above. To obtain a minor in History 
(without national or geographic designa- 
tion), a student must complete six 
courses in history, of which three must 
be chosen from History 10, 11, 12 and 13 
and three must be history courses num- 
bered 20 and above. 

5 SELECTED THEMES IN 
WESTERN CIVILIZATION 
A survey of the political, economic, social, 
and cultural values and institutions in Western 
Civilization from the time of classical Greece 
to the present. One-half unit of credit. (Not 
open to students who have had History 10 and 
II). 

10 EUROPE 1500-1815 

An examination of the political, social, cultur- 
al, and intellectual history of Europe and its 
relations with other areas of the world from 
1500 to 1815. 

1 1 EUROPE 1 8 1 5-Present 

An examination of the political, social, cultur- 
al, and intellectual history of Europe and its 
relations with other areas of the world from 
1815 to the present. 

12 UNITED STATES HISTORY 1607-1877 

A study of the men. measures, and move- 
ments which have been significant in the 
development of the United States between 
1607 and 1877. Attention is paid to the prob- 
lems of minonty groups as well as to majority 
and national influences. 

13 UNITED STATES HISTORY 

1877-Present 

A study of men. measures, and movements 
which have been significant in the develop- 
ment of the United States since 1877. Atten- 



39 



tion is paid to the problems of minority groups 
as well as to majority and national influences. 

20 ANCIENT HISTORY 

A study of the ancient western world, includ- 
ing the foundations of the western tradition in 
Greece, the emergence and expansion of the 
Roman state, its experience as a republic, and 
its transformation into the Empire. The course 
will focus on the social and intellectual life of 
Greece and Rome as well as political and 
economic changes. Alternate years. 

22 MEDIEVAL EUROPE AND 
ITS NEIGHBORS 

The history of Europe from the dissolution of 
the Roman Empire to the mid- 15th century. 
The course will deal with the growing 
estrangement of western Catholic Europe 
from the Byzantium and Islam, culminating in 
the Crusades; the rise of the Islamic Empire 
and its later fragmentation; the development 
and growth of feudalism; the conflict of 
empire and papacy, and the rise of the towns. 
Alternate years. 

23 EUROPE IN THE ERA OF 
THE WORLD WARS 

An intensive study of the political, economic, 
social, and cultural history of Europe from 
1 900- 1 945 . Topics include the rise of irration- 
alism, the origins of the First World War, the 
Communist and Fascist Revolutions, and the 
attempts to preserve peace before 1939. Pre- 
requisite: History 1 1 or consent of instructor. 

24 CONTEMPORARY EUROPE 

An intensive study of the political, economic, 
social, and cultural history of Europe since 
1945. Topics include the post-war economic 
recovery of Europe, the Sovietization of East- 
em Europe, the origins of the Cold War, 
decolonization, and the flowering of the wel- 
fare state. Prerequisite. History II or consent 
of instructor. 

25 FRENCH REVOLUTION 
AND NAPOLEON 

An analysis of the political, social, and intel- 
lectual background of the French Revolution, 
a survey of the course of revolutionary deve- 
lopment, and an estimate of the results of the 
Napoleonic conquests and administration. 
Prerequisite: History JO or consent of 
instructor. Alternate years. 

26 COLONIAL AMERICA AND 
THE REVOLUTIONARY ERA 

The establishment of British settlements on 
the American continent, their history as colo- 
nies, the causes and events of the American 
Revolution, the critical period following inde- 
pendence, and proposal and adoption of the 
United States Constitution. Alternate years. 



27 20TH CENTURY UNITED STATES 

This course begins with the Progressive Era 
and includes the political, economic, and 
social developments in the 20th century. 
Emphasis will be placed on the domestic and 
international demands which have faced the 
United States in the period following World 
War II. 

28 AFRO-AMERICAN HISTORY 

A study of the experiences and participation of 
Afro-Americans in the United States. The 
course includes historical experiences such as 
slavery, abolition, reconstruction, and urbani- 
zation. It also raises the issue of the develop- 
ment and growth of white racism, and the 
effect of this racism on contemporary Afro- 
American social, intellectual, and political 
life. Alterrmte years. 

29 LATIN AMERICAN HISTORY 

An examination of the native civilization, the 
age of discovery and conquest, Spanish colo- 
nial policy, the independence movements, 
and the development of modem institutions 
and governments in Latin America. Alternate 
years. 

3 1 HISTORY OF WORLD WAR 11 

A comprehensive examination of World War 
11 emphasizing the effect of ideological, eco- 
nomic, and political forces on the formulation 
of military strategy and the conduct of opera- 
tion; the nature and extent of the expansion of 
government powers; and the experience of 
war from the perspective of ordinary civilians 
and military alike. Does not count toward 
distribution. 

33 CONFLICT IN 
WESTERN CIVILIZATION 

An in-depth study of the changing nature of 
war and its relationship to the development of 
Western Civilization since the end of the 
Middle Ages. Particular emphasis will be 
placed on the role of war in the development of 
the modem nation state and the origins and 
nature of total war. Alternate years. 

34 DIPLOMATIC HISTORY OF 
EUROPE SINCE 1789 

A survey of the development of the 
European-states system and the relations 
between the European states since the begin- 
ning of the French Revolution. Prerequisite: 
History 1 1 or consent of instructor. Alternate 
years. 

35 THE CRISIS OF LIBERALISM AND 
NATIONALISM, EUROPE 1848-1870 

An in-depth investigation of the crucial 
"Middle Years" of 19th century Europe from 
the revolutions of 1 848 through the unification 
of Germany. The course centers on the strug- 
gles for power within the major stales of 



Europe at this time, and how the vehicle of 
nationalism was used to bring about one type 
of solution. Alternate years. 

37 AGE OF JEFFERSON AND JACKSON 
The theme of the course is the emergence of 
the political and social characteristics that 
shaped modem America. The personalities of 
Thomas Jefferson, John Marshall. John Ran- 
dolph. Aaron Burr, and Andrew Jackson 
receive special attention. Special considera- 
tion is given to the first and second party 
systems, the decline in community cohesive- 
ness. the westward movement, and the grow- 
ing importance of the family as a unit of social 
organization. Alternate years. 

38 CIVIL WAR AND RECONSTRUCTION 
The problems and events leading to war, the 
political and military history of the war, and 
the bitter aftermath to the Compromise of 

1877. 

39 20TH CENTURY 
UNITED STATES RELIGION 

The study of historical and cultural develop- 
ments in American society which relate to 
religion or what is commonly called religion. 
This involves consideration of the institutional 
and intellectual development of several faith 
groups as well as discussion of certain prob- 
lems, such as the persistence of religious 
bigotry and the changing modes of church- 
state relationships. Alternate years. 

40 HISTORY OF 
RENAISSANCE THOUGHT 

A study of the classical, humanist, and scho- 
lastic elements involved in the development of 
the Renaissance outlook on views and values, 
both in Italy and in Northem Europe. The 
various combinations of social and political 
circumstances which constitute the historical 
context of these intellectual developments will 
be noted. Alternate years. 

41 HISTORY OF 
REFORMATION THOUGHT 

A study of the ideas and systems of ideas 
propounded prior to the Reformation, but 
which are historically related to its inception, 
and of the ideas and systems of ideas involved 
in the formulation of the major Reformation 
Protestant traditions, and in the Catholic 
Reformation. Included are the ideas of the 
humanists of the Reformation Era. Alternate 



42 UNITED STATES SOCIAL AND 

INTELLECTUAL HISTORY TO 1877 
A study of the social and intellectual experi- 
ence of the United States from its colonial 
antecedents through reconstruction. Among 
the topics considered are Puritanism, tran- 
scendentalism, community life and organiza- 
tion, education, and social-reform move- 



40 



merits. Prerequisites: two courses from 
History 12, 13. 28. or consent of instructor. 

43 UNITED STATES SOCIAL AND 

INTELLECTUAL HISTORY SINCE 1877 
A study of the social and intellectual experi- 
ence of the United States from reconstruction 
to the present day. Among the topics consid- 
ered are social Darwinism, pragmatism, com- 
munity life and organization, education and 
social reform movements. Prerequisites: mo 
courses from History 12. 13, 28. or consent of 
instructor. 

45 HISTORICAL METHODS 

This course focuses on the nature and meaning 
of history. It will open to the student different 
historical approaches and will provide the 
opportunity to explore these approaches in 
terms of particular topics and periods. Majors 
are required to enroll in this course in either 
their junior or senior year. The course is open 
to other students who have two courses in 
history or consent of instructor. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Typically, history interns work for local gov- 
ernment agencies engaged in historical pro- 
jects or for the Lycoming County Histoncal 
Museum. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Recent topics include studies of the immigra- 
tion of American blacks, political dissension 
in the Weimer Republic, Indian relations 
before the American Revolution, and the his- 
tory of Lycoming County. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 



INTERNATIONAL STUDIES 

Associate Professor: Larson 
(Coordinator) 

The major is designed to integrate an 
understanding of the changing social, 
political, and historical environment of 
Europe today with study of Europe in its 
relations to the rest of the world, particu- 
larly the United States. It stresses the 
international relations of the North 
Atlantic community and offers the stu- 
dent opportunity to emphasize either 
European studies or international rela- 
tions. The program provides multiple 
perspectives on the cultural traits that 



shape popular attitudes and institutions. 
Study of a single country is included as a 
data-base for comparisons, and study of 
its language, as a basis for direct commu- 
nication with its people. 

The program is intended to prepare a 
student either for graduate study or for 
careers which have an international com- 
ponent. International obligations are 
increasingly assumed by government 
agencies and a wide range of business, 
social, religious, and educational organi- 
zations. Opportunities are found in the 
fields of journalism, publishing, com- 
munications, trade, banking, advertis- 
ing, management, and tourism. The pro- 
gram also offers flexible career 
preparation in a variety of essential 
skills, such as research, data analysis, 
report writing, languge skills, and the 
awareness necessary for dealing with 
people and institutions of another cul- 
ture. Preparation for related careers can 
be obtained through the guided selection 
of courses outside the major in the areas 
of business, economics, foreign lan- 
guages and literatures, government, his- 
tory, and international relations or 
through a second major. Students should 
design their programs in consultation 
with members of the Committee on Inter- 
national Studies. 

By completing six to eight additional 
courses in the social sciences (which 
include those courses needed to complete 
a major in economics, history, political 
science, or sociology/anthropology) and 
the required program in eduction, stu- 
dents can be certified for the teacher 
education program in social studies. By 
completing a major in the foreign lan- 
guage (five or more courses) and the 
education program, students can be certi- 
fied to teach that language. The Interna- 
tional Studies program also encourages 
participation in study-abroad programs, 
as well as the Washington and United 
Nations semesters. 

The major includes 1 1 courses 
selected as follows: 

International Relations Courses — 

Four or two courses (if two, then four 
must be taken from Area Courses). 
Courses within this group are designed to 



provide a basic understanding of the 
international system and of Europe's 
relations with the rest of the world. 
Political Science 25 is required. 

Political Science 25: World Politics 
Economics 43: International Trade 
History 34: European Diplomatic History 
Political Science 39: American Foreign 
Policy 

Area Courses — Four or two courses (if 
two, then four must be taken from Inter- 
national Relations Courses). Courses 
within this group are designed to provide 
a basic understanding of the European 
political, social, and economic environ- 
ment. History 1 1 and Economics 22 are 
required. 

History II; Europe 1815-Present 
Economics 22: Economic Systems of 

the West 
Political Science 20: European Politics 
History 23: Europe in the Era of the 

World Wars 
History 24: Contemporary Europe 

National Courses 

Language — Two courses in one lan- 
guage. 

French 21. plus one course numbered 22 or 

above (except 281 
German 2 1 , plus one course numbered 22 or 

above 
Spanish 2 1 , plus one course numbered 22 or 

above 



Country — One course. The student 
must select, according to his or her lan- 
guage preparation, one European coun- 
try which will serve as a special interest 
area throughout the program. The coun- 
try selected will serve as the base for 
individual projects in the major courses 
wherever possible. 

France — French 28: Modem France 
Germany — History 80: Topics in German 

History 
Spain — Spanish 32: Hispanic Culture 

Elective Course — One course which 
should involve further study of some 
aspect of the program. Appropriate 
courses are any area or international 



42 



relations courses not yet taken. History 
10, 33; Economics 23, 45; Political Sci- 
ence 26, 27, 38, 46; related foreign- 
literature courses counting toward the 
fine-arts requirement and internships. 

49 SENIOR SEMINAR 

A one-semester seminar, taken in the senior 
year, in which students and several faculty 
members will pursue an integrative topic in 
the field of international studies. Students will 
work to some extent independently. Guest 
speakers will be invited. The seminar will be 
open to qualified persons from outside the 
major and the College. Prerequisite: consent 
of instructor. 



LITERATURE 

Associate Professor: Maples 
(Coordinator) 

This major recognizes literature as a 
distinct discipline beyond national 
boundaries and combines the study of 
any two literatures in the areas of 
English, French, German, and Spanish. 
Students can thus explore two literatures 
widely and intensively at the upper levels 
of course offerings within each of the 
respective departments while developing 
and applying skills in foreign languages. 
The major prepares students for graduate 
study in either of the two literatures 
studied or in comparative literature. 

The major requires at least six litera- 
ture courses, equally divided between 
the two literatures concerned. The six 
must be at the advanced level as deter- 
mined in consultation with advisers (nor- 
mally courses numbered 20 and above in 
English and 40 and above in foreign 
languages). In general, two of the 
advanced courses in each literature 
should be period courses. The third 
course, taken either as a regular course or 
an independent study, may have as its 
subject another period, a particular 
author, genre, or literary theme, or some 
other unifying approach or idea. Beyond 
these six, the major must include at least 
two additional courses from among those 
counting toward a major in the depart- 
ments involved. Any prerequisite 



courses in the respective departments 
(for example: English 6, French 2 1-22 or 
28, German 21-22, Spanish 21-22) 
should be taken during the freshman 
year. Students should design their prog- 
rams in consultation with a faculty mem- 
ber from each of the literatures con- 
cerned. Programs for the major must be 
approved by the departments involved. 



MASS COMMUNICATION 



Instructor: Nason (Chairperson) 

The major in mass communication 
combines a liberal arts foundation with a 
professional sequence through a selec- 
tion of courses from the Departments of 
Art, Business Administration, English, 
Political Science, Psychology, Sociolo- 
gy and Anthropology, and Mass Com- 
munication. It also draws upon special- 
ized courses from the graphic arts 
department of the Williamsport Area 
Community College. Students complet- 
ing the program are qualified to pursue 
either career options or graduate study in 
mass communication, advertising, 
broadcasting, journalism, or public rela- 
tions. 

Students majoring in mass communi- 
cation must complete the Core Curricu- 
lum and one sequence, as well as the 
College distribution requirements. 

A minor in Mass Communication con- 
sists of Mass Comm 10 and any four of 
the following courses: Mass Comm 1 1 , 
24, 27. 28, 30, 31. 

I. THE CORE CURRICULUM 

REQUIRED OF ALL STUDENTS 

Two Theory Courses 

Mass Comm 10 Introduction to Mass 

Communication 

Mass Comm 30 Theories of Mass 

Communication 

A Media Regulation Course 

Mass Comm 31 Mass Media Law and 
Regulation 

A Production Course (Choice of one. Certain 
of these courses are required in specific 
sequences.) 



GCO 51 1 Layout and Design 

GCO 512 Typographic Composition 

Mass Comm 24 Television Production 

A Writing Course (Choice of one. Certain 
of these courses are required in specific 
sequences.) 

Eng 16 Writing for Special Audiences 
Eng 18 Newswnting for the Print Media 
Mass Comm 19 Newswriting for the 

Broadcast Media 
Pol Sci 34 Political Newswriting 

Mass Comm 27 Scriptwnting for Radio 
and Television 

A Research Course (Choice of one. Certain 
of these courses are required in specific 
sequences.) 

Pol Sci 48 Public Opinion and Polling 
Soc 47 Research Methods in Sociology 
Psy 32 Sensory Experimental Psychology 
Psy 24 Social Psychology 

Bus 45 Marketing Research 

An applied Media Experience Course 
(Choice of one.) 

Mass Comm 48-49 Practicum 

Mass Comm 70-79 Internship 

Mass Comm 80-89 Independent Study 

NOTE: Mass Communication core courses 
may be utilized both to meet the core require- 
ments and to complete sequence require- 
ments. Since some core courses must be used 
to meet sequence requirements students 
should review carefully sequence require- 
ments in selecting courses. 



SEQUENCE REQUIREMENTS 
Mass Communication majors must complete 
at least one sequence. All sequence require- 
ments are in addition to the core curriculum 
but the same course may be used to meet the 
core requirements as well as the requirements 
of sequences. 

Advertising Sequence: 

Bus 28-29 Marketing Management 

Bus 32 Advertising 

Pol Sci 48 Public Opinion and Polling or 
Bus 45 Marketing Research or 

Soc 47 Research Methods in Sociology 
GCO 5 1 1 Layout and Design 

GCO 512 Typographic Composition 

Mass Comm 1 1 Oral Communication 

Art 27 Photography I or 

Art 15 Two-dimensional Design 

Bus 47 Creative Advertising is 

strongly recommended, though 
not required, for this sequence. 



Broadcasting Sequence: 
Mass Comm 19 



Pol Sci 34 
Mass Comm 1 1 



Newswriting for 

Broadcast Media 

Political Newswriting 

Oral Communication 



43 



Mass Comm 31 Mass Media Law and 

Regulation 

Mass Comm 28 Radio Programming 

and Production 
Mass Comm 24 Television Production 
Mass Comm 27 Sciiptwriting for Radio 

and Television 
Eng 26 Film and Literature or 

Thea 1 1 Introduction to Film 

Journalism Sequence: 

Eng 16 Writing for Special Audiences 

Eng 17 Critical Wnting 

Eng 18 Newswriting for Print Media 

Pol Sci 34 Political Newswriting 

Pol Sci 1 1 State and Local Government 

Soc 34 Racial and Cultural Minorities 

Pol Sci 48 Public Opinion and Polling 

Art 27 Photography I 

GCO 512 Typographic Composition 

Public Relations Sequence: 

Eng 16 Writing for Special Audiences 
Eng 18 Newswriting for Print Media 

Eng 37 Public Relations and Publicity 
Bus 28-29 Marketing Management 

Pol Sci 48 Public Opinion and Polling or 
Soc 47 Research Methods in Sociology 
An 27 Photography I 

Mass Comm 24 Television Production 
Mass Comm 1 1 Oral Communication 



10 INTRODUCTION TO 
MASS COMMUNICATION 

Theories of the process of mass communica- 
tion and introduction to the mass media; 
attention will be given to problems of censor- 
ship and media ethics. Analysis of the mass 
media's impact on society; emphasis will be 
placed on the social, psychological, and 
political implications of the media's shaping 
mfluence on man and institutions. 

1 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF 
ORAL COMMUNICATION 

The dynamics of oral communication. The 
development of elementary principles of 
simple oral communication through lectures, 
prepared assignments in speaking, and infor- 
mal class exercises. Utilizes video-tape sequ- 
ences for feedback to students. 

19 NEWSWRITING FOR 

THE BROADCAST MEDIA 
Analysis of and practice in newswriting for 
broadcast: the news story, the newscast, and 
the interview. Frequent workshop sessions for 
critiques of student writing and oral presenta- 
tions. Alternate years. 

24 TELEVISION PRODUCTION 

Technical, aesthetic, organizational, and 
business aspects of video programs. Study and 
use of basic equipment to produce standard 
formats on videotape 



27 SCRIPTWRITING FOR 
RADIO AND TELEVISION 

Analysis of differences between radio and 
television writing requirements, station for- 
mats, standard program forms, script stan- 
dards, writing and criticism. Alternate years. 

28 RADIO PROGRAMMING 
AND PRODUCTION 

Contemporary broadcast programming tech- 
niques including station scheduling, program 
development and analysis, and implementa- 
tion in real and hypothetical situations. 
Emphasis on management functions. Alter- 
nate years. 

30 THEORIES AND ISSUES IN 
MASS COMMUNICATION 

An analysis of current theories dealing with 
mass communication systems and the beha- 
vior and attitudes of, and effects on, their 
audiences. The course also examines contem- 
porary mass media issues with an emphasis on 
developing critical thinking skills. Prere- 
quisite: Mass Comm 10. 

31 MASS MEDIA LAW AND REGULATION 
An examination of the legal structure and the 
system by which mass communication is con- 
trolled in this society. The forces which shape, 
influence, and make policy will be consid- 
ered. Cross-listed as Political Science 36. 
Prerequisite: junior or senior standing or 
consent of instructor. 

48-49 PRACTICUM IN 

MASS COMMUNICATION 
Utilization of mass communication princi- 
ples, techniques, and skills in an applied set- 
ting through work experience in a communi- 
cation agency or organization. This 
experience is coordinated with regular class 
meetings to analyze and evaluate relationships 
between theory and practice. Prerequisite: 
upper division status and consent of instruc- 
tor. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns usually work off campus in a field 
related to their communication sequence; 
some may work with the campus radio station. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Studies involve research related to the com- 
munication sequence of the student. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



Graphic Arts 

Through special arrangements, the 



following courses offered at the Wil- 
liamsport Area Community College are 
available only to students in the Mass 
Communication major and in the Art 
Track III major in Commercial Design. 
The WACC courses are taken as part of 
the student's schedule and are listed with 
Lycoming offerings during registration 
periods. 

5 1 1 LAYOUT AND DESIGN 

Analysis of materials, tools, and techniques 
used in preparation of copy for reproduction; 
paste-up and color separation overlays. 4 cr. 

5 1 2 TYPOGRAPHIC COMPOSITION 
Fundamentals of typesetting. Theory and 
practice in the care and use of composing 
machines, both hot (mechanical) and cold 
(photo). 4 cr. 

521 PROCESS CAMERA 

Concepts and techniques of darkroom proce- 
dure for reproduction of line and halftone copy 
on process camera. 4 cr. 



MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 



Associate Professors: Getchell, Haley 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professors: Bucki, DeSilva, 

Sprechini, Wallace 
Part-time Instructor: Dotzel 

The Department of Mathematical Sci- 
ences offers major programs in computer 
science and mathematics. 

Computer Science 

A major in computer science consists 
of 1 1 courses: Mathematics 16, 18, and 
19, and Computer Science 15, 26, 27, 
44, 45, and three other computer science 
courses numbered 30 or above, one of 
which must be 31 or 37. Recommended 
extradepartmental courses: Physics 27, 
Philosophy 25, and Psychology 37. 

A minor in Computer Science consists 
of Computer Science 26, 27, and two 
other computer science courses num- 
bered 20 or above. 

15 INTRODUCTION TO 
COMPUTER SCIENCE 
Introduction to programming and software 
utilities. Topics include algorithms, program 



44 



structure, computer configuration, memory 
allocation, and an exposure to application 
packages. Laboratory experience is included, 
most recently using OMSI Pascal, the Mini- 
Calc spreadsheet, and RUNOFF, a text for- 
matting package. Prerequisite: credit for or 
exemption from Mathematics 5. 

26 PRINCIPLES OF 
ADVANCED PROGRAMMING 
Principles of effective programming, includ- 
ing structured programming, stepwise refine- 
ment, assertion proving, style, debugging, 
control structure, decision tables, finite state 
machines, recursion, and encoding. Utilities 
most recently used include SVS Pascal, the 
UNIX operating systems. C. and Shell pro- 
gramming. Prerequisite: a grade ofC or bet- 
ter in Computer Science 15 or consent of 
instructor. 

27 DATA STRUCTURES 
Representation of data and algorithms asso- 
ciated with data structures. Topics include 
representation of lists, trees, graphs and 
strings, algorithms for searching and sorting. 
Prerequisite: a grade of C or better in Com- 
puter Science 26 or consent of instructor. 
Corequisite: Mathematics 16. 

.M INTRODUCTION TO 

NUMERICAL ANALYSIS 
Study and analysis of tabulated data leading to 
interpolation, numerical integration, numeri- 
cal solutions of differential equations, and 
systems of equations. Prerequisite: Computer 
Science 15 and Mathematics 19. Alternate 
years. Cross-listed as Mathematics 31 . 

35 INTRODUCTION TO 
COMPUTER GRAPHICS 
An introduction to graphics hardware and 
software with emphasis on the mathematics 
necessary to represent, transform, and display 
images of two and three dimensional objects. 
Laboratory exercises will be designed to 
explore the capabilities of the graphics system 
and to test the students' understanding of the 
principles discussed in class. Prerequisite: 
Computer Science 26 and either Computer 
Science 27 or permission of the instructor. 
Alternate years. 

37 COMPUTATIONAL MATRIX ALGEBRA 
An introduction to some of the algorithms 
which have been developed for producing 
numerical solutions to such linear algebraic 
problems as solving systems of linear equa- 
tions, inverting matrices, computing the 
eigenvalues of a matrix . and solving the linear 
least-squares problem. Prerequisites: Com- 
puter Science 15 and Mathematics 19 or con- 
sent of instructor. Alternate years. Cross- 
listed as Mathematics 37. 



39 DATABASE SYSTEMS 

External storage structures, hashed files, 
indexed files; relational, network, and hierar- 
chical data models; relational algebra and the 
relational calculus; design theory for relation- 
al databases; query optimization; concurrent 
operations; database protection. Prerequisite: 
Computer Science 27. Alternate years. 

44 MACHINE LANGUAGE 

Principles of machine language programming; 
computer organization and representation of 
numbers, strings, arrays, and list structures at 
the machine level; interrupt programming, 
relocatable code, linking loaders; interfacing 
with operating systems. Prerequisite: a grade 
of C or better in Computer Science 26 or 
consent of instructor. 

45 SYSTEMS PROGRAMMING 

The emphasis in this course is on the algor- 
ithms used in programming the various parts 
of a computer system. These parts include 
assemblers, loaders, editors, interrupt proces- 
sors, input/output schedulers, processor and 
job schedulers, and memory managers. Pre- 
requisite: Computer Science 27 and 44. 

46 COMPILER CONSTRUCTION 

The emphasis in this course is on the con- 
struction of translators for programming lan- 
guages. Topics include lexical analysis, block 
structure, grammars, parsing, program rep- 
resentation, and run-time organization. Pre- 
requisite: Computer Science 27. Alternate 
years. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 

(See index) 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 

Mathematics 

A major in mathematics consists of 10 
units of courses in the mathematical sci- 
ences: Computer Science 15, Mathema- 
tics 18. 19, 20, 24, 34, 42, and three 
other mathematics courses numbered 
above 20, one of which may be replaced 
by Mathematics 12, 14, or 16. Students 
seeking secondary certification in mathe- 
matics are required to complete Mathe- 
matics 30 and 36 and are advised to 
enroll in Philosophy 17. In addition, all 
majors are advised to elect Philosophy 25 
and 33, Physics 25 and 26. 

In addition to the regular courses listed 
below, special courses are occasionally 



available. Recent topics include compu- 
ter graphics and discrete probability. 

A minor in Mathematics consists of 
Mathematics 20, 24, and two other 
mathematics courses numbered above 
20. 



5 INDIVIDUALIZED LABORATORY 
INSTRUCTION IN BASIC ALGEBRA 
A self-paced study of arithmetic and decimal 
numerals, fractions, the real number line, 
factoring, solutions to linear and quadratic 
equations, graphs of linear and quadratic 
functions, expressions with rational expo- 
nents, algebraic functions, exponential func- 
tions, and inequalities. THIS COURSE IS 
LIMITED TO STUDENTS PLACED 
THEREIN BY THE MATHEMATICS 
DEPARTMENT. One-half unit of credit. 

7 MATHEMATICS IN 

ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 
This course is intended for prospective 
elementary school teachers and is required of 
all those seeking elementary certification. 
Topics include systems of numbers and of 
numeration, computational algorithms, envir- 
onmental and transformation geometry mea- 
surement, and mathematical concept forma- 
tion. Observation and participation in Greater 
Williamsport elementary schools. Corequis- 
ite: any education course numbered 40 or 
above which is specifically required for 
elementary certification or consent of 
instructor. 

9 INTRODUCTION TO CALCULUS 

An intuitive approach to the calculus concepts 
with applications to business, biology, and 
social-science problems. Not open to students 
who have completed Mathematics 18. Prere- 
quisite: credit for or exemption from Mathe- 
matics 5. Alternate years. 

12 FINITE MATHEMATICS 
FOR DECISION MAKING 

An introduction to some of the principal 
mathematical models, not involving calculus, 
which are used in business administration, 
social sciences, and operations research. The 
course will include both deterministic models 
such as graphs, networks, linear programming 
and voting models, and probabilistic models 
such as Markov chains and games. Prerequis- 
ite: credit for or exemption from Mathematics 
5. 

13 INTRODUCTION TO STATISTICS 
Empirical distributions of measurements, 
probability and random variables, discrete and 
continuous probability distributions, statisti- 
cal inference from small samples, linear 
regression and correlation, analysis of 



45 



enumerative data. Prerequisite: credit for or 
exemption from Mathematics 5. 

14 MULTIVARIATE STATISTICS 

The study of statistical techniques used in 
experimental designs where more than one 
random variable is involved. Techniques 
include analysis of variance, analysis of 
covariance. multiple regression and correla- 
tion, factor anaylsis and canonical correla- 
tions, contingency tables, discriminative anal- 
ysis, and non-parametric techniques. Further 
topics will be chosen from cluster analysis, 
time series analysis, and repealed measure 
analysis. Extensive use of a statistical package 
is made (currently BMDP). Prerequisite: 
Mathematics 13 or its equivalent. Alternate 
years. 

16 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS 

An introduction to discrete structures. Topics 
include equivalence relations, partitions and 
quotient sets, mathematical induction, recur- 
sive functions, elementary logic, discrete 
number systems, elementary combinatorial 
theory, and general algebraic structures 
emphasizing semi-groups, groups, lattices. 
Boolean algebras, graphs and trees. Prere- 
quisite: Computer Science 15 or consent of 
instructor. 

17 PRECALCULUS MATHEMATICS 

The study of logarithmic, exponential, trigo- 
nometric, polynomial, and rational functions, 
their graphs, and elementary properties. Pre- 
requisite: credit for or cxemptionfrom Mathe- 
matics 5. 



18. CALCULUS WITH 

ANALYTIC GEOMETRY I 
Differentiation of algebraic functions, graph- 
ing plane curves, applications to related rate 
and extremal problems, integration of alge- 
braic functions, areas of plane regions, vol- 
umes of solids or revolution, and other appli- 
cations. Prerequisite: a grade ofC or better in 
Mathematics 17 or consent of instructor. 

19 CALCULUS WITH 
ANALYTIC GEOMETRY II 
Differentiation and integration of transcen- 
dental functions, parametric equations, polar 
coordinates, the conic sections and their appli- 
cations, infinite sequences, and series expan- 
sions. Prereauisile: a grade ofC or better in 
Mathematics IS or consent of instructor. 

20 MULTIVARIATE CALCULUS 
WITH MATRIX ALGEBRA 

Vectors, linear transformations and their mat- 
rix representations, determinants, matrix 
inversion, solutions to systems of linear equa- 
tions, differentiation and integration of multi- 
variate functions, vector field theory and 
applications. Prerequisite: a grade of C or 



belter in Mathematics J 9 or consent of 
instructor. 

21 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 

A study of ordinary differential equations and 
their applications: first-order linear differen- 
tial equations, the Picard Existence Theorem, 
solution by separation of variables, solution 
by numerical methods; second-order linear 
differential equations, solution by variation of 
parameters, solution by power series, solution 
by Laplace transforms; systems of first-order 
equation, solutions by eigenvalues; qualita- 
tive theory, stability theory asymptotic beha- 
vior, and the Poincare-Bendixon theorem. 
Besides the usual applications in physics and 
engineering, considerable attention will be 
given to modem applications in the social and 
life sciences. Prerequisite: a grade of C or 
better in Mathematics 19 or consent of 
instructor. Alternate years. 

23 COMPLEX VARIABLES 

Complex numbers, analytic functions, com- 
plex integration. Cauchy's theorems and their 
applications. Corequisile: Mathematics 20. 
Alternate years. 

24 FOUNDATIONS OF MATHEMATICS 
Topics regularly included are the nature of 
mathematical systems, essentials of logical 
reasoning, and axiomatic foundations of set 
theory. Other topics frequently included are 
approaches to the concepts of infinity and 
continuity, and the construction of the real 
number system. The course serves as a bridge 
from the elementary calculus to advanced 
courses in algebra and analysis. Prerequisite: 
Mathematics 19 or consent of instructor. 

30 TOPICS IN GEOMETRY 

An axiomatic treatment of Euclidean geomet- 
ry, and an introduction to related geometries. 
Prerequisite: Mathematics 18. Alternate 



31 INTRODUCTION TO 

NUMERICAL ANALYSIS 
Study and analysis of tabulated data leading to 
interpolation, numerical integration, numen- 
cal solutions of differential equations, and 
systems of equations. Prerequisite: Computer 
Science 15 and Mathematics 19. Alternate 
years. Cross-listed as Computer Science 31 . 

32-33 MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS III 
A study of probability, discrete and continu- 
ous random variables, expected values and 
moments, sampling, point estimation, sam- 
pling distributions, interval estimation, test of 
hypotheses, regression and linear hypotheses, 
experimental design models. Corequisite: 
Mathematics 20. Alternate years. 

34 MODERN ALGEBRA 

An integrated approach to groups, rings. 



fields, and vector spaces and functions which 
preserve their structure. Prerequisite: Mathe- 
matics 24. 

36 CONCEPTS OF MATHEMATICS 
IN SECONDARY EDUCATION 

A course designed for mathematics majors 
who are planning to teach at the secondary 
level. Emphasis will be placed on the mathe- 
matics that form the foundation of secondary 
mathematics. Ideas will be presented to 
familiarize the student with various curricu- 
lum proposals, to provide for innovation 
within the existing curriculum, and to expand 
the boundaries of the existing curriculum. 
Open only to junior and senior mathematics 
majors enrolled in the secondary-education 
program. Alternate years. 

37 COMPUTATIONAL MATRIX ALGEBRA 
An introduction to some of the algorithms 
which have been developed for producing 
numerical solutions to such linear algebraic 
problems as solving systems of linear equa- 
tions, inverting matrices, computing the 
eigenvalues of a matrix, and solving the linear 
least-squares problem. Prerequisites: Com- 
puter Science 15 and Mathematics 19 or con- 
sent of instructor. Alternate years. Cross- 
listed as Computer Science 37. 

38 OPERATIONS RESEARCH 

Queuing theory, including simulation tech- 
niques; optimization theory, including linear 
programming, integer programming, and 
dynamic programming; game theory, includ- 
ing two-person zero-sum games, cooperative 
games, and multiperson games. Prerequisite: 
Mathematics 12 or Mathematics 20. Alternate 



42 REAL ANALYSIS 

A rigorous analysis of the basic concepts of 
real variable calculus; the real number system 
as a complete, ordered field; the topology of 
Euclidean space, compact sets, the Heine- 
Borel Theorem; continuity; the Intermediate 
Value Theorem; derivatives, the Mean Value 
Theorem; Reimann integrals, the Fundamen- 
tal Theorem of Calculus; infinite series, and 
Taylor's theorem. Prerequisite: Mathematics 
24. 

48 SEMINAR 

Topics in modem mathematics of current 
interest to the instructor. A different topic is 
selected each semester. This semester is 
designed to provide junior and senior mathe- 
matics majors and other qualified students 
with more than the usual opportunity for con- 
centrated and cooperative inquiry. Prerequis- 
ite: consent of instructor. One-half unit of 
credit. This course may be repealedfor credit. 

10-19 INTERNSHIP (See index) 



46 



80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



MUSIC 

Assistant Professors: Boerckel 
(Chairperson). Jeffers, Thayer 

Part-time Instructors: Freed, 
Gallup, Guth, Lakey, 
Nacinovich, Payn, Russell 

The music major is required to take a 
balanced program of theory, applied 
music, music history, and music ensem- 
ble. A minimum of eight courses (exclu- 
sive of all ensemble and applied music 
courses except Music 46) is required, 
and these must include Music 10, 1 1 , 20, 
21 , 35 and 36. Each major must partici- 
pate in an ensemble (Music 67, 68 and/or 
69) and take one hour of applied music 
per week for a minimum of four semes- 
ters. (See Music 60-66). The major must 
include at least one-half hour of piano in 
the applied program Unless a piano profi- 
ciency test is requested and passed. Any- 
one declaring music as a second major 
must do so by the beginning of the junior 
year. 

The Music Department recommends 
that non-majors select courses from the 
following list to meet distribution 
requirements: Music 16, 17; Music 18, 
1 9; Music 1 3 or Music 24 in combination 
with 16, 17, 18 or 19. 

Student recitals offer opportunities to 
gain experience in public performance. 
Music majors and other students quali- 
fied in performance may present formal 
recitals. 



10-11 MUSIC THEORY I AND II 

A two-semester course open to all students. 
An examination of the fundamental compo- 
nents and theoretical concepts of music. The 
student will develop musicianship through 
application of applied skills. iMusic 10 is 
prerequisite to Music II). 

13 MUSIC OF TODAY 

Non-technical survey of styles, techniques 
and contents of music produced since 1930. 



with emphasis on developments in electronic 
music. Leading figures of major contempor- 
ary movements in music, literature and the 
visual arts and their works will be presented 
and discussed in relation to musical culture. 
The course will include some practical expo- 
sure to the electronic music studio and record- 
ing techniques. 

16 INTRODUCTION TO MUSIC 

A basic course in the materials and techniques 
of music. Examples drawn from vanous per- 
iods and styles are designed to enhance per- 
ception and appreciation through careful and 
informed listening. 

17 SURVEY OF WESTERN MUSIC 

A chronological survey of music in Western 
civilization from Middle Ages to the present. 
Composers and musical styles are considered 
in the context of the broader culture of each 
major era. 

18 AMERICAN MUSIC I 

For the major or non-major interested in 
studying all types of American music, from 
pre-Revolutionary days through Worid War 1. 
Areas explored will include Indian. African, 
and European roots influencing the serious 
music for small and large ensembles, the 
development of show music from minstrels to 
Broadway musicals, the evolution of "Tin 
Pan Alley," and the beginnings of jazz. Aller- 



19 AMERICAN MUSIC II 

For the major or non-major interested in 
studying all types of American music. Ameri- 
can Music II will cover post-world War I days 
to the present. Areas explored will include 
indigenous serious music for small and large 
ensembles, the mature Broadway musical, the 
evolution of jazz, the development of rock, 
and the fusion of musical styles in the 1970's. 
Alternate years. 

20-21 MUSIC THEORY III AND IV 

A continuation of the integrated theory course 
moving toward newer uses of music malenals. 
Prerequisite: Music II. Alternate years. 

24 ELECTRONIC MUSIC I 

Technical introduction to synthesizer studio 
techniques. Topics will include musical 
acoustics, basic recording, sound generation 
and modification devices and the analysis of 
relevant examples in popular and avant-garde 
styles. Students will produce synthesized tape 
projects dunng assigned studio hours. Alter- 
nate years. 

25 ELECTRONIC MUSIC II 

Further consideration of recording tech- 
niques. Use of microphones, multi-track 
recording, mixing, special effects devices and 



synchronization will be introduced. Students 
will take part in live recording of concerts and 
rehearsals of a variety of ensembles. Student 
projects will include complete recording ses- 
sions and the production of electronic music 
compositions utilizing classical studio tech- 
niques and real-time networks. Prerequisite: 
Music 24 or consent of instructor. Alternate 
years. 

30 COMPOSITION I 

Creative writing in smaller vocal and instru- 
mental forms. Students identify and use the 
techniques employed by major composers of 
the 20th century. Prerequisite: Music II or 
consent of instructor. 

31 CONDUCTING 

A study of the fundamentals of conducting 
with frequent opportunity for practical experi- 
ence. The College music organizations serve 
to make performance experience possible. 
Prerequisite: Music 10-11 or consent of 
instructor. Alternate years. 

35 HISTORY OF WESTERN MUSIC I 

The development of musical styles and forms 
from Gregorian chant through Mozart, 
including composers from the medieval. 
Renaissance, baroque and early classical eras. 
Prerequisite: Music 10. 16. or 17 or consent 
of instructor. 

36 HISTORY OF WESTERN MUSIC II 

The development of musical styles and forms 
from Beethoven to the present, including 
composers from the late classical, romantic 
and modem eras. Prerequisite: Music 35 or 
consent of instructor. 

39 ORCHESTRATION 

A study of modem orchestral instruments and 
examination of their use by the great masters 
with practical problems in instrumentation. 
The College music organizations serve to 
make performance experience possible. Pre- 
requisite: Music 10-11 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Alternate years. 

40 COMPOSITION II 

Creative writing in larger vocal and instru- 
mental forms. Students write more extended 
works in order to develop an individual style 
of composition. Prerequsite: Music 30 or 
consent of instructor. 

42 PROJECTS IN ELECTRONIC MUSIC 

Digital techniques of Electronic Music pro- 
duction. Notation systems for electronic mus- 
ic. Aesthetics of electronic music. Students 
will use the full resources of the studio to 
complete original compositions and will 
study, prepare and present works by major 
composers of electronic music. Prerequisite: 
Music 25 or consent of instructor. 



47 



45 SPECIAL TOPICS IN MUSIC 

The intensive study of a selected area of music 
literature, designed to develop research tech- 
niques in music. The topic is announced at the 
Spring pre-registration. Sample topics 
include: Beethoven. Impressionism, Vienna 
1900-1914. Prerequisite. Music 16. 17 or 21 
or consent of instructor. 

46 RECITAL 

The preparation and presentation of a full- 
lenglh public recital, normally during the stu- 
dent's senior year. Prerequisite: approval hy 
the department. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 

Applied Music and Ensemble 

The study of petformance in piano, 
voice, organ, strings, woodwinds, and 
percussion is designed to develop sound 
technique and a knowledge of the appro- 
priate literature for the instrument. Stu- 
dent recitals offer opportunities to gain 
experience in public performance. 

Credit for applied music courses (pri- 
vate lessons) and ensemble (choir, 
orchestra and band) is earned on a frac- 
tional basis. For a description of this, see 
page 6. An applied course or ensemble 
should NOT be substituted for an 
academic course, but should in every 
case be in addition to the normal four 
academic courses. 

Extra fees apply for private lessons 
(Music 60-66) as follows: 
$110 per semester for a half-hour lesson 
per week. $220 per semester for an hour 
lesson per week. Private lessons are 
given for 13 weeks. 
60 Piano, 6 1 Voice , 62 Strings or Guitar, 
63 Organ, 64 Brass, 65 Woodwinds, 66 
Percussion. 

67 ORCHESTRAL ENSEMBLE 

The Williamsport Symphony Orchestra 
allows students with significant instrumental 
expenence to become members of this region- 
al ensemble Participation in the W.S.O. is 
contingent upon audition and the availability 
of openings. Students are allowed a maximum 
of one hour of Ensemble credit per semester. 
A student who is enrolled in orchestra onlv 



should register for Music 67B (one hour cred- 
it). A student may belong to two ensembles, 
choosing either Choir or Wind Ensemble as 
the second group. Such a student will then 
register for Music 67A ('/; hour credit) plus 
either Music 68A ('/: hour credit) or Music 
69A (V2 hour credit). 

68 CHORAL ENSEMBLE (CHOIR) 
Participation in the College choir is designed 
to enable any student possessing at least aver- 
age talent an opportunity to study choral tech- 
nique. Emphasis is placed upon acquaintance 
with choral literature, tone production, dic- 
tion, and phrasing. Students are allowed a 
maximum of one hour of Ensemble credit per 
semester. A student who is enrolled in Choir 
only should register for Music 68B (one hour 
credit). A student may belong to two ensem- 
bles, choosing either Orchestra or Wind 
Ensemble as the second group. Such a student 
will then register for Music 68A iVz hour 
credit) plus either Music 67A ('/: hour credit) 
or Music 69A {'A hour credit). 

69 WIND ENSEMBLE (BAND) 

The College Wind Ensemble allows students 
with some instrumental experience to become 
acquainted with good band literature and 
develop personal musicianship through parti- 
cipation in group instrumental activity. Stu- 
dents are allowed a maximum of one hour of 
Ensemble credit per semester. A student who 
is enrolled in Band only should register for 
Music 69B (one hour credit). A student may 
belong to two ensembles, choosing either 
Orchestra or Choir as the second group. Such 
a student will then register for Music 69A ( '/: 
hour credit) plus either Music 67A ('/; hour 
credit) or Music 68A ('/;; hour credit). 



NEAR EAST CULTURE 

AND ARCHAEOLOGY 

Professor: Guerra (Coordinator) 

The Near East culture and archaeology 
interdisciplinary major is designed to 
acquaint students with the "cradle of 
Western civilization," both in its ancient 
and modem aspects. Majors will com- 
plete a minimum of eight to 10 courses 
related to the Near East. 

Required courses are described in their 
departmental sections and include: 
1. Four courses (semesters) in lan- 
guage and culture from: 
History and Culture of the Ancient 
Near East (Religion 28) 



History of Art (Art 22) 
Ancient History (History 20) 
Old Testament Faith and History 
(Religion 13) 

Judaism and Islam (Religion 24) 
Two semesters of foreign language 
(Hebrew 1, 2 or Greek 1, 2) 

2. Two courses (semesters) in archaeol- 
ogy from: 

Biblical Archaeology (Religion 26) 
Special Archaeology courses, such as 
independent studies or in May or 
summer terms in the Near East. 

3. Two courses (semesters) in the 
cooperating departments (art, his- 
tory, political science, religion and 
sociology-anthropology) or related 
departments. These two courses, usu- 
ally taken in the junior or senior 
years, can be independent study. 
Topics should be related either to the 
ancient or the modem Near East and 
must be approved in advance by the 
committee supervising the interdis- 
ciplinary program. The study of mod- 
em Arabic or Hebrew is encouraged. 

Other courses may be suggested by the 
supervisory committee within the limits 
of a 10-course major. The number of 
courses taken within this program appli- 
cable toward fulfilling the College distri- 
bution requirements will vary according 
to the selection of courses. 



NURSING 

Professor: Rodgers, (Chairperson) 
Assistant Professors: Jacoby, 

Parrish, Boroch 
Instructors: Atkinson 

Pagana (on leave) 

Students wishing to major in nursing 
will be admitted to the College under the 
usual admission procedures. Freshmen 
should follow the nursing curriculum 
plan for the freshman year in the sequ- 
ence designated. To be considered for 
continuation in nursing, a minimum 
G.P.A. of 2.5 is required at completion 
of the freshman year. A supplementary 



48 



application should be submitted to the 
Department of Nursing by January 15 of 
the freshman year. 

Clinical Learning Resources 

In addition to the College's new well- 
equipped Nursing Skills Lab. opportun- 
ity for self-learning is provided in the 
adjacent Learning Center which is 
equipped with electronic study carrels 
and audio-visual materials. 

A wide variety of health-care agencies 
in the surrounding area are utilized for 
clinical experiences. Cooperating hos- 
pitals and agencies include: Divine 
Providence Hospital, Williamsport Hos- 
pital, Evangelical Hospital, Geisinger 
Medical Center, Leader Nursing Home 
and Rehabilitation Center, Danville 
State Hospital, Pennsylvania Depart- 
ment of Health. Regional Home Health 
Services and the County Health 
Improvement Plan (CHIP). 

Expenses of the Nursing Program 

Students are responsible for their own 
transportation to assigned clinical areas. 
The student of nursing assumes all finan- 
cial obligations listed in the section on 
fees in this bulletin including a $40 lab 
fee for each of the clinical nursing 
courses (Nursing 21, 30, 31, 32,33,36, 
40 and 41 ). Additional expenses include 
uniforms, name pin, watch with second 
hand, bandage scissors, stethoscope, 
blood pressure cuff, malpractice insur- 
ance, annual health examinations, and 
standardized achievement tests. 

Major in Nursing 

The major in nursing consists of: 
Nursing 20, 21, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 
36, 40"; 41, 42, and 43 or 80-89. In 
addition, the following are prerequisites 
for specific nursing courses: Chemistry 
8, 15; Biology O^-M, 26; Psychology 
10, 17; Mathematics 13, and Computer 
Science 15. The religion/philosophy 
distribution requirement is met by the 
required courses: Philosophy 19 and 
Religion 20. The history/social science 
distribution requirement is met by the 
required courses: Psychology 10 and 17. 
In addition, the student is required to take 
one course from amona Socioloav/ 



Anthropology 10, 14, 20, 28, or 29. The 
fine arts/foreign language distribution 
requirement can be met by two courses in 
one department from among art, litera- 
ture, music, or theatre; or by two courses 
in foreign language on the intennediate 
or higher course level. 

Unless otherwise indicated, nursing 
courses are open only to nursing majors. 

Policies Specific to Nursing 

In addition to the Lycoming College 
continuance policies, the following poli- 
cies are specific to all declared majors in 
the Department of Nursing: 

1 . A grade of C or better is required in 
all clinical nursing courses to con- 
tinue in the nursing program. These 
courses are Nursing 21, 30, 31, 32, 
33 , 36, 40 and 4 1 . Students who earn 
a grade of less than 70 percent or C in 
either the theoretical or clinical com- 
ponent of a nursing course will 
receive a course grade of F and will be 
required to repeat both components of 
the course. Students who receive a 
nursing grade of F will not be permit- 
ted to continue in the nursing sequ- 
ence until the deficiency has been 
made up. 

2. Policies regarding absence from clas- 
ses or from the clinical portion of 
nursing courses are determined by the 
instructor(s) responsible for the 
course. No absence from the clinical 
portion of the course will be excused 
except for illness or a family 
emergency. Excessive absences for 
any reason will necessitate repeating 
the entire course. 



Typical Plan of Study for B.S.N. 

FRESHMAN YEAR 

Fall 

Chem. 8* (Inorganic Chemistry).. 1 

Eng. 6 (Composition) 1 

Psych. 10* (Intro to Psych.) 1 

Fine Arts/Lang 1 

Physical Education 

4 



Spring 

Chem. 15* (Brief Organic 

Chemistry) 1 

Eng. Elective 1 

Psych. 17* (Developmental 

Psych.) 1 

Fine Arts/Lang 1 

Physical Education 

4 

SOPHOMORE YEAR 

Fall 

Bio. 13 (Anatomy and 

Physiology) 1 

Math. 15 (Intro to Statistics) 1 

Nur. 20 (Concepts of Nutrition 

in Family Health) 75 

Rel. 20 (Death and Dying) I 

3.75 

Spring 

Bio. 14 (Anatomy and 

Physiology) 1 

Math 13 (Intro, to 

Computer Sci. ) 1 

Bio. 26 (Microbiology for 

Health Sciences) 1 

Nur. 21 (Foundations of 

Professional Practice) 1.25 

4.25 



JUNIOR YEAR 



Fall 
Nur. 

Nur. 

Nur. 



30 (Nursing Care of the 

Developing Family I) 1.5 

32 (Nursing Care of the 

Adult i) 1.5 

34 (Basic Concepts of 

Pharmacology and 

Therapeutics) 1 



Spring 

Nur. 31 (Nursing Care of the 

Developing Family II). 
Nur. 33 (Nursing Care of 

the Adult II) 

Nur. 35 (Research in Nursing) . 



1.5 

1.5 
1 



49 



May Term 

Nur. 36 (The Nurse in the 
Social System) .... 



SENIOR YEAR 

Fall 

Nur. 40 (Nursing Care of the 
Emotionally Troubled 
Individual and Family) ... 1.5 

Elective 1 

Guided Elective** 1 

Nur. 43 (Topics in Nursing) 5 

4 

Spring 

Nur. 41 (Comprehensive 

Nursing Care) 1.5 

Nur. 42 (Professional 

Issues) 5 

Phil. 19 (Ethical Issues in 

Biology and Medicine) ... 1 



♦Prerequisite to Sophomore year. 
**Student must select one course from 
Sociology/Anthropology which may be 
taken at any point in the program. 
Recommended courses at this time are 
Soc. 10. soc. 20, Soc. 28, Anth. 14 and 
Anth. 29. 

Requirement for Graduation: 32 Units 
(128 Credits). 

The student may take additional units 
for electives, independent study 
and/or honors. 



20 CONCEPTS OF NUTRITION 
IN FAMILY HEALTH 

Essentials ol normal nutrition and their rela- 
tionship to the health of individuals and fami- 
lies. These concepts serve as a basis for the 
development of an understanding of thera- 
peutic application of dietary principles and the 
health professional's role and responsibility in 
this facet of client care. Three hours of lec- 
ture, '/j unit. Prerequisites: Chemistry S, 15. 
or consent of instructor. Open to non-nursing 
majors. 

21 FOUNDATIONS OF 
PROFESSIONAL NURSING PRACTICE 
Introduction of major theoretical elements 
underlying professional nursing practice. 
Focus on the concept of health and common 
health problems recognizing the multi- 



directional intluence of the individual, family, 
and environment. In this first clinical course 
the student will utilize the nursing process in 
assisting clients to attain a maximum level of 
functioning. Three hours of lecture and five 
hours clinical laboratory. I 'A units. Prere- 
quisites: Chemistry 8, 15, Nursing 20. and 
Biology 13. 

30-3 1 NURSING CARE OF THE 
DEVELOPING FAMILY 
Examination of health and nursing needs of 
beginning and developing families. Emphasis 
on nursing needs of mothers and infants within 
the family unit as well as the common health 
problems of children through adolescence. 
Three hours of lecture and Th hours clinical 
laboratory. J'/: units. Prerequisite for Nurs- 
ing JO: Nursing 21 , Biology 14 and 26. Prere- 
quisite for Nursing 31: Nursing 30 and 34. 

32-33 NURSING CARE OF THE ADULT 

Identification of adult health care needs and 
implementation of nursing activities based on 
an understanding of growth and development, 
pathophysiology, communication skills, 
interpersonal dynamics, and psychosocial 
interventions. Three hours of lecture and Th 
hours clinical laboratory /'/:■ units. Prere- 
quisiteforNursing32: Nursing21 . Biology 14 
and 26. Prerequisite for Nursing 33: Nursing 
32 and 34. 

34 BASIC CONCEPTS OF 
PHARMACOLOGY AND 
THERAPEUTICS 

Fundamentals of pharmacology and thera- 
peutics are presented for the various classes of 
drugs. Relationships of pharmacological 
mechanisms to the affected biochemical and 
physiological processes. Interactions and 
toxicologica aspects of drug therapy are 
reviewed. Four hours of lecture. I unit. Co- 
requisite: Nursing 30, 32. or consent of 
instructor. Open to non-nursing majors. 

35 RESEARCH IN NURSING 

Expansion of theoretical basis of research 
methodology with emphasis on analyzing, 
criticizing, and interpreting nursing research. 
Development of a research proposal focusing 
on a nursing problem. Fmir hours of lecture. I 
unit. Prerequisite: Mathematics 13. Compu- 
ter Science 15. and Nursing 30 and 32 or 
consent of instructor. Open to non-majors. 

36 THE NURSE IN THE SOCIAL SYSTEM 
Seminar discussions and clinical laboratory 
using (he hospital as a prototype. Theories of 
social systems. Examination of induction into 
the hospital system Evaluation of standards 
of care. Focus on utilization of change theory. 
Twelve hours of lecture and 96 hours of clini- 
cal laboratory. I unit Prerequisites: Nursing 
31. 33. 34 and 35. Required for the nursing 
major and offered only in May term 



40 NURSING CARE OF THE 
EMOTIONALLY TROUBLED 
INDIVIDUAL AND FAMILY 
Examination of disturbed human relationships 
with focus on intrapsychic, interpersonal, and 
physiologic etiology. Emphasis on advanced 
therapeutic nurse-patient relationships within 
context of family . community . and health care 
systems. Three hours of lecture and 7'/- hours 
clinical laboratory, /'/r units. Prerequisites: 
Nursing 31. 33. 36. 

41 COMPREHENSIVE NURSING CARE 
Culminating nursing course with focus on 
utilizing nursing theory in a choice of clinical 
settings. Seminars will provide opportunities 
for students to share commonalities and 
unique aspects of professional practice. Three 
hours of lecture and 7'/; hours of clinical 
laboratory I'/: units. Prerequisites: Nursmg 
36. 40. 

42 PROFESSIONAL ISSUES 

An analysis of nursing issues in the context of 
the historical background of the profession, 
the social forces which influence nursing, and 
nursing's impact upon society. Two-hour 
seminar. '/: unit. Prerequisite: Senior stand- 
ing. 

43 TOPICS IN NURSING 

Selected topic courses in nursing designed to 
permit students to pursue subjects which, 
because of their specialized nature, may not be 
offered on a regular basis, '/r unit. Prerequis- 
ite: Senior standing. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
IN NURSING 
An opportunity to develop and implement an 
individual plan of study under faculty guid- 
ance. '/." unit. Prerequisite: Senior standing or 
consent of chairperson. 

PHILOSOPHY 



Associate Professor: Griffith 

(Chairperson). Whelan 
Assistant Professor: Herring 

The study of philosophy develops a 
critical understanding of the basic con- 
cepts and presuppositions around which 
we organize our thought in science, 
religion, education, morality, the arts, 
and other human enterprises. A major in 
philosophy, together with appropriate 
other courses, can provide an excellent 
preparation for policy-making positions 
of many kinds, for graduate study in 
several fields, and for careers in educa- 



50 



tion. law. and the ministry. The major in 
philosophy consists of eight courses 
numbered 10 or above, including 38. 39, 
49 and at least three other courses num- 
bered 25 or above. 

A minor in Philosophy consists of any 
four philosophy courses numbered 20 or 
above. Three more specialized minors 
are also available. A minor in Philosophy 
and Law consists of four courses from 
Philosophy 21, 22, 25, 34. 35. 49 or 
Studies; a minor in Philosophy and Sci- 
ence requires completion of four courses 
from Philosophy 21. 22, 25, 33, 49 or 
Studies; a minor in the History of Philo- 
sophy may be completed by selecting 
four courses from Philosophy 21 , 22, 38, 
39. 49 or Studies. Any courses selected 
from Philosophy 49. 80, 81, 90 and 91 
must be approved in advance by the 
department, and only one unit may be 
used from among 80. 81. 90. and 91 to 
complete the requirements of any of 
these three minors: 

5 PRACTICAL REASONING 

A general introduction to topics in logic and 
their application to practical reasoning, with 
primary emphasis on detecing fallacies, eva- 
luating inductive reasoning, and understand- 
ing the rudiments of scientific method. 

10 INTRODUCTION TO 

PHILOSOPHICAL PROBLEMS 

An mtroduclory course designed to show the 
nature of philosophy by examination of sever- 
al examples of problems which have received 
extended attention in philosophical literature. 
These topics often include the relation of the 
mind to the body, the possibility of human 
freedom, arguments about the existence of 
God. the conditions of knowledge, and the 
relation of language to thought. Some atten- 
tion is also given to the principles of accept- 
able reasoning. 

14 PHILOSOPHY AND 
PERSONAL CHOICE 

An introductory philosophical examination of 
a number of contemporary moral issues which 
call for personal decision. Topics often inves- 
tigated include: the "good" life, obligation to 
others, sexual ethics, abortion, suicide and 
death . violence and pacifism . obedience to the 
law, the relevance of personal beliefs to mor- 
ality. Discussion centers on some of the sug- 
gestions philosophers have made about how to 
make such decisions. 

15 PHILOSOPHY AND PUBLIC POLICY 

An introductory philosophical examination of 



the moral and conceptual dimension of vari- 
ous contemporary public issues, such as the 
relation of ethics to politics and the law, the 
enforcement of morals, the problems of fair 
distribution of goods and opportunities, the 
legitimacy of restricing the use of natural 
resources, and the application of ethics to 
business practice. Discussion centers on some 
of the suggestions philosophers have made 
about how to deal with these issues. 

16 ETHICAL ISSUES IN BUSINESS 

An introductory philosophical examination of 
a variety of moral problems that arise con- 
cerning the American business system. 
Included are a systematic consideration of 
typical moral problems faced by individuals 
and an examination of common moral critic- 
isms of the business system itself. 

17 PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES 
IN EDUCATION 

An examination of the basic concepts 
involved in thought about education, and a 
consideration of the various methods for jus- 
tifying educational proposals. Typical of the 
issues discussed are: Are education and 
indoctrination different? What is a liberal edu- 
cation? Are education and schooling compati- 
ble? What do we need to leam? Alternate 



18 PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES 
IN CRIMINAL JUSTICE 

An introductory examination of various philo- 
sophical issues and concepts which are of 
special importance in legal contexts. Discus- 
sion includes both general topics, such as the 
justification of punishment, and more specific 
topics, such as the insanity defense and the 
nghts of the accused. Readings are arranged 
topically and include both classical and con- 
temporary sources. 

19 ETHICAL ISSUES IN 
BIOLOGY AND MEDICINE 

A philosophical investigation of some of the 
ethical issues which arise as a result of con- 
temporary medical and biological technology. 
Typical of these issues are euthanasia, beha- 
vior control, patient rights, experimentation 
on humans, fetal research, abortion, genetic 
engineering, population control, and distribu- 
tion of health resources. 

2 1 -22 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
HISTORY OF PHILOSOPHY 

An introductory survey of the history of philo- 
sophy from the ancient Greeks through the 
early modem period. Particular attention will 
be paid to the common origins of philosophy 
and science and their subsequent relationship 
and to the role which philosophy has played in 
the evolution of social and political thought. 
Philosophy 21 is not a prerequisite for Philo- 
sophy 22. 



25 SYMBOLIC LOGIC 

A study of modem symbolic logic and its 
application to the analysis of arguments. 
Included are tmth-functional relations, the 
logic of prepositional functions, and deduc- 
tive systems. Attention is also given to various 
topics in the philosophy of logic. 

31 PHILOSOPHY AND HUMAN NATURE 
An examination of a variety of classical and 
contemporary philosophical questions about 
human nature. Among the questions typically 
considered are these: Is there such a thing as 
human nature? Are human beings different, in 
any fundamental way. from other animals? 
Are human beings free? Is human conscious- 
ness just a brain process? Are human beings 
inherently predisposed to evil? Are human 
beings biologically determined to be selfish or 
aggressive? Are the differences in achieve- 
ment between men and women biologically 
based? Prerequisite: Students without previ- 
ous study in philosophy must have instructor' s 
permission. 

32 PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION 

A philosophical examination of religion. 
Included are such topics as the nature of reli- 
gious discourse, arguments for and against the 
existence of God, and the relation between 
religion and science. Readings from classical 
and contemporary sources. Prerequisite: stu- 
dents without previous study in philosophy 
must have instructor's permission. Alternate 



33 PHILOSOPHY OF NATURAL SCIENCE 
A consideration of philosophically important 
conceptual problems arising from reflection 
about natural science, including such topics as 
the nature of scientific laws and theories, the 
character of explanation, the import of pre- 
diction, the existence of "non-observable" 
theoretical entities such as electrons and 
genes, the problem of justifying induction, 
and various puzzles associated with probabil- 
ity. Prerequisite: students without previous 
study in philosophy must have instructor's 
permission. Alternate years. 

34 SOCIAL AND 
POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY 

A systematic philosophical investigation of 
the relation between human nature and the 
proper social and political order. Topics stud- 
ied include the purpose of govemment. the 
nature of legitimate authority, the foundation 
of human nghts. and the limits of human 
freedom. Emphasis is placed on the logic of 
social and political thought and on the analysis 
of basic principles and concepts. Prerequisite: 
students without previous philosophy must 
have instructor's permission. 

35 ETHICAL THEORY 

An inquiry concerning the grounds which 



51 



distinguish morally right from morally wrong 
actions. Central to the course is critical con- 
sideration of the proposals and the rationale of 
relativists, egoists, utilitarians, and other ethi- 
cal theorists. Various topics in metaethics are 
also included. Prerequisite: students without 
previous study in philosophy must have 
instructor's permission. 

38 ANCIENT GREEK PHILOSOPHY 

A critical examination of the ancient Greek 
philosophers, with particular emphasis on 
Plato and Aristotle. Prerequisite: two courses 
in philosophy or consent of instructor. Alter- 
nate years. 

39 EARLY MODERN PHILOSOPHY 

A critical examination of the Continental 
Rationalists (Descartes. Spinoza. Leibniz), 
the British Empiricists (Locke. Berkeley. 
Hume) and Kant. Prerequisite: fvio courses in 
philosophy or consent of instructor. Alternate 
years. 

49 DEPARTMENTAL SEMINAR 

An investigation carried on by discussions and 
papers, into one philosophical problem, text, 
philosopher, or movement. A different topic 
is selected each semester. Recent topics 
include Sidgwick's ethics, religious language. 
Kierkegaard, legal punishment. Wittgenstein, 
personal identity and human rights This semi- 
nar is designed to provide junior and senior 
philosophy majors and other qualified stu- 
dents with more than the usual opportunity for 
concentrated and cooperative inquiry. Prere- 
quisite: consent of instructor. This seminar 
may be repeated for credit. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Recent independent studies in philosophy 
include Nietzsche, moral education. Rawls" 
theory of justice, existentialism, euthanasia. 
Plato's ethics, and philosophical aesthetics. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

Associate Professor: Burch 

Assistant Professor: Whitehill 
Instructors: Hair, Holmes 

I PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

Coeducational physical education classes. 
Basic instructions in fundamentals, know- 
ledge, and appreciation of sports that include 



swimming, tennis, bowling, volleyball, 
archery, lield hockey, soccer, golf, badmin- 
ton, modem dance, skiing, elementary games 
(for elementary teachers), toneastics. physical 
fitness, and other activities. Backpacking, 
cross-country and alpine skiing, jogging, and 
cyling are offered on a contract basis. Begin- 
ning swimming is required for all non- 
swimmers. Students may select any activity 
offered. A reasonable degree of proficiency is 
required in the activities. Emphasis is on the 
potential use of activities as recreational and 
leisure-time interests. Two semesters of 
physical education (two hours per week) are 
required. All physical education classes are 
open to men and women. 

Athletic Training 

Lycoming College established an 
apprenticeship program in athletic train- 
ing in 1979 after recognizing two condi- 
tions: the importance of the care and 
prevention of athletic injuries by trained 
professionals, and the career's promising 
growth potential. 

To complete this non-credit program 
students participate in practical as well as 
classroom work under the supervision of 
Lycoming's certified athletic trainer. 
Students become eligible to participate in 
the National Athletic Trainers Associa- 
tion (N.A.T.A.) Certification examina- 
tion to earn the status of an N.A.T.A. 
certified trainer. 



POLITICAL SCIENCE 

Professor: Giglio (Chairperson) 
Associate Professor: Roskin 
Assistant Professor: Grogan 

The major is designed to provide a 
systematic understanding of government 
and politics at the international, national, 
state, and local levels. Majors are 
encouraged to develop their faculties to 
make independent, objective analyses 
which can be applied to the broad spec- 
trum of the social sciences. 

Although the political science major, 
is not designed as a vocational major, 
students with such training may go 
directly into government service, jour- 
nalism, teaching, or private administra- 
tive agencies. A political science major 
can provide the base for the study of law. 



or for graduate studies leading to admin- 
strative work in federal, state, or local 
governments, international organiza- 
tions, or college teaching. Students seek- 
ing certification to teach secondary 
school social studies may major in politi- 
cal science but should consult their 
advisers and the education department. 

A major consists of eight political .sci- 
ence courses, including Political Science 
I6B. Prospective majors are encouraged 
to register for this course during their 
freshman year. An exemption will be 
granted only if it strengthens the stu- 
dent's program. In addition to 168, stu- 
dents must take at least one course in 
each of five areas (A to E). Students are 
encouraged, also, to select a minor in 
another department in accordance with 
their academic and career interests and in 
consultation with their departmental 
advisor. 

For non-majors, the department offers 
three minors: a minor in Political Science 
consists of any four courses numbered 20 
or above from areas A to E; a minor in 
Foreign Affairs consists of four courses 
selected from Political Science 20, 25, 
26, 27, 38 and 39; and a minor in Legal 
Studies consists of Political Science 31 , 
35, 36 and one other course numbered 20 
or above. Students are encouraged to 
consult with department members on the 
selection of a minor. 

16 INTRODUCTION TO POLITICS 
AND PUBLIC POLICY 
An examination of public policy within the 
context of American politics. Includes identi- 
fication and analysis of contemporary policy 
issues, alternative solutions, factors in for- 
mulation, and evaluation of impact. May be 
taken for either one-half unit (section 16A) or 
full unit (section I6B); declared majors and 
prospective majors should take the full-unit 
course. I6B. 

A. American Politics 

10 GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS 
IN THE UNITED STATES 
An introduction to American national govern- 
ment which emphasizes both structural- 
functional analysis and policy-making proces- 
ses. In addition to the legislative, executive, 
and judicial branches of government, atten- 
tion will be given to political parties and 
interest groups, elections and voting behavior. 



52 



and constitutional rights. Recommended to all 
social science-education majors and to those 
students who have had inadequate or msuffi- 
cient preparation in American government 

1 1 STATE AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT 
An examination of the general prmciples. 
major problems, and political processes ot the 
states and their subdivisions, together with 
their role in a federal type of government. 

23 AMERICAN PRESIDENCY 

A study of the office and powers of the presi- 
dent with analysis of his major roles as chief 
administrator, legislator, political leader, 
foreign policy maker, and commander-in- 
chief. Special attention is given to those presi- 
dents who led the nation boldly. Subject to 
sludenl demand, but offered al least once 
during a four-year cycle. 



B. Legal Studies 

31 CIVIL RIGHTS AND LIBERTIES 

What are our rights and liberties as Ameri- 
cans.' What should they be? A frank discus- 
sion of the nature and scope of the constitu- 
tional guarantees. First Amendment rights, 
the rights of criminal suspects and defendants, 
racial and sexual equality, and equal protec- 
tion of the laws. Students will read and brief 
the more important Supreme Court decisions. 
Prerequisite: junior or senior standing or 
consent of instructor. 

35 LAW AND SOCIETY 

An examination of the nature, sources, func- 
tions, and limits of law as an instrument of 
political and social control. Included for dis- 
cussion are legal problems pertaining to the 
family, crime, deviant behavior, poverty, and 
minority groups. Prerequisite: junior or 
senior standing or consent of instructor. 

36 MASS MEDIA LAW AND REGULATION 
An examination of the legal structure and the 
system by which mass communication is con- 
trolled in this society. The forces which shape, 
infiuence. and make policy will be consid- 
ered. Cross-listed as Mass Communication 
31 . Prerequisite: junior or senior standing or 
consent of instructor. 

C. Applied Politics 

33 BUREAUCRACY AND 

PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 
What is bureaucracy? Why and how do 
bureaucracies arise? What has been the politi- 
cal impact of growth of bureaucracy in gov- 
ernment? These questions, among others, will 
be considered in this examination of public 
bureaucracies. This course is highly recom- 
mended to students planning to take an intern- 



ship in city or county government through the 
political science department. Subject to stu- 
dent demand, but offered at least once during 
a four-year cycle. 

34 POLITICAL NEWSWRITING 

A workshop course in the reporting and 
rewriting of public affairs at the local, nation- 
al, and international levels. There will be 
neither texts nor examinations, but short wnt- 
ten assignments will be due every class meet- 
ing. Prerequisite: English 18 or Mass Comm 
19 or consent of instructor . Alternate years. 

48 PUBLIC OPINION AND POLLING 

A course dealing with the general topic and 
methodology of polling. Content includes 
exploration of the processes by which peo- 
ple's political opinions are formed, the man- 
ipulation of public opinion through the uses of 
propaganda, and the American response to 
politics and political issues. 

D. Comparative Politics 

20 EUROPEAN POLITICS 

A study of the political systems of East and 
West Europe with emphasis on comparison 
and patterns of government. The course will 
review politics in Northern (Britain. West 
Germany. Sweden). Latin (France. Italy. 
Spain), and Eastern (Soviet Union. East Ger- 
many. Yugoslavia) Europe and attempt to find 
underlying similarities and differences. 

26 POLITICAL CULTURES 

An exploration of the "people" aspects of 
political life in several countries. The way 
people interact with each other and with gov- 
ernment, what they expect from the system, 
how they acquire their political attitudes and 
styles, and how these contribute to the type of 
government. Alternate years. 

38 POLITICS OF DEVELOPING AREAS 
The causes and possible cures for socio- 
political backwardness in Asia, Africa, and 
Latin America Alternate years. 

E. International Relations 

25 WORLD POLITICS 

Why is there war? An introduction to interna- 
tional relations with emphasis on the varieties 
of conflicts which may grow into war. 

27 CRISIS AREAS IN WORLD POLITICS 

The study of several current areas of interna- 
tional tension and confiicl. including relations 
among the United States. Soviet Union, and 
China, plus the Middle East and whatever new 
danger spots arise over lime. Alternate years. 

39 AMERICAN FOREIGN POLICY 

The U.S. role in the world in geographic. 



strategic, historical, and ideological [lerspec- 
tives. plus an examination of the domestic 
forces shaping U.S. policy. Alternate years. 

F. Special Programs 

70-79 INTERNSHIPS (See index) 

Students may receive academic credit for 
serving as interns in structured learning situa- 
tions with a wide variety of public and private 
agencies and organizations. Students have 
served as interns with the Public Defender's 
Office, the Lycoming County Court Admin- 
strator. and the Williamsport City govern- 
ment. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Current studies relate to elections — local, 
state, and federal — while past studies have 
included Soviet and world politics. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 



PSYCHOLOGY 



Professor: Hancock 
Associate Professor: Berthold 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Ryan 

The major provides training in both 
theoretical and applied psychology. It is 
designed to meet the needs of students 
seeking careers in psychology or other 
natural or social sciences. It also meets 
the needs of students seeking a better 
understanding of human behavior as a 
means of furthering individual and career 
goals in other areas. Psychology majors 
and others are urged to discuss course 
selections in psychology with members 
of the department to help insure appro- 
priate course selection. 

A major consists of Psychology 10, 
31, 32, 36 and four other psychology 
courses. Statistics also is required. 

A minor in Psychology consists of 
Psychology 10 and four other psycholo- 
gy courses (three of which must be num- 
bered 20 or above) which must be 
approved by the department. 

10 INTRODUCTORY PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the empirical study of 



53 



human and other animal behavior. Areas con- 
sidered may mclude: learning, personality, 
social, physiological, sensory, cognition, and 
developmental. 

12 GROUP PROCESSES AND 

INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATION 
The introduction to the research and theory 
from social psychology related to small-group 
dynamics and interpersonal communication. 
Topics covered will include communication 
processes, interpretation of motivation, con- 
ceptualization of individual personalities, 
problem solving and leadership. The first 
stage of the course will focus on research and 
theory; the second half will emphasize the 
development of skills and techniques where 
.students become members of a self-analytic 
— practicing the skills and making a case 
study of the processes involved. Ma\ term 
only. 

16 ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY 

.An introduction to the patterns of deviant 
behavior with emphasis on cause, function, 
and treatment. The various models for the 
conceptualization of abnormal behavior are 
critically examined. Prerequisite: Pswhologv 
10. 

17 DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 

A study of the basic principles of human 
growth and development throughout the life 
span. Prerequisite: Psychology 10. 

18 ADOLESCENT PSYCHOLOGY 

The study areas will include theories of 
adolescence; current issues raised by as well 
as about the "generation of youth"; research 
findings bearing on theones and issues of 
growth beyond childhood, and self- 
exploration. Prerequisite: Psychology 10. 

24 SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY 

The scientific exploration of interpersonal 
communication and behavior. Topics include 
attitudes and altitude change, attraction and 
communication, social perception and social 
influence, prosocial and antisocial behavior, 
and group processes. Prerequisite: Psvcholo- 
S.v 10. 

25 INDUSTRIAL AND 
ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 
The application of the pnnciples and methods 
of psychology to selected industrial and or- 
ganizational situations. Prerequisite: Psy- 
chology 10 or consent of instructor. 



32 SENSORY 
EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 

The examination of psychophysical metho- 
dology and basic neurophysiological methods 
as they are applied to the understanding of 
sensor processes. Prerequisites: Psychology 
JO and statistics. 

33 PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the physiological psycho- 
logist's method of approach to the under- 
standing of behavior as well as the set of 
principles that relate the function and organi- 
zation of the nervous system to the phenomena 
of behavior. Prerequisite: Psychology 10 or 
consent of instructor. 

34 PRINCIPLES OF MEASUREMENT 
Psychometric methods and theory, including 
scale transformation, norms, standardization, 
validation procedures, and estimation of relia- 
bility. Prerequisites: Psychology 10 and sta- 
tistics. 



35 HISTORY AND 
SYSTEMS OF PSYCHOLOGY 

The growth of scientific psychology and the 
theories and systems that have accompanied 
its development. Prerequisite: four courses in 
psychology. 

36 PERSONALITY THEORY 

A review of the major theories of personality 
development and personality functioning. In 
addition to covering the details of each theory, 
the implications and applications of each 
theory will be considered. Prerequisite: Psy- 
chology 10. 

37 COGNITION 

An investigation of human mental processes 
along the two major dimensions directed and 
undirected thought. Topic areas include rec- 
ognition, attention, conceptualization, 
problem-solving, fantasy, language, dream- 
ing, and creativitv. Prerequisite: Psychology 
10. 

38 EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the empirical study of the 
teaching-learning process. Areas considered 
may mclude educational objectives, pupil and 
teacher characteristics, concept learning, 
problem solving and creativity, attitudes and 
values, motivation, retention and transfer, 
evaluation and measurement. Prerequisite: 
Psychology lU or consent of instructor. 



3 1 LEARNING 

EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 
Learning processes. The examination of the 
basic methods and pnnciples of animal and 
human learning. Prerequisites: Psychology 
10 and statistics. 



39 BEHAVIOR MODIFICATION 

A detailed examination of the applied analysis 
of behavior. Focus will be on the application 
of experimental method to the individual clini- 
cal case. The course will cover targeting. 
behavior, base-rating, intervention strategies. 



and outcome evaluation Learning-based 
modification techniques such as contingency 
management, counter-conditioning, extinc- 
tion, discrimination training, aversive condi- 
tioning, and negative practice will be exa- 
mined. Prerequisite: Psychology 10 or 
consent of instructor. 

41 PSYCHOLOGY OF WOMEN 

A review of contemporary theory and research 
on the psychology of gender differences. The 
major theories and basic research on gender 
differences will be covered. Special topics 
include sex differences in achievement, pow- 
er, and communication; sex-role stereotypes; 
beliefs about masculinity and feminity; and 
gender influences on mental health. Prere- 
quisite: Psychology 10. 

48-49 PRACTICUM IN PSYCHOLOGY 

An off-campus experience in a community 
setting offenng psychological services, sup- 
plemented with classroom instruction and dis- 
cussion. Psychology 48 covers the basic 
counseling skills, while Psychology 49 covers 
the major theoretical approaches to counsel- 
ing. Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Internships give students an opportunity to 
relate on-campus academic experiences to 
society in general and to their post- 
baccalaureate objectives in particular. Stu- 
dents have, for example, worked in pnsons, 
public and private school, county govern- 
ment, and for the American Red Cross. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Independent study is an opponunily for stu- 
dents to pursue special interests in areas for 
which courses are not offered. In addition, 
students have an opportunity to study a topic 
in more depth than is possible in the regular 
classroom situation. Studies in the past have 
included child abuse, counseling of hospital 
patients, and research in the psychology of 
natural disasters. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 

Honors in psychology requires original contri- 
butions to the literature of psychology through 
independent study. The most recent honors 
project was a study of the relationship between 
socio-economic status and visual versus audit- 
ory learning. 



RELIGION 

Professor: Guerra 
Associate Professor: Hughes 



54 



Assistant Professor: Robinson 
(Chairperson) 

A major consists of 10 courses, 
including Religion 13, 14, and 20. At 
least seven courses must be taken in the 
department. The following courses may 
be counted toward fulfilling the major 
requirements: Greek 1 1 and 12, Hebrew 
1 1 and 12. History 39 and 41, Philoso- 
phy 32, and Sociology 33. 

A minor in Religion consists of one 
course from Religion 10, 13, 14 and four 
religion courses numbered 20 or above. 

An interdisciplinary minor in Biblical 
Languages requires the completion of 
Greek 21, 22 and Hebrew 21 and 22. 



10 INTRODUCTION TO RELIGION 

Designed for the beginning student, this 
course examines what it means to be religious. 
Some of the issues are the definition of relig- 
ion, the meanmg of symbolism, concepts of 
God. ecstatic phenomena. Specific attention 
will be devoted to the current problem of cults 
and religious liberty. 

13 OLD TESTAMENT 
FAITH AND HISTORY 

A critical examination of the literature within 
its historical setting and in the light of 
archaeological findings to show the faith and 
religious life of the Hebrew-Jewish commu- 
nity in the Biblical period, and an introduction 
to the history of interpretation with an empha- 
sis on contemporary Old Testament cnticism 
and theology. 

14 NEW TESTAMENT 
FAITH AND HISTORY 

A critical examination of the literature within 
its historical setting to show the faith and 
religious life of the Christian community in 
the Biblical period, and an introduction to the 
history of interpretation with an emphasis on 
contemporary New Testament criticism and 
theology. 

17 INTRODUCTION TO 

SUPERNATURAL PHENOMENA 
An examination of claims for supernatural or 
paranormal phenomena with an emphasis on 
critical methodology and the evaluation of 
evidence. The course is designed to teach 
students the difference between the scientific 
and religious methodologies, the proper role 
of each, and the hazards of mixing the two. 
Subjects covered include ESP. Spiritualism, 
the Bermuda Triangle, witchcraft, faith heal- 
ing. Noah's Ark. ghosts, monsters, and 
others. Offered May and summer terms only. 



20 DEATH AND DYING 

A study of death from personal, social, and 
universal standpoints with emphasis upon 
what the dying may teach the living. Principal 
issues are the stages of dying, bereavement, 
suicide, funeral conduct, and the religious 
doctrines of death and immortality. Course 
includes, as optional, practical projects with 
terminal patients under professional supervi- 
sion. Only one course from the combination 
20-21 may be used for distribution. 

21 AFTER DEATH AND DYING 

An examination of the question of life after 
death in terms of contemporary clinical stud- 
ies, the New Testament resurrection narra- 
tives, the Asian doclnne of reincarnation, and 
the classical theological beliefs of providence 
and predestination Religion 20 is recom- 
mended but not required. Only one course 
from the combination 20-21 may be used for 
distribution. 

22 PROTESTANTISM IN 
THE MODERN WORLD 

An examination of Protestant thought and life 
from Luther to the present against the back- 
drop of a culture rapidly changing from the 
1 7th century scientific revolution to Marxism, 
Darwinism, and depth psychology. Special 
attention will be paid to the constant interac- 
tion between Protestantism and the world in 
which it finds itself. 

2.^ CHRISTIAN ORIGINS 

A study of the historical, cultural, and reli- 
gious background of the formation of Christ- 
ianity and the antecedents of Christian belief 
and practice in post-exilic Judaism and in 
Hellenism. 

24 JUDAISM AND ISLAM 

An examination of the rise, growth, and 
expansion of Judaism and Islam with special 
attention given to the theological contents of 
the literatures of these religions as far as they 
are normative in matters of faith, practice, and 
organization. Also, a review of their contn- 
butions to the spiritual heritage of mankind. 

25 ORIENTAL RELIGION 

A phenomenological study of the basic con- 
tent of Hinduism. Buddhism, and Chinese 
Taoism with special attention to social and 
political relations, mythical and aesthetic 
forms, and the East- West dialogue. 

26 BIBLICAL ARCHAEOLOGY 

A study of the role of archaeology in recon- 
structing the worid in which the Biblical liter- 
ature originated with special attention given to 
archaeological results that throw light on the 
clarification of the Biblical text. Also, an 
introduction to basic archaeological method 
and a study in depth of several representative 



excavations along with the artifacts and 
material culture recovered from different his- 
torical periods. 

28 HISTORY AND CULTURE OF 
THE ANCIENT NEAR EAST 
A study of the history and culture of Mesopo- 
tamia. Anatolia. Syria-Palestine, and Egypt 
from the rise of the Sumerian culture to Ale- 
xander the Great. Careful attention will be 
given to the religious views prevalent in the 
ancient Near East as far as these views inter- 
acted with the culture and faith of Biblical 
man. 

30 PSYCHOLOGY OF RELIGION 

A study into the broad insights of psychology 
in relation to the phenomena of religion and 
religious behavior. The course concentrates 
on religious experience or manifestations 
rather than concepts. Tentative solutions will 
be sought to questions such as: What does it 
feel like to be religious or to have a religious 
experience' What is the religious function in 
human develoment? How does one think psy- 
chologically about theological problems? 

31 CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS 

A study of Christian ethics as a normative 
perspective for contemporary moral problems 
with emphasis upon the interaction of law and 
religion, decision making in the field of 
biomedical practice, and the reconstruction of 
society in a planetary civilization. 

32 CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS IN 
CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS 

An examination of the approach of religion 
and other disciplines to an issue of current 
concern: current topics include the theological 
significance of law, the ethics of love, and the 
Holocaust. The course may be repeated for 
credit if the topic is different from one previ- 
ously studied. 

37 BIBLICAL TOPICS 

An in-depth study of Biblical topics related to 
the Old and New Testaments. Topics include 
prophecy, wisdom literature, the Dead Sea 
Scrolls, the teachings of Jesus, Pauline theolo- 
gy, Judaism and Christian origins, reaction 
criticism — the way the Synoptic Gospels and 
John give final form to their message. Course 
will vary from year to year and may be taken 
for credit a second time if the topic is different 
from one previously studied. 

41 CONTEMPORARY RELIGIOUS ISSUES 
A study of the theological significance of 
some contemporary intellectual developments 
in Western culture. The content of this course 
will vary from year to year. Subjects studied in 
recent years include the theological signifi- 
cance of Freud. Marx, and Nietzsche: Christ- 
ianity and existentialism; theology and depth 



55 



psychology; the religious dimension of con- 
temporary literature. 

42 THE NATURE AND MISSION 
OF THE CHURCH 

A study of the nature of the Church as "The 
People of God" with reference to the Biblical, 
Protestant. Orthodox, and Roman Catholic 
traditions. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See mdex) 

Interns in religion usually work in local chur- 
ches under the super\ision of the pastor and a 
member of the faculty. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Current study areas are in the Biblical lan- 
guages. New Testament theology, compara- 
tive religions, and the ethics of technology 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 
A recent project was on the theology of hope 
with reference to the thought of Ernst Bloch 
and Alfred North Whitehead. 



SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY 

Professor: McCrary 
Associate Professors: Jo 

(Chairperson). Wilk 
Assistant Professor: Strauser 

The Sociology/ Anthropology Depart- 
ment offers two tracks in the major. Both 
tracks introduce the students to the fun- 
damental concepts of the discipline, and 
both tracks prepare the student for 
graduate school. 

Track I emphasizes the theoretical 
aspects of sociology and anthropology. 
Track II emphasizes the application of 
sociology and anthropology to human 
services. 

Track I — Sociology-Anthropology 
requires the core course sequence 10, 14, 
29. 44. and 47 and three other courses 
within the department with the exception 
of 15, 22, 23, 25, 40. and 43. Religion 
26 may also be counted toward the 
major. 

Track II — Human Services in a 
Socio-Cultural Perspective requires: 
Sociology-Anthropology 10, 22, 29, 43, 
44, and 47. In addition, students must 



select two courses from among the fol- 
lowing: Sociology-Anthropology 20, 
21, 27, 28, 30, 34, and 35. Students are 
also required to choose two units from 
the following courses: Psychology 10. 
Psychology 24, Economics 24, and 
Political Science 33. Recommended 
courses: Accounting 10. Accounting 26. 
Spanish 10. Spanish 1 1. History 13, and 
Philosophy 34. 

Majors in both tracks are encouraged 
to participate in the internship program. 

A minor in Sociological and Anthro- 
pological Views of Religion for those 
interested in theology or a ministerial 
career consists of four sociology- 
anthropology courses from among 26, 
32, 33. 36. and 46. 

10 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIOLOGY 

An introduction to the problems, concepts, 
and methods in sociology today, including 
analysis of stratification, organization of 
groups and institutions, social movements, 
and deviants in social structure. 

14 INTRODUCTION TO ANTHROPOLOGY 

An introduction to the subfields of anthropolo- 
gy; its subject matter, methodology, and 
goals. Examination of biological and cultural 
evolution, the fossil evidence for human evo- 
lution, and questions raised in relation to 
human evolution. Other topics include race, 
human nature, primate behavior, and prehis- 
toric cultural development. 

15 INTRODUCTION TO AMERICAN 
CRIMINAL JUSTICE SYSTEM 

An introduction to the role of law enforce- 
ment, courts, and corrections in the adminis- 
tration of justice; the historical development 
of police, courts, and corrections; jurisdiction 
and procedures of courts; an introduction to 
the studies, literature, and research in criminal 
justice; careers in criminal justice. 

20 MARRIGE AND THE FAMILY 

The history, structure, and functions of mod- 
em American family life, emphasizing dating, 
courtship, factors in marital adjustment, and 
the changing status of family members. Pre- 
requisite: Sociology-Anthropology 10 or con- 
sent of instructor 

21 JUVENILE DELINQUENCY 

A multidisciplinary approach to the study of 
the constellation of factors that relate to juve- 
nile delinquency causation, handling the juve- 
nile delinquent in the cnminal justice system, 
treatment strategies, prevention, and commu- 
nity responsibility. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor. 



22 INTRODUCTION TO 
HUMAN SERVICES 

The course is designed for students interested 
in learning about, or entering, the human 
services profession. It will review the history . 
the range, and the goals of human services 
together with a survey of vanous strategies 
and approaches to human problems. It will 
include practical discussions of social beha- 
vioral differences as they relate to stress and 
conflict in people's lives. Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology 10 andlor Psycholo- 
gy 10 or consent of instructor. 

23 INTRODUCTION TO 
LAW ENFORCEMENT 

Principles, theories, and doctrines of the law 
of crimes, elements in crime, analysis of 
criminal investigation, important case law. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 15 or 
consent of instructor. 

24 RURAL AND URBAN COMMUNITIES 
The concept of community is treated as it 
operates and affects individual and group 
behavior in rural, suburban, and urban set- 
tings. Emphasis is placed upon characteristic 
institutions and problems of modem city life. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 10 or 
consent of instructor. 

25 INTRODUCTION TO 
CRIMINAL INVESTIGATION 

This course is designed for advanced criminal 
justice majors. Emphasis is placed on an in- 
depth study of detection and investigation of 
major crimes. Particular attention is placed on 
the use of cnminalistics. legal parameters of 
evidence and interrogation, and prosecutory 
procedures. Prerequisite : Sociology- 
Anthropology 23 or consent of instructor. Will 
not he counted toward the sociologyl 
anthropology major. 

26 SOCIAL MOVEMENTS 

An analysis of the dynamics, structure, and 
reactions to social movements with focus on 
contemporary social movements. Prerequis- 
ite: Sociology-Anthropology 10 or consent of 
instructor. 

27 SOCIAL PROBLEMS 

The course examines the causes, characteris- 
tics, and consequences of social problems in 
America from diverse socio-cultural perspec- 
tives. Topics discussed typically include 
crime, urban cnses. family disorganization, 
poverty, race problems, drug abuse, and other 
related issues. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor. 

28 AGING AND SOCIETY 

Analysis of cross-cultural characteristics of 
the aged as individuals and as members of 
groups. Emphasis is placed upon variables: 



56 



health, housing, socio-ecnomic status, per- 
sonal adjustment, retirement, and social parti- 
cipation. Sociological, social psychological, 
and anthropological frames of reference util- 
ized in analysis and description of aging and 
its relationship to society, culture, and person- 
ality. 

29 CULTURAL ANTHROPOLOGY 

An examination of cultural and social anthro- 
pology designed to familiarize the student 
with the analytical approaches to the diverse 
cultures of the worid. The relevancy of cultur- 
al anthropology for an understanding of the 
human condition will be stressed. Topics to he 
covered include the nature of primitive 
societies in contrast to civilizations, the con- 
cept of culture and cultural relativism, the 
individual and culture, the social patterning of 
behavior and social control, an anthropologi- 
cal perspective on the culture of the United 
States. 

}0 CRIMINOLOGY 

Analysis of the sociology of law; conditions 
under which criminal laws develop; etiology 
of crime; epidemiology of crime, including 
explanation of statistical distribution of cnmi- 
nal behavior in terms of time, space, and 
social location. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor. 

3 1 SOCIOLOGY OF WOMEN 

A sociological examination of the role of 
women in American society through an analy- 
sis of the social institutions which affect their 
development. Role-analysis theory will be 
applied to the past, present, and future expen- 
ence of women as It relates to the role options 
of society as a whole. Students will do an 
original research project on the role of 
women. Prerequisite: Sociology - 
Anthropology 10. Alternate years. 

32 INSTITUTIONS 

Introduces the student to the sociological con- 
cept of social institution, the types of social 
institutions to be found in all societies, and the 
interrelationships between the social institu- 
tions within a society. The course is divided 
into two basic pans; I. That apsect which 
deals with the systematic organization of soci- 
ety in general, and 2. The concentration on a 
particular social institution: economic, politi- 
cal, educational, or social welfare. Prere- 
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology 10 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

33 SOCIOLOGY OF RELIGION 

An examination of the major theories of the 
relationship of religion to society and a survey 
of sociological studies of religious behavior. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 10 or 
consent of instructor. 



34 RACIAL AND 

CULTURAL MINORITIES 
Study of racial, cultural, and national groups 
within the framework of Amencan cultural 
values. An analysis will include historical, 
cultural, and social factors underiying ethnic 
and racial conflict. Field tnps and individual 
reports are part of the requirements for the 
course. Prerequisite: Sociology - 
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor. 

3.1 CULTURE AND PERSONALITY 

Introduction to psychological anthropology. 
Its theories and methodologies Emphasis will 
be placed on the relationship between indivi- 
dual and culture, national character, cognition 
and culture, culture and mental disorders, and 
cross-cultural considerations of the concept of 
self. Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 
29 or consent of instructor. Offered at least 
once every three years. 

36 THE ANTHROPOLOGY OF 
PRIMITIVE RELIGIONS 

The course will familiarize the student with 
the wealth of anthropological data on the 
religions and world views developed by prim- 
itive peoples. The functions of primitive 
religion in regard to the individual, society, 
and vanous cultural institutions will be exa- 
mined. Subjects to be surveyed include myth, 
witchcraft, vision quests, spirit possession, 
the cultural use of dreams, and revitalization 
movements. Particular emphasis will be given 
to shamanism, transcultural religious experi- 
ence, and the creation of cultural realities 
through religions. Both a social scientific and 
existentialist perspective will be employed. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 29 or 
consent of instructor. Alernate years. 

37 THE ANTHROPOLOGY 
OF AMERICAN INDIANS 

An ethnographic survey of native North 
Amencan Indian and Eskimo cultures, such as 
the Iroquois, Plains Indians. Pueblos. Kwa- 
kiutl. and Netsilik. Changes in native lifeways 
due to European contacts and United States 
expansion will be considered. Recent cultural 
developments among American Indians will 
be placed in an anthropological perspective. 
Offered at least once every three years. 

38 LEGAL AND POLITICAL 
ANTHROPOLOGY 

The course is designed to familiarize the stu- 
dent with the techniques of conflict resolution 
and the utilization of public power in pnmitive 
society as well as the various theories of prim- 
itive law and government. The rise of the state 
and an anthropological perspective on modem 
law and government will be included. The 
concepts of self-regulation and social control, 
legitimacy, coercion, and exploitation will be 
the organizing focus. Prerequisite : 



Sociology-Anthropology 29 or consent of 
instructor. 

39 THE AMERICAN PRISON SYSTEM 

Nature and history of punishment, evolution 
of the prison and prison methods with empha- 
sis on prison community, prison architecture, 
institutional programs, inmate rights, and 
sentences. Review of punishment versus treat- 
ment, detention facilities, jails, reformatories, 
prison organization and administration, cus- 
tody, and discipline. Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology 15. 

40 PROBATION AND PAROLE 

.A course designed for the advanced criminal 
justice major. While the course concerns the 
study of probation and parole as pans of the 
criminal justice system and their impact on the 
system as a whole, the pnmary emphasis is the 
impact on the offender. Particular attention is 
given to diagnostic report wnting on offen- 
ders, pre-sentence investigation, offender 
classification, and parole planning. Prere- 
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology 15 and 39. 
Alternate years. 

41 SOCIAL STRATIFICATION 

An analysis of stratification systems with spe- 
cific reference to American society. The 
course will include an analysis of poverty, 
wealth, and power in the United States. Parti- 
cular attention will be given to factors which 
generate and maintain inequality, along with 
the impacts of inequality on the lives of 
Americans. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor. 

43 HUMAN SERVICES 

IN HELPING INSTITUTIONS 
The course examines the organizational and 
conceptual context within which human ser- 
vices are delivered in contemporary society. 
Subjects to be covered include ethnographic 
study of nursing homes, prisons, therapeutic 
communities, mental hospitals, and other 
human service institutions. The methodology 
of fieldwork will be explored so as to sensitize 
the student to the socio-cultural dismensions 
of helping environments and relationships. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 10 or 
Sociology-Anthropology 29 or consent of 
instructor. Alternate years. 

44 SOCIAL THEORY 

The history of the development of sociological 
thought from its earliest philosophical begin- 
nmgs is treated through discussions and 
reports. Emphasis is placed upon sociological 
thought since the time of Comte. Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology 10 or consent of 
instructor. 

45 ANTHROPOLOGICAL THEORY 

The history of the development of anthropo- 



57 



logical thought Irom the IXth century to the 
present. Emphasis is placed upon anthropo- 
logical thought since 1X50. Topics include 
esolutionism, historical-particularism, cultur- 
al idealism, cultural materialism, lunctional- 
isni. structuralism, and ethnoscience. Prere- 
quisite: Socioloiiy-Anlhropology 29 or 
conseni of inslniclor. Offered at least once 
every three years. 

4(1 PEOPLE AND CULTURES OF 
THE AMERICAN SOUTHWEST 
Field experience in the analysis of tricultural 
communities ol Northern New Mexico. 
Southern Colorado, and Northeastern Arizo- 
na, including the eastern Pueblos of New 
Mexico; Zuni. Navajo, and Apache reserva- 
tions; isolated Spanish-American mountain 
villages of Northern New Mexico; religious 
ashrams and communes; and cities of the 
Southwest and Juarez. Mexico. Emphasis 
upon Taos. Rio Arriba. Sante Fe. and Los 
Alamos counties of New Mexico. Prerequis- 
ite: Sociology 10 or conseni of instructor. May 
or summer only. 

47 RESEARCH METHODS IN 

SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY 

Study of the research process in sociology- 
anthropology. Attention is given to the pro- 
cess of designing and administering research 
and the application of research Different 
methodological skills are considered, mclud- 
ing field work, questionnaire construction, 
and other methods of data gathering and the 
analysis of data. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 10 and Mathematical I J or 
consent of instructor. 

48-49 PRACTICUM IN SOCIOLOGY 

Introduces the student to a practical work 
experience involving community agencies in 
order to effect a synthesis of the student's 
academic course work and its practical appli- 
cations in a community agency. Specifics of 
the course to be worked out in conjunction 
with department, student, and agency. Prere- 
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology 10 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns in sociology-anthropology typically 
work off campus with social service agencies 
under the supervision of administrators. How- 
ever, other internship experiences, such as 
with the Lycoming County Historical 
Museum, are available Interns In criminal 
justice work off campus in criminal justice 
agencies, such as penal institutions and prob- 
ation and parole departments, under the super- 
vision of administrative personnel. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
An opportunity to pursue specific interests and 
topics not usually covered in regular courses. 



Through a program of readings and tutorials, 
the student will have the opportunity to pursue 
these interests and topics in greater depth than 
is usually possible in a regular course. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



THEATRE 



Professor: Falk (Chairperson) 

Assistant Professor; Alien 

Assistant Teclinicai Director: Huffman 

The major consists of eight courses: 
Theatre 10 and seven others; a concen- 
tration in acting, directing, or design is 
possible. In addition to the course 
requirements, majors are expected to 
participate actively in Arena Theatre pro- 
ductions. Majors are urged to include 
courses in art, music, psychology, and 
English, or other areas of special inter- 
est. 

Three minors are available in the 
Theatre department. A minor in Theatre 
History and Literature consists of Theat- 
re 10, 32, 33, 35, and 40. The following 
courses are required to complete a minor 
in Performance: Theatre 10, 14, 26, 34, 
36, and either 32 or 33. To obtain a minor 
in Technical Theatre, a student must 
complete Theatre 10, 18, 28, 38, and 42 
or 43. 

The fine arts distribution requirement 
may be satisfied by selecting any two of 
the following recommended courses: 
Theatre 10, 11, 14, 18, 32, 33 or other 
courses with the consent of the instruc- 
tor. 

10 INTRODUCTION TO THEATRE 
Designed as a comprehensive introduction to 
the aesthetics of theatre. From the spectator's 
point of view, the nature of theatre will be 
explored, including dramatic literature and the 
integral functioning of acting, directing, and 
all production aspects. 

1 1 INTRODUCTION TO FILM 

A basic course in understanding the film 
medium The class will investigate film tech- 
nique through lectures and by viewing regular 
weekly films chosen from classic, contempor- 
ary, and experimental short films. 



14 INTRODUCTION TO ACTING 

An introductory study of the actor's prepara- 
tion with emphasis on developing the actor's 
creative imagination through improvisations 
and scene study. 

18 INTRODUCTION TO 
PLAY PRODUCTION 

Stagecraft and the various other aspects of 
play production are introduced. Through 
material presented in the course and laborato- 
ry work on the Arena Theatre stage, the stu- 
dent will acquire experience to produce theat- 
rical scenery. 

26 INTRODUCTION TO DIRECTING 

An introductory study of the function of the 
director in preparation, rehearsal, and perfor- 
mance. Emphasis is placed on developing the 
student's ability to analyze scripts, and on the 
development of the student's imagination 
Prerequisite: Theatre 14. 

28 INTRODUCTION TO SCENE 
DESIGN AND STAGECRAFT 
An introduction to the theatre with an empha- 
sis on stagecraft. Productions each semester 
serve as the laboratory to provide the practical 
experience necessary to understand the 
material presented in the classroom. Prere- 
quisite: Theatre Iff or conseni of instructor. 

31 ADVANCED TECHNIQUES 
OF PLAY PRODUCTION 
A detailed consideration of the interrelated 
problems and techniques of play analysis, 
production styles, and design. Offered sum- 
mer only. 

yi HISTORY OF THEATRE I 

A detailed study of the development of theatre 
from the Greeks to the Restoration. Alternate 



33 HISTORY OF THEATRE II 

The history of the theatre from 1660. Alter- 
nate years. 

34 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: ACTING 
Instruction and practice in character analaysis 
and projection with emphasis on vocal and 
body techniques. Prerequisite: Theatre 14. 

35 THEORIES OF THE 
MODERN THEATRE 

An advanced course exploring the philosophi- 
cal roots of the modem theatre from the birth 
of realism to the present and the influences on 
modem theatre practice. Selected readings 
from Nietzsche. Marx. Jung. Freud. White- 
head. Kierkegaard. Sartre. Camus. Antoine. 
Copeau. Stanislavski. Shaw. Meyerhold. 
Artaud. Brecht. Brook. Grotowski. Alternate 



58 



36 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: DIRECTING 
Emphasis is placed on the student's ability to 
function in preparation and rehearsal. Practi- 
cal experience involves the directing of two 
one-act plays from the contemporao' theatre. 
Prerequisite: Theatre 26. 

37 PLAYWRITING AND 
DRAMATIC CRITICISM 

An investigation of the techniques of play- 
wntmg with an emphasis on creative writing, 
culminating in a written one-act play, plus an 
historical survey of dramatic criticism from 
Aristotle to the present with emphasis upon 
developing the student's ability to write 
review s and criticism of theatncal productions 
and films. Alternate years. 

38 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: 
LIGHTING DESIGN 

The theory of stage and lighting design with 
emphasis on their practical application to the 
theatre. Prerequisite: Theatre 18 or consent of 
instructor. 

40 MASTERS OF WORLD DRAMA 

An intensive and detailed analysis of the plays 
and related works, including cnticism of great 
authors, that have shaped world theatre. 
Authors to be selected on the basis of interest 



of students and faculty. At times, more than 
one author will be treated in a term. Ibsen. 
Brecht. Moliere. Williams. Albee. Alternate 
years. May be accepted toward English major 
with consent of English Department. 

42 ADVANCED STUDIO: 
COSTUME DESIGN 

The theory of costuming for the stage, ele- 
ments of design, planning, production, and 
construction of costumes for the theatre. Stu- 
dents will participate in the design of a pro- 
duction. Prerequisite: Theatre 18 or consent 
of instructor. 

43 ADVANCED STUDIO: 
PROPERTIES DESIGN 

The theory of properties design for the stage, 
including the production of specific properties 
for staging use. Elements of design, fabrica- 
tion, and the construction of properties 
employing a vanety of materials and the appli- 
cation of new theatrical technology. Prere- 
quisite: Theatre 18 or consent of instructor. 

44 ADVANCED STUDIO: ACTING 
Preparation of monologues and two-character 
scenes, contemporary and classical. The stu- 
dent will appear in major campus productions. 
Prerequisite: Theatre 34. 



46 ADVANCED STUDIO: DIRECTING 

Emphasis will be placed on the student's abil- 
ity to produce a major three-act play from the 
scnpt to the stage for public pert'ormance. 
Prerequisite: Theatre 36. 

48 ADVANCED STUDIO: DESIGN 

Independent work in conceptual and practical 
design. The student will design one full pro- 
duction as his major project. Prerequisites: 
Theatre 28 or 38 and consent of instructor. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns in theatre work off campus in theatres 
such as the Guthne Theatre. Minneapolis, and 
at the New Jersey Shakespeare Festival. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Some recent independent studies have been 
the roles of women as characters in drama, 
scene design, and lighting design for an Arena 
production. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 
A typical study could be the writing and pro- 
duction of an original play. 




59 



Student Services 



ADMINISTRATION 

The program of student services at 
Lycoming is administered by the Office 
of Student Services. It is designed to 
respond to a diversity of student needs. 
Professional staff members are assigned 
the specific responsibilities of: 

— career counseling and place- 
ment; 

— residence life; 

— student activities; 

— religious life; 

— health services; 

— study improvement services; 

— student orientation; 

— judiciary-student conduct 

All members of the staff are available 
to counsel and advise individual stu- 
dents. 



career trends. Services offered by the 
center include: 

— individual counseling; 

— SHARE (Students Having a Real 
Experience), a program in which 
students observe and work with a 
professional in the field); 

— placement services to aid seniors in 
implementing their career plans; 

— assistance to students in securing 
internships, summer employment, 
and part-time employment; 

— speaker's program which brings 
professionals from a variety of 
careers to campus seminars; 

— video-cassette programs relating to 
job skills and career information; 

— microfiche copies of graduate- and 
professional-school catalogs for 
the United States and abroad. 



responsibility of students occupying the 
room. Hall and bathroom damage will be 
the responsibility of the section where 
damage occurs. 

Residence halls are not available for 
occupancy during the vacation periods. 
Quiet hours for study purposes, which 
are established by residence hall councils 
or the Office of Student Services, are 
published in the student handbook and 
posted on bulletin boards. 

Room visitation by members of the 
opposite sex is permitted in the halls 
under conditions established by the Col- 
lege in cooperation with the various resi- 
dence hall councils, which share respon- 
sibility for developing and monitoring 
regulations, and which are organized 
each fall semester before visitation sche- 
dules are established. 



PERSONAL COUNSELING 

All members of the staff of the Office 
of Student Services are qualified and 
available to provide non-therapeutic 
assistance to students with adjustment 
problems. A part-time clinical psycholo- 
gist provides short-term therapy for stu- 
dents needing assistance. Continuing 
therapy is available through referral to 
public agencies and private clinicians in 
the Williamsport community. Financial 
arrangements for these referral services 
are made directly by the student with the 
agency and/or individual clinician 
involved. 



CAREER DEVELOPMENT 
SERVICES 

The Career Development Center pro- 
vides services which are designed to help 
students identify their abilities and inter- 
ests, set realistic career goals, and plan 
academic programs to meet these goals. 
Counseling for Lycoming students 
begins in the freshman year. 

In addition to individual guidance, the 
center maintains a library on specific 
careers, employment outlooks, and 



RESIDENCE AND 
RESIDENCE HALLS 

Single students who do not live at home 
are required to live in residence halls and 
eat in the dining room. All new resident 
students are forwarded a room- 
agreement form to sign after confirma- 
tion of their admission to Lycoming. 
This agreement is renewed each spring. 
Exceptions to the residence policy may 
be granted to those students who wish to 
live with relatives, and students who are 
23 years of age or older. Requests for 
such exemptions must be submitted to 
the Residence Life Office before the first 
day of the term to which the student has 
been admitted. 

Residence students assume responsi- 
bility for their rooms and furnishings. 
The College reserves the right to enter 
and inspect any room for reasons of dam- 
age, health, or safety, and to search any 
room when there is reason to believe a 
violation of College rules or the law is 
occurring or has occurred. Charges are 
assessed for damage to rooms, doors, 
furniture and common areas. Wherever 
possible, damage to dormitory property 
will be charged to the person or persons 
directly responsible. Damage and break- 
age occurring in a room will be the 



STUDENT ACTIVITIES 

Student Activities offers assistance 
and advice for all campus programs and 
student organizations. Through the 
efforts of the Campus Activities Board 
(C.A.B.) programming is provided for 
all facets of the student population. The 
newly established Union Governing 
Council (U.G.C.) oversees the function- 
al aspecs of the Wertz Student Center and 
works to create an atmosphere which 
best serves the social and recreational 
needs of the students. Student Activities 
is also responsible for Leadership Train- 
ing and the Student Orientation Staff; in 
addition, it provides support and direc- 
tion for student government, the Inter- 
fraternity and Panhellenic councils and 
the retention program. 



RELIGIOUS LIFE 

The United Campus Ministry, staffed 
by a Protestant Minister and a Roman 
Catholic Priest provide a wide range of 
activities in support of the religious lives 
of students. Ecumenical and inclusive in 
nature, campus ministry at Lycoming 
provides worship services, service pro- 
jects, social occasions, retreats, study 
opportunities and personal counseling 



60 



The chaplains Hve on campus and are 
available to students for a variety of 
situations in which they might need sup- 
port, counsel or direction. 

HEALTH SERVICES 

Normal medical treatment by the 
health service staff at the College is pro- 
vided without cost to the student. During 
the fall and spring semesters, the College 
maintains an outpatient service in Rich 
Hall. It is staffed with a registered nurse 
five days a week from 8:30 a.m. to 4 
p.m. The College physician is available 
from II a.m. to 12 noon, Monday 
through Friday. At other times, 
emergency care is available at the 
emergency rooms of Williamsport and 
Divine Providence Hospitals, located a 
short distance from the campus. 

Medical service charges paid by the 
student are: emergency room and 
emergency room physician's charges, 
special medications. X-rays, surgery 
care for major accidents, immunizations, 
examinations for glasses, physician's 
visits other than in the health service, 
referrals for treatment by specialists, 
special nursing services and special ser- 
vices. 

Entering students must provide basic 
health information to the College 
between the time of admission and the 
beginning of classes of the term to which 
they are admitted. This information is 
secured through participation in the com- 
puterized health-information service 
provided by Medical Datamation. Inc. 
New students complete the DASH Medi- 
cal Information Questionnaire that is 
mailed to students shortly after they have 
confirmed their admission to Lycoming. 
The completed form is returned by the 
student to the admission's office together 
w ith a check for $ 1 3 .50. Both the student 
and the College receive reports based on 
the questionnaire responses. The student 
report consists of a Medical Database 
Report, a Hazards Risk Index and a 
health information brochure as 
requested. Information provided by the 
student is confidential and is available 
only to qualified health service and 
student-services personnel. 



A student accident and health insur- 
ance program is provided through the 
College. Students who do not have their 
own coverage or are not included in 
family coverage are required to purchase 
this plan. Information on the plan is 
mailed to every student. 

STUDY IMPROVEMENT 
SERVICES 

Skills Seminars — The seminars con- 
sist of three one-hour sessions on sche- 
duling of time, test-taking and study 
methods. They are scheduled on demand 
for six to 10 students. 

Reading Course — Designed to 
improve reading speed and comprehen- 
sion, this three- week course is offered at 
various times during the academic year 
for a fee of $15. 



STUDENT ORIENTATION 

New students at Lycoming are 
required to attend one of three summer 
orientation sessions with at least one 
parent before they enroll in the fall. The 
purpose of the program is to acquaint 
new students and their parents with the 
College more fully so that new students 
begin their Lycoming experience under 
the most favorable circumstances. Infor- 
mation on orientation is mailed to new 
students after they confirm their admis- 
sion. 



STANDARDS OF CONDUCT 

Lycoming students are expected to 
accept responsibilities required of adults. 
The rights of every member of the Col- 
lege community are protected by estab- 
lished regulations. Although the accep- 
tance of the College's standards of 
behavior is an individual responsibility, 
it also calls for group responsibility. Stu- 
dents should influence their peers to con- 
duct themselves responsibly for the col- 
lective good. 

Students who are unable to demon- 
strate that they have accepted these 



responsibilities or who fail to abide by 
established policies may be dismissed at 
any time or denied readmission for a sub- 
sequent term or semester. Further, after 
the conclusion of any term or semester, 
the College may deny a student the pri- 
vilege of attending any subsequent term 
or semester when the administration 
deems this to be in the best interest of the 
College. 

Lycoming College does not approve 
of the use or misuse of alcoholic bever- 
ages and encourages students to abstain 
from their use and to abide by the legal 
restrictions on alcohol use established by 
the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania. 
Observance of the law is the individual 
responsibility of each student, and fai- 
lure to obey the law may subject the 
student to prosecution by civil authori- 
ties, either on or off campus. 

Students also are expected to be aware 
of the College's attitude toward the use 
and misues of alcohol and to acknow- 
ledge the College's right to its position. 
The College will not tolerate any public 
use of alcohol. Officials of the College 
will prescribe penalties for the public use 
or private misuse of alcohol. These 
penalties will be applied in a consistent 
manner. 

Lycoming recognizes its responsibili- 
ty, however, for providing students with 
reliable information about the social and 
medical implications of the use of alco- 
hol. Lycoming makes every effort to 
create and maintain a community in 
which individual choice is coupled with 
responsible behavior and respect for the 
rights of others. 

Upon enrolling, students are given a 
handbook which contains the College's 
official policies, rules and regulations. 
These policies, rules and regulations are 
part of the contractual agreement stu- 
dents enter into when they register at 
Lycoming. 



61 



Admission to Lycoming 



POLICY AND STANDARDS 

Lycoming College welcomes applica- 
tions from prospective students regard- 
less of age, sex. race, religion, financial 
resources, color, national or ethnic ori- 
gin, or handicap. Admission is based on 
the following standards: 

— Graduation from an accre- 
dited secondary school 

— Completion of 16 units of college 
preparatory courses including (4) 
English. (3) Math. (2) Foreign 
Language, (2) Natural Science, (2) 
Social Science and (3) Elective. 
The admissions committee, recog- 
nizing that high school curricula 
vary, is always willing to consider 
the application of an able student 
whose preparation while differing 
from the plan suggested, neverthe- 
less gives evidence of continuity in 
the study of fundamental subjects. 

— Satisfactory College Entrance 
Examination Board Scholastic 
Aptitude Test (SAT) or American 
College Test (ACT) scores. 

Applicants with significant academic 
preparation and exceptional maturity 
may apply to Lycoming as a candidate 
for early admission. A recommendation 
from a school counselor is required, indi- 
cating the student's intentions to attend 
Lycoming in lieu of the 12th grade. If 
admitted, the student enters the College 
after completing the junior year in high 
school. 

Students who are not enrolled in a 
degree program and who wish to register 
for courses in any semester are welcome 
to apply. A Special Student Application 
is available for this purpose. 

Lycoming is fully approved for the 
educational program for veterans. 



APPLICATION AND 
SELECTION PROCESS 

For students considering a fall semes- 
ter admission, applications should be 
filed by April 1 . The application should 
be accompanied by a $20 application fee, 
an official secondary school transcript 
forwarded by the school guidance office. 



and the results of either the Scholastic 
Aptitude Test (SAT) or the American 
College Test (ACT). Applications are 
considered after April I on a space- 
available basis. 

The completed application is eva- 
luated individually by identifying each 
applicant's academic achievement, 
talents, qualities, and interests. Lycom- 
ing notifies applicants of their accep- 
tance as soon as possible after all creden- 
tials have been received and evaluated. 
In some instances, additional informa- 
tion may be needed to complete the eva- 
luation. The review process normally 
begins after January 1 . 

Admitted applicants must notify the 
Collegeof their intent to enroll by May 1. 
the national candidates' reply date. This 
notification must be accompanied by a 
$100 (attendance) deposit for commut- 
ing students, or a $200 (attendance and 
room) deposit for resident students. 
After May 1 , the deposits are not refund- 
able. 



ADVANCED STANDING 
BY TRANSFER 

The College welcomes transfer stu- 
dents from other accredited colleges and 
universities according to the following 
standards and procedures: 

— applicants should be in good 
academic standing and should have 
a cumulative grade point average 
of 2.0 in transferable courses at 
their former institutions: 

— courses that are reasonably com- 
parable to those offered at Lycom- 
ing will be accepted for transfer if 
the grade C or better is earned; 

— grades earned at previous institu- 
tions will not be included in the 
computation of the grade point 
average; 

— each transfer applicant will be 
evaluated individually in relation 
to unsuccessfully attempted course 
credits within our permitted 
24-credit maximum. The number 
of unsuccessful attempts remaining 
will be recorded on the transcript 



evaluation prior to required confir- 
mation; 

— class standing at Lycoming will be 
based on the number of credits 
accepted for transfer; 

— no more than 64 credits can be 
accepted for transfer from a junior 
or community college: 

— tranfer students will be eligible to 
earn appointments to the Dean's 
List, but to be considered for hon- 
ors at commencement at least 64 
credits must be earned at Lycom- 
ing; 

— students will be eligible for class 
rank after completing eight courses 
at Lycoming: 

— official copies of transcripts from 
all institutions attended must be 
submitted as a part of the admis- 
sions application; 

— the residency requirement for a 
degree is eight unit courses or 32 
credits. The final eight units must 
be taken at Lycoming. 



EARLY DECISION 

Lycoming's Early Decision Plan is 
designed for qualified high school 
seniors who have examined their college 
choices thoroughly and have decided that 
Lycoming College is their first choice. 
Candidates for Early Decision may apply 
elsewhere with the understanding that 
other applications will be withdrawn if 
the candidates are accepted at Lycoming. 
It is further understood that students 
select only one college to which they will 
apply as Early Decision applicants. 

Applications for Early Decision may 
be submitted any time until December 1 . 
Candidates will be notified of the Admis- 
sions Committee's decision by Decem- 
ber 15 providing that the credential files 
are complete. 

It is understood that the candidates 
admitted under the Early Decision Plan 
will subsequently enroll at Lycoming 
responding with a deposit by January 1 . 

The Admissions Committee may defer 
candidates for a second review in the 
spring. In such ca.ses, the Committee 



62 



considers additional academic informa- 
tion such as senior year grades and test 
scores. 



ADMISSIONS OFFICE 
LOCATION AND HOURS 

Prospective students and their families 
are encouraged to visit the campus for a 
student-conducted tour and an interview 
with an admissions officer, who will 
provide additional information about the 
College and answer questions. 

The Admissions Office is located on 
the first floor of Long Hall. For an 
appointment, telephone (717) 326-1951. 
or write Office of Admissions, Lycom- 
ing College, Williamsport, PA 17701. 
Office hours are: 

Weekdays — September through April 

8 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. 

— May through August 

9 a.m. to 4 p.m. 
Saturdays — September through April 

8 a.m. to 12 noon 

— May through August 
No Saturday hours 




63 



Financial Matters 



EXPENSES FOR 

THE ACADEMIC YEAR 1985-86 



ENTRY FEES AND DEPOSITS 



Application Fee — All students for 
admission must submit a $20 application 
fee. This charge defrays the cost of pro- 
cessing the application and is non- 
refundable. 



The following expenses are effective 

for the regular fall and spring semesters. 

The College reserves the right to adjust 

fees at any time. The fees for each 

semester are payable not later than the » . . . rv -^ » r j 

, . f , f .1. . Admission Deposit — After students 

second day oi classes tor the semester. , , ,-■ j r- ■ • j ■ 

^ have been notiried of their admission to 

Lycoming, they are required to make a 

Pggj Semester Year $100 admissions deposit to confirm their 

Comprehensive S3.400 $6,800 intention to matriculate. Students seek- 

Board and Room Rem 1.335 2.670 ing residence must submit an additional 

T-""' ■*"'^ '^■•^™ $ Too room-reservation deposit. All 

One-Time Student Fees deposits are applied to the general 

charges tor the tirst semester of atten- 

. PP ication " ; - dance. After May 1. deposits are nonre- 

AdniisMons Deposit 100 •' ^ 

Contingency Deposit 100 fundable. 

Room Reservation Deposit 1 00 

Contingency Deposit — A con- 
Part-Time Student Fees tingency deposit of SI 00 is required 

Application Fee $ 20 .■ n .- ,i .• . j ^ 

r V 1. . /" co=n 'J' ^" tu 1-time students as a guaran- 

Each Unit Course $850 , ^ 

tee tor payment of damage to or loss 

Additional Charges »*' College property, for library and 

Applied Music Fee {halt-hour per ueek parking fines, or similar penalties 

per semester 120 imposed by the College. The deposit 

Cap and Gown Rental prevailing cost is collected alons with Other chartzes 

Laboratory Fee per Unit Course 5 to 50 fyr (^e initial semester. The balance 

Rereaistration Fee 25 .- ... , . . .- j j i» n 

l>arkm. Permit (for the academic year) . 10 to 15 "* '^IS deposit is refunded after all 
Parking Permit with Reserved Space debts to the College have been paid. 
(for the academic year) 15 to 35 either upon graduation or upon writ- 
Practice Teaching Fee {Payable in ten request submitted to the Registrar 

D ^"T'J^^o"" r^ ,^' '***' two weeks prior to voluntary p'erma- 

R.O.T.C. Basic Course Deposit .'^ . ■: ^ 

{Payable at Bucknell Umversiiy) 60 "ent termination ot enrollment at 

R.O.T.C. Advanced Course Deposit Lycoming College. 

(Payable at Bucknell University) 60 

Transcript Fee ( No charge to PARTIAL PAYMENTS 

(lull-time students) 3 

Medical Quf^slionnaire Fee (Payable to 

Medical Datamation. Inc.) prevailing cost For the convenience ofthose who find 

it impossible to follow the regular sched- 
The comprehensive fee covers the reg- ule of payments, arrangements may be 
ular course load of three to four courses made with the College Treasurer for the 
each semester. Resident students must monthly payment of College fees 
board at the College unless, for extraor- through various educational plans, 
dinary reasons, authorization is extended Additional information concerning par- 
lor other eating arrangements. If a dou- tial payments may be obtained from the 
ble room is used as a single room, there is Treasurer or Director of Admissions, 
an additional charge of $265 per semes- 
ter. The estimated cost for books and 
supplies is up to $250 per year, depend- 
ing on the course of study. Special ses- 
sion (May term and summer term) 
charges for tuition, room, and board are 
established during the fall semester. 



REFUNDS FOR STUDENTS 
WHO WITHDRAW 



Refunds of tuition and board are made 
to students who voluntarily and officially 



withdraw from the College while in good 
standing according to the following sche- 
dule for the fall and spring semesters and 
the comparable period for the May and 
summer terms: 

Refund Charge 
Period of Withdrawal % % 

During the first week 

of the semester 80 20 

During the second and 

third week 60 40 

During the fourth and 

filth week 40 60 

During the sixth and 

seventh week 20 80 

After seven weeks 100 



The date on which the Dean of the 
College approves the student's with- 
drawal form is considered the official 
date of withdrawal. Charges are levied 
for services provided after withdrawal. 

Lycoming scholarships and grants are 
applied during the fall and spring semes- 
ters on the same basis as tuition charges. 
If a withdrawing student is charged 60% 
tuition, he/she will receive 60% of the 
scholarship or grant. Government finan- 
cial aid is adjusted according to federal 
and state guidelines. 

Room charges which are established 
on a .semester basis, and special charges, 
such as laboratory fees, are not refund- 
able if a student leaves the College prior 
to the end of the semester. 

Full-time students who after reducing 
their loads continue to be enrolled for 1 2 
or more semester hours are not eligible 
for a refund of tuition for an individual 
course. Similarly, students who register 
for extra hours in excess of 16 hours per 
semester and who later reduce their loads 
are not eligible after the fifth day of the 
semester for a refund of the fee charged 
for overloads. Charges will be recalcu- 
lated for students who enroll full time 
and subsequently assume part-time sta- 
tus by reducing their loads below 12 
hours during the drop-add period. The 
assumption of a part-time status normal- 
ly involves a substantial reduction of 
financial aid since most financial aid 
programs do not extend eligibility to 
part-time students. 



64 



NON-PAYMENT OF 
FEES PENALTY 

Students will not be registered for 
courses in a new semester if their 
accounts for previous attendance have 
not been settled. Diplomas, transcripts, 
and certifications of withdrawals in good 
standing are issued only when a satisfac- 
tory settlement of all financial obliga- 
tions has been made in the Business 
Office. 



FINANCIAL AID 

POLICY AND PROCEDURES 

The dominant factor in determining 
the amount of financial aid awarded to 
individual students is the establishment 
of need. Scholarships may be awarded 
on the basis of financial need and 
academic ability, while grants are pro- 
vided on the basis of financial need. 
Long-term, low-cost educational loans 
are available from federal and state sour- 
ces to most students who can demon- 
strate need. Part-time employment is 
available to students. 

To apply for financial assistance. 
obtain Lycoming's Financial Aid Appli- 
cation (FAA) from the Financial Aid 
Office and the CSS Financial Aid Form 
(FAF) and your State Grant Application 
from your secondary school Guidance 
Office or Lycoming's Financial Aid 
Office. Submit the FAA to Lycoming 
and the completed FAF to the College 
Scholarship Service. Box 2700. Prince- 
ton. NJ 08541 . as early as possible after 
January I . Renewal applications are 
required annually. 



SCHOLARSHIPS AND GRANTS 

Valedictorian/Salutatorian Scho- 
larship is a $2,400 award honoring gra- 
duates of private and public secondary 
schools who rank either first or second in 
their graduating class as certified by their 
guidance counselor. These awards are 
based upon academic achievement and 



are not contingent upon demonstrated 
financial need. Renewal cumulative 
average is 3.00. 

Lycoming Recognition Scholarships 
for $700 to $ 1 ,000 per year are awarded 
to freshmen who have superior academic 
qualifications, have filed the FAF but did 
not demonstrate financial need as deter- 
mined by the College Scholarship Ser- 
vice and were not eligible for another 
Lycoming scholarship program. This 
scholarship is renewable if the recipient 
maintains a 3.25 cumulative average. 

Lycoming Directors' Scholarships 
of $400 to full tuition, depending upon 
financial need, are awarded to students in 
the top fifth of their secondary school 
class with CEEB scores totaling 1 100 or 
more. Renewal cumulative average is 
3.00. 

President's Fellowships in Music are 
awarded annually to students who are 
skilled in singing or in playing the piano 
and wish to continue performing, 
whether or not they intend to become 
music majors. To be eligible for consid- 
eration, a candidate must apply and be 
accepted by Lycoming College and 
audition with the Music Department. 
The amount of each fellowship is $250 
per semester, renewable to a maximum 
of $2,000 per student. The primary 
responsibility of each Fellow is musical 
performance as assigned by the Music 
Department. Singing in a chamber choir, 
accompanying in a voice studio, playing 
for chapel services, or rehearsing a musi- 
cal comedy are typical opportunities. 

Lycoming Grant-in-Aid awards of 
$400 to full tuition, depending upon 
financial need, are made to full-time 
students who do not qualify for scholar- 
ships and who have demonstrated finan- 
cial need and the prospect of contributing 
positively to the College community. 
Renewal requires continued financial 
need and satisfactory citizenship stan- 
dards. 

Ministerial Grants are awarded to 
dependent children of United Methodist 
ministers and practicing ordained minis- 
ters of other denominations. The grants 
amount to one-third of tuition for chil- 
dren of United Methodist Ministers in the 
Central Pennsvlvania Annual Confer- 



ence and one-fourth of tuition for all 
others. If a student completes the FAF. 
this grant will be part of the total aid 
award. 

Pre-Ministerial Student Grants of 
one-fourth of tuition are awarded to stu- 
dents preparing for the Christian ministry 
who are enrolled full time and demon- 
strate financial need. Students must com- 
plete the pre-ministerial application 
available through the Financial Aid 
Office. 

Women of Lycoming Scholarship is 
an aw ard available to a currently enrolled 
female memberof the junior class having 
completed 80 credit hours with at least a 
3.0 cumulative average and who demon- 
strates financial need of at least the regu- 
lar tuition rate. Applications are avail- 
able in the Financial Aid Office in 
February and are due in March. The 
award is normally $500 and is based on 
current earnings of the scholarship 
endowment. 

Two-in-Family Grants are awarded 
to each member of a family attending 
Lycoming College at the same time. The 
amount is 10% of tuition, room, and/or 
board paid. Each member must be 
enrolled full time and not eligible for any 
other financial aid program of the Col- 
lege. If a student is eligible for other 
Lycoming aid, the student would receive 
whichever is areater. 

United Methodist Scholarships are 
awarded to applicants who are in the top 
one-third of their class, active in Chris- 
tian activities, and have demonstrated 
financial need. The awards are normally 
$500 per year and the funds are provided 
by the United Methodist Church. Annual 
application is required. The student must 
complete and file the FAF and the scho- 
larship forms which are available in the 
Financial Aid Office. 

Wyoming Conference Scholarship 
of $500 is granted by Lycoming to a 
student chosen by the Scholarship Com- 
mittee of the Wyoming Conference. 
These scholarships are renewable for 
three additional years. Good academic 
performance and service to the church 
are the criteria for this award. 

C. Luther Culler Scholarship for 
$500 is available based on scholarship. 



65 



Dewitt-Bodine Scholarships are 

awarded to the highest-ranked student in 
the graduating class each year from 
Hughesville High School who attends 
Lycoming College. The recipient is 
designated by the Hughesville guidance 
director. The scholarship amount is 
$2,200 and is credited at $550 per year 
over four years of attendance at Lycom- 
ing. If the student is in a three-year pro- 
gram (such as Med-Tech), the student 
will receive the award divided equally 
over the three years of attendance at 
Lycoming. 

Clara Kramer Eaton Scholarships 
are awarded to the highest-ranked stu- 
dent in the graduating class each year 
from Line Mountain High School who 
attends Lycoming College. The recipient 
is designated by the high school's gui- 
dance office. The scholarship is $400 per 
year for up to four years' attendance at 
Lycoming. 

James A. Heether Scholarship for 
$300 is available based on financial 
need. Priority will be given to a chemis- 
try major. 

George W. HuntleVi Jr. Scholar- 
ship for $700 is available to help defray 
the tuition and expenses for the first year 
only of any graduate of Cameron County 
High School (formerly Emporium High 
School). The selection is made by the 
superintendent of schools. 

Robert F. Rich Scholarship is 
awarded periodically to an academically 
outstanding student from Central Penn- 
sylvania. The award varies from $200 to 
$1,200 depending upon the available 
scholarship endowment income. Prefer- 
ence is given to a resident of the Wool- 
rich area and children of the employees 
of the Woolrich Company. 

Leonard H. Rothermel Fund pro- 
vides $1,200 in financial aid to needy 
students, who are in satisfactory 
academic standing with primary prefer- 
ence given to Trevorton residents and 
second preference given to Line Moun- 
tain School District area residents. 

Samuel Willard Memorial Scholar- 
ships are awarded to a junior or senior 
student at Lycoming who is in need of 
financial assistance to complete his/her 
decree. Preference is given to a religion 



major. The award varies between $300 
and $600 depending upon available 
scholarship endowment income. 



FEDERAL AID 

Pell Grant — This federal grant pro- 
vides up to $2, 100 per year for full-time 
students who can demonstrate financial 
need. Application can be made when 
submitting the Financial Aid Form 
(FAF). the"PHEAA State Grant Appli- 
cation, or by separate federal application 
on forms which are available in secon- 
dary school guidance offices or the 
Financial Aid Office at Lycoming. All 
students are urged to apply for this pro- 
gram. 

Supplemental Educational Oppor- 
tunity Grants (SEOG) — This federal 
government program provides additional 
assistance to those students with finan- 
cial need. Awards can be made in 
amounts ranging from $200 to $2,000 
and are usually based entirely on excep- 
tional financial need. Renewal is possi- 
ble if the applicant has no reduction in 
financial need in succeeding years. 

National Direct Student Loan 
(NDSL) — This federal five percent 
interest loan permits a total of $6,000 to 
be borrowed by the undergraduate stu- 
dent at a rate not to exceed $3,000 the 
first two years. Repayment does not 
begin until 6 months after graduation or 
withdrawal from college. Loans are nor- 
mally renewed annually if the applicant 
files a renewal application by May 1 and 
continues to demonstrate financial need. 

Federal College Work Study Grants 
(CWSP) — An opportunity is provided 
through this program for students to earn 
part of their college expenses and to gain 
some practical experience by working on 
campus. Federal government financial- 
need guidelines must be met to be eligi- 
ble for this program. Students who do not 
meet these guidelines should consult 
with the Career Development Center or 
Financial Aid Office for other employ- 
ment opportunities. 



STATE GRANTS 

State Grants — All applicants for 
financial aid are urged to investigate 
programs sponsored by their home states 
and to learn about and heed application 
deadlines. Pennsylvania students should 
apply for a PHEAA State Grant before 
April 30. The PHEAA State Grant pro- 
vides up to $1 .500 to eligible Pennsylva- 
nia residents who are in need of financial 
aid. Residents of other states may be 
eligible for grant assistance through their 
states. A few of these states are Dela- 
ware. Maryland. Ohio, Rhode Island, 
and West Virginia. Applications should 
be available through your high school 
guidance office. 

Scholars in Education Awards 
(SEA) were developed by PHEAA to 
help remedy the need for teachers of 
science and math in Pennsylvania secon- 
dary schools. If you are a highly quali- 
fied high school senior who wishes to 
teach math or science as a career, and if 
you meet the qualifications set by 
PHEAA. you could receive an award of 
507f of your annual tuition. You must 
agree to teach math or science in a Penn- 
sylvania secondary school if you accept 
the award, and if you fail to keep this 
commitment, repay the grant as a loan 
plus interest. Check with your high 
school guidance counselor. 



LOANS 

State Guaranteed Loans — Most 
states, including Pennsylvania. New 
Jersey, and New York, provide state 
guaranteed loans through local banks and 
lending institutions. This program pro- 
vides 8 percent interest loans of up to 
$2,500 per academic level for education- 
al expenses with repayment extended 
over a long-term schedule. Applicants 
should consult local banks early in their 
senior year. 

PLUS Loans — PLUS Loans are 
meant to provide additional funds for 
educational expen.ses. The interest rate is 
12 percent. Parents of dependent under- 
graduate students may borrow up to 
$3,000 per year. Independent undergra- 



66 



duates may borrow up to $2,500 per 
year; however, for independent students, 
the PLUS loan, combined with any GSL 
the undergraduate may have for that 
level, cannot exceed $2,500. Applica- 
tions and information are available from 
your bank or other lending institution. 
PHEAA Family Partnership Loans 
are made available to families who can- 
not borrow sufficient funds through 
Guaranteed Student Loan (GSL). Loans 
range from $2,000 to $5,500. Pennsyl- 
vania residents and students from other 
states attending a PA college are eligible 
to apply. For PA residents consideration 
is automatically given when you file a 
PHEAA GSL application. Out-of-state 
students should contact the Financial Aid 
Office for application information. 



OTHER SOURCES OF AID 

Community Scholarships — In 

many communities, foundations, organi- 



zations, and in some cases high schools, 
provide funds for worthy students. 
Applicants should consult with their 
guidance counselor or principal. 

Education Financing Plans — The 
Business Office at Lycoming provides 
information about plans which enable 
parents to pay College expenses on a 
monthly basis through selected compa- 
nies. 

Pennsylvania National Guard — 
Students participating in this program 
may be eligible for scholarship, credit 
programs, educational bonus, or loan 
repayment. Contact a Guard Unit in your 
area for more information. 

Reserve Officers Training Corps 
(ROTO Scholarships — Students who 
participate in Army ROTC are eligible 
for three-, two-, and one-year ROTC 
scholarships to finance tuition, books, 
laboratory fees, and other charges with 
the exception of room and board. ROTC 
Scholarship students also receive $100 
per month during the academic year. 



Reserve Officers Training Corps 
(ROTC) Stipends — Students who par- 
ticipate in the Army ROTC program 
receive an annual stipend of $1 .000 dur- 
ing their junior and senior years. They 
also receive half of a second lieutenant's 
pay plus travel expenses for a six-week 
advanced summer camp between junior 
and senior years. 

Tuition Exchange Grants — 
Lycoming College is a member of both 
the Tuition Exchange Program and the 
CIC Tuition Exchange Program. These 
programs are for dependent students of 
employees at participating institutions of 
higher education. You should contact the 
Tuition Exchange Officer at your host 
institution for information regarding 
sponsorship. 




67 



The Campus 



Eighteen buildings sit on Lycoming's 
20-acre main campus. Most buildings 
have been constructed since 1950. even 
though Lycoming — one of America's 
50 oldest colleges and universities — 
dates back to 1812. All buildings are 
easy to reach from anywhere on campus. 
A 12-acre athletic field and football sta- 
dium lie a few blocks north of the main 
campus. 

Modern buildings include the eight 
residence halls, which contain clean and 
comfortable single and double rooms; 
the library; the student union; and the 
physical education/recreation center. 
Up-to-date facilities include the theatre, 
the planetarium, the computer center, an 
electronic-music studio, a photography 
laboratory, and an art gallery. The com- 
puter center opened in 1969; the art gal- 
lery and physical education center 
opened in 1980. An arts center was reno- 
vated and opened in 1983. 



RESIDENTIAL 

Asbury Hall (1962) — Sleeps 1 54 stu- 
dents. Named in honor of Bishop Francis 
Asbury. the father of The United 
Methodist Church in America, who 
made the circuit through the upper Sus- 
quehanna District in 1812, the year 
Lycoming (then the Williamsport 
Academy) opened its doors. 
Crever Hall (1962) — Sleeps 126 stu- 
dents in two-room suites with bath. Hon- 
ors Lycoming's founder and first finan- 
cial agent, the Rev. Benjamin H. Crever. 
who helped persuade the Baltimore Con- 
ference to purchase the school from the 
Williamsport Town Council in 1848. 
East Hall (1962) — Houses most of the 
chapters of Lycoming's national frater- 
nities and other students. The self- 
contained fraternity units each contain 
rooms, a lounge, and a chapter room. All 
students share a large social area. 
Forrest Hall (1968) — Sleeps 92 stu- 
dents in two-room suites with bath. Hon- 
ors Dr. and Mrs. Fletcher Bliss Forrest 
and Anna Forrest Burfiendt '30, the 
parents and sister of Katherine Forrest 
Mathers '28, whose generosity estab- 
lished the memorial. 



Rich Hall (1948) — Sleeps 105 students 
in two-room suites with bath. Honors the 
Rich family of Woolrich, Pennsylvania. 
Houses the health service and the Sara J. 
Walter Lounge for commuting students. 
Skeath Hall (1965) — The largest resi- 
dence hall, it sleeps 212 students. Hon- 
ors the late J. Milton Skeath. professor of 
psychology and four-time Dean of the 
College tYom 1921 to 1967. 
Wesley Hall (1956) — Sleeps 144 stu- 
dents. Honors John Welsey. the founder 
of Methodism. 

Williams Hall (1965) — Sleeps 146 stu- 
dents in two-room suites with bath. Hon- 
ors Mary Ellen Whitehead Williams, 
mother of Joseph A. Williams, of St. 
Marys. Pennsylvania, whose bequest 
established the memorial. 



ACADEMIC 

Academic Center (1968) — Probably the 
most architecturally impressive building 
on campus, the center actually is com- 
posed of four buildings; the library. 
Wendle Hall, the Arena Theatre and 
laboratories, and the faculty office 
building. 

Library: Contains more than 150,000 
volumes and up to 1 ,000 periodical 
titles, the Art Gallery, the computer 
center, a nursing skills laboratory, 
and a comfortable lounge that is util- 
ized for study and special events. It 
can accommodate 700 students, and 
serves as a federal repository. 
Art Gallery (1980:) Located in the 
northwest comer of the first floor of 
the library, the gallery contains exhi- 
bits year-round, including shows of 
student work. 

Computer Center (1979): Located in 
the basement of the library, the center 
hou.ses a DEC PDPI 1/70 primary unit 
and Commodore, Radio Shack and 
APPLE micro-computers. The prim- 
ary unit is equipped with the RSTS-E 
operating system, 1 .25 Mega-bytes of 
main memory, 134 Mega-bytes disk 
storage, and 14 remote terminals for 
student use. The center has computer 
graphics capability. 



Nursing Skills Laboratory (1983): 

Located in the lower level of the 
library, it is a replica of a modem 
hospital ward, complete with 10 
simulated work stations, a nurses' 
station, and all the medical equipment 
used by nurses. 

Wendle Hall: Contains 20 class- 
rooms, the psychology laboratories, 
and spacious Pennington Lounge, an 
informal meeting place for students 
and faculty. 

Arena Theatre and Laboratories: 
The 204-seat thrust-stage theatre is 
one of the finest in the region. It 
includes projection facilities, scene 
and costume shops, a make-up room, 
and a multiple-use area known as the 
Down Stage, where one-act experi- 
mental plays are performed. The lan- 
guage, business, mathematics, and 
physics laboratories are situated on 
the upper floors. The Detwiler Plane- 
tarium is located on the ground floor. 
Faculty Office Building: Contains 
faculty offices, seminar rooms, and a 
735-seat lecture hall. 

Fine Arts Center (1923, renovated 
1983) — Contains studios, sculpture 
foundry, woodshop, printmaking shop, 
classrooms, lecture hall, offices. 

Photographic Laboratory (1984): 
Located in the lower level of the Fine 
Arts Center, it contains all the mater- 
ials and equipment of any commercial 
laboratory . 

Science Building (1957) — Includes the 
biology and chemistry laboratories, 
classrooms, faculty offices, a lecture 
hall, and a greenhouse. 
Clarke Building (1939) — Includes 
recital hall, music classrooms, practice 
studios, an electronic-music studio, 
faculty offices, two chapels, and the 
United Campus Ministry Center. 



ADMINISTRATION 

John W. Long Hall (1951) — Opened 
originally as the library, it now houses 
the administrative offices, including 
those for the president, dean, treasurer. 



68 



registrar, admissions, alumni affairs, 
public relations, institutional advance- 
ment, career development, publications, 
and financial aid. It includes a reception 
area, central communications, and the 
printing and bulk mail office. 



RECREATION 

Physical Education and Recreation 
Center (1980) — Includes the George R. 
Lamade Gymnasium, uhich contains 
basketball and other courts; a six-lane 
swimming pool; all-purpose room; sauna 
and steam room; weight room; offices; 
classrooms, and Alumni Lounge. 
Wertz Student Center {1959}'— Con- 
tains the main and private dining rooms, 
Burchfield Lounge, a recreation area, 
game rooms, music room, theatre, cafe 
with stage, bookstore, post office, stu- 
dent organization offices, and FM radio 
station. Honors Bishop D. Frederick 
Wertz. president of Lycoming from 1955 
to 1968. 



RELIGIOUS 

Clarke Building (1939) — Lycoming's 
landmark, the building contains Clarke 
Chapel. St. John Neumann Chapel, the 
United Campus Ministry Center, and 
music department studios and offices. 




69 



Academic Calendar: 1985-86 



Fall Semester 

Bills are due Ausust 22 

Orientation of new faculty August 23 

Residence halls open August 25 

Faculty available for advising August 26 

Classes begin first period August 27 

Processing of drop/add begins August 27 

Re-registration fee of $25 applies after this date September 2 

Last day for drop/add September 2 

Last day to elect audit and satisfactory/unsatisfactory grades September 2 

Last day for submission of final grades for courses for which Incomplete grades 

were recorded in Spring, May. and summer terms October 7 

Mid-semester deficiency reports for freshmen due in Registrar's Office at noon October 14 

Last day for submission of final grades for courses for which Incomplete grades 

were recorded in fall semester 

Preregistration for students who have completed at least one semester October 29-31 

Preregistration for sophomores and juniors 

Preregistration for freshmen November 8-9 

Last day to withdraw from courses with W. WP. WF grades November 18 

Residence halls close at 10 a.m. for Thanksgiving recess November 27 

Residence halls open at noon after Thanksgiving December 1 

Classes resume first period after Thanksgiving December 2 

Residence halls close at 9 p.m. for spring recess 

Residence halls open at noon after spring recess 

Classes resume first period after spring recess 

Final examinations begin December 9 

Semester ends at 5 p.m December 13 

Residence halls close at 9 p.m December 13 

May term 

Residence halls open May 4 

Classes begin May 5 

Last day for drop/add May 6 

Last day to elect audit and satisfactory/unsatisfactory grades May 6 

Last day to withdraw from courses with W, WP, WF grades May 23 

Term ends May 30 

Residence halls close at 4 p.m May 30 



Spring semester 

January 2 

January 5 

January 6 
January 6 
January 10 
January 10 
Januarv 10 



February 21 

February 14 

March 26, 27 
April 1-2 
April 4 



February 2 
March 9 
March 10 
April 21 
April 25 
April 25 

Summer term 

June I 
June 2 
June 4 
June 4 
June 27 
July 4 
July II 



Special dates to remember: 

Freshman convocalion AuiiusI 27 

All-College picnic August 31 

Labor Day (classes In session) September 2 

Honiecommg Weekend September 27-29 

Parents Weekend October 11-12 

Long weekend (classes suspended) October 25 

Thanksgiving recess November 27-December 2 

Spring recess February 28-.March 4 

Good Friday (afternoon classes suspended) March 2X 

Honors Day April 8 

Baccalaureate May 4 

Commencement May 4 

Memorial Day (no classes) May 26 

Independence Day (no classes) July 4 



70 



Directory 



BOARD OF TRUSTEES 

Officers 

Harold H. Shreckengast. Jr Chairman 

Nathan W . Stuart. i.D Vice Chairman 

Paul G. Giimore Secretary 

William L. Baker Treasurer 

W. Gibbs McKenney. LL.D., L.H.D Chairman Emeritus 

Fred A. Pennington. LL.D Chairman Emeritus 

Honorary Trustees 

Bishop Hermann W. Kaebnick. D.D.. L.H.D. , LL.D Hershey 

Ralph E. Kelchner Jersey Shore 

Arnold A. Phipps. II Williamsport 

George L. Steams, II Williamsport 

W. Russell Zacharias Allentown 

Trustees 
Elected Term expires 1986 
1983 John T. Detwiler Williamsport 

1980 Richard W. DeWald Montoursville 

1974 Daniel G. Fultz Pittsford. NY 

1965 James G. Law. D. Text. Sci Bloomsburg 

1970 John E. Person. Jr Williamsport 

1983 Marv R. Schweikle. M.D. (Alumni Representative) Montoursville 

1972 Donald E. Shearer. M.D Montoursville 

1983 Hon. Clinton W. Smith Williamsport 

1961 Nathan W. Stuart. J.D Williamsport 

1971 Willis W. Willard. III. M.D Hershey 

Elected Term expires 1987 

1984 Hon. Robert W. Edgar. LL.D. (Alumni Representative) Glen Riddle 

1969 Samuel H. Evert... ^ Bloomsburg 

1972 The Rev. Brian A. Fetterman Williamsport 

1978 Harold D. Hershberger, Jr Williamsport 

1978 JohnC. Lundy Williamsport 

1984 D. Stephen Martz Duncansville 

1981 William Pickelner Williamsport 

1978 John Y. Schreyer Little Falls. NJ 

1985 Robert L. Shangraw Williamsport 

1972 Harold H. Shreckengast. Jr. Jenkintown 

Elected Term expires 1988 

1979 David Y. Brouse Salem. MA 

1951 Paul G. Gilmore Williamsport 

1985 Seth D. Keller (Alumni Representative) Williamsport 

1982 Margaret D. L'heureux Williamsport 

1973 Robert G. Little. M.D Hamsburg 

1964 W. Gibbs McKenney, LL.D.. L.H.D Baltimore. MD 

1973 G. Jackson Miller Altoona 

1958 Fred A. Pennin2ton. LL.D Mechanicsburg 

1982 Marguerite G. Rich Woolrich 

1961 The Rev. Wallace F. Stettler. HH.D Kingston 

1982 The Rev. Stratford C. Tavlor Montoursville 



71 



ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF 

FREDERICK E. BLUMER (1976) 

President 

B.A.. Mill saps College: 

B.D.. Ph.D.. Emory Universit}' 
SHIRLEY A. VAN MARTER (1979) 

Dean of the College 

B.A.. Mundelein College: M.A.. Northwestern Universirs': 

M.A.. Ph.D.. Ulli^■ersiT^■ of Chicago 
WILLIAM L. BAKER (1965) 

Treasurer 

B.S., Lycoming College 
JACK C. BUCKLE (1957) 

Dean of Student Services 

A.B.. Juniata College: M.S.. Syracuse Universiry 
J. BARTON MEYER (1984) 

Executive Director for 
College Advancement 

B.A.. Ohio Northern Universitx; 

M.S.. University^ of Dayton 
BETTY S. BECK (1965) 

Bookstore Manager 
DALE V. BOWER (1968) 

Director of Planned Giving 

B.S.. Lycoming College: 

B.D. United Theological Seminary 
GEORGE W. BRELSFORD (1982) 

Assistant to the 

Dean of Student Services 

B.S.. Davis & Elkins College 
RITA A, CIURLINO (1984) 

Admissions Counselor 

A.B.. Lycoming College 
ROBERT L. CURRY (1969) 

Assistant Director of Athletics 

A.B., Lycoming College 
JOANNE B. DAY (1981) 

Associate Dean of Student Services 

B.A.. M.Ed.. Western Maryland College 
ROBERT L. EDDINGER (1967) 

Director of Buildings & Grounds 
FRANK L. GIRARDM1984) 

Director of Athletics 

B.S.. West Chester State College 
FRED L. GROGAN (1977) 

Assistant Dean of the College 

A.B.. Bates College: M.A.. Arizona State 

Universitx: Ph.D.. University of Missouri 
THOMAS J. HENNINGER (1966) 

Director of Computer Services 

6.5.. Wake Forest College: 

M.A.. University of Kansas 



MARY E. HERRING (1978) 

Director of Admissions 

B.A.. Albright College 
RICHARD A. HUGHES (1970) 

Chaplain of the College 

B.A.. Indiana Central College: 

S.T.B.. Ph.D., Boston University 
BRUCE M. HURLBERT (1982) 

Director of Library Services 

B.A.. The Citadel: 

M.S.L.S.. Florida State University 
HAROLD H. HUTSON (1969) 

President Emeritus 

B.A.. LL.D.. Wofford College: B.D.. Duke Universitx. 

Ph.D.. University of Chicago: 

L.H.D.. Ohio Wesley an University 
JOHN G. LAMADE (1983) 

Assistant Director of Admissions 

B.A.. Susquehanna University 
MARK N. LEVINE (1985) 

Director of Public Relations 

B.A.. The American University: 

M.S. J.. Northwestern University 
MARIE J. LINDHORST (1984) 

Campus Minister 

A.B.. Vassar College: 

M.Div.. Yale Divinity School 
BETTY J. PARIS (1963) 

Registrar 

A.B.. Lycoming College 
JULIANN T. PAWLAK (1979) 

Director of Financial Aid 

A.B.. Lycoming College: 

M.A., Bucknell University 
JEFFREY L. RICHARDS (1982) 

Controller and Assistant Treasurer 

A.B.. Lycoming College 
GORDON S. STEARNS (1982) 

Assistant to the Dean of Student Services 

B.A.. Bowdoin College 
NED E. STRAUSER (1984) 

Admissions Counselor 

A.B.. Lycoming College 
DEBORAH E. WEAVER (1978) 

Administrative Assistant for Residence Life 
RALPH E. ZEIGLER, JR. (1980) 

Director of Alumni and Parent Relations 

A.B.. Lycoming College: 

M.A.. The Penn.sylvania State University 
JEROME M. ZUFELT (1984) 

Assistant Director of Public Relations 

B.S.. Boston Universitx 



72 



FACULTY 



EMERITI 

MABEL K. BAUER 

Professor Emeritus of Chemistry 

B.S.. Cornell University: 

M.S.. University of Pennsylvania 
LEROY F. DERR 

Professor Emeritus of Education 

A.B.. Ursinus College: M.A.. Biicknell University: 

Ed.D., University of Pittsburgh 
ROBERT H. EWING 

Professor Emeritus of History 

A.B.. College of Wooster: M. A.. University 

of Michigan: HH.D.. Lycoming College 
JOHN P. GRAHAM 

Professor Emeritus of English 

Ph.B.. Dickinson College: 

M.Ed.. The Pennsylvania State Universir\- 
HAROLD W. HAYDEN 

Librarian Emeritus and Professor Emeritus 
of Library Services 

A.B.. Nebraska Slate Teachers College: B.S.. University 

of Illinois: M.A. in L.S.. University of Michigan 
GEORGE W. HOWE 

Professor Emeritus of Geology 

A.B.. M.S.. Syracii.se University: 

Ph.D.. Cornell University 
M. RAYMOND JAMISON 

Assistant Professor Emeritus of Physics 

B.S.. Ursinus College: M.S.. Bucknell Universit}' 
GERTRUDE B. MADDEN 

Associate Professor Emeritus of English 

A.B.. University of Pennsylvania: 

M.A.. Bucknell University 
WALTER G. McIVER 

Professor Emeritus of Music 

Mus.B.. Westminster Choir College: A.B.. Bucknell 

University: M.A.. New York University 
DONALD G, REMLEY 

Assistant Professor Emeritus of 
Mathematics and Physics 

A.B., Dickinson College: M.A.. Columbia Universit}' 
MARY LANDON RUSSELL 

Associate Professor Emeritus of Music 

Mus. B.. Susquehanna University Conservatoiy of 

Music: M.A.. The Pennsylvania State University 
LOUISE R. SCHAEFFER 

Associate Professor Emeritus of Education 

A.B.. Lycoming College: M.A.. Bucknell Univer.sity: 

D.Ed.. The Pennsxlvania State University 



JAMES W. SHEAFFER 

Associate Professor Emeritus of Music 
B.S., Indiana University of Pennsylvania: 
M.S., Universin- of Pennsylvania 

FRANCES K. SKEATH 

Professor Emeritus of Mathematics 
A.B.. M.A.. Bucknell University: 
D.Ed.. The Pennsylvania State Utiiversity 

JOHN A. STUART 

Professor Emeritus of English 
B.A.. William Jewell College: 
M.A., Ph.D.. Northwestern University 

HELEN B. WEIDMAN 

Professor Emeritus of Political Science 
A.B.. M.A.. Bucknell University: 
Ph.D.. Syracuse University 



PROFESSORS 

ROBERT F. FALK (1970)** 

Theatre 

Marshal of the College 

B.A.. B.D.. Drew University: 

M.A.. Ph.D.. Wayne State University 
MORTON A. FINEMAN (1966)*** 

Physics 

A.B.. Indiana University: 

Ph.D.. University of Pittsburgh 
ERNESTO. GIGLIO (1972) 

Political Science 

B.A.. Queens College: M.A.. SUNY at Albany: 

Ph.D.. Syracuse Universits- 
EDUARDO GUERRA (1960) 

Religion 

B.D.. Southern Methodist Universit}': S.T.M.. 

Ph.D., Union Theological Seminary 
JOHN G. HANCOCK (1967) 

Psychology 

B.S.. M.S.. Bucknell University: 

Ph.D.. The Pennsylvania State University 
JOHN G. HOLLENBACK (1952) 

Business Administration 

B.S.. M.B.A.. University of Pennsylvania 
JAMES K. HUMMER (1962) 

Chemistry 

B.N.S.. Tufts University: M.S.. Middlebuiy College: 

Ph.D.. University of North Carolina 
JACK S. McCRARY (1969) 

Sociology 

B.A.. M.A.. Southern Methodist University: 

Ph.D.. Washington University 



73 



ROGER W. OPDAHL (1963) 

Economics 

A.B.. Hofstra Universin: M.A.. Columbia Uni\ersit\-: 

D.Ed.. The Pennsylvania Stale Univer.sin 
JOHN F. PIPER. JR. (1969) 

History 

A.B., Lafayette College: B.D.. Yale University: 

Ph.D.. Duke University 
ROBERT W. RABOLD ( 1955) 

Economics 

B.A.. The Pennsylvania State University; 

M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Pittsburgh 
JOHN A. RADSPINNER (1957) 

Chemistry 

B.S.. University of Richmond: M.S.. Virginia 

Polytechnic Institute: D.Sc. Carnegie-Mellon University- 
LOGAN A. RICHMOND ( 1954) 

Accounting 

B.S.. Lycoming College: M.B.A.. New York Universit^■: 

C.P.A. t Pennsylvania) 
JANET A. RODGERS (1981) 

Nursing 

B.S.. Wagner College: M.A.. Ph.D.. 

New York University' 
SHIRLEY A. VAN MARTER (1979) 

English 

Dean of the College 

B.A., Mundelein College: M.A.. Northwestern 

University: M. A.. Ph.D.. University of Chicago 



**On Sabatical Spring Semester 1986 
***0n Leave of Absence 1985-86 



ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS 

ROBERT B. ANGSTADT (1967) 

Biology 

B.S.. Ursinus College: 

M.S.. Ph.D.. Cornell Universit\- 
HOWARD C. BERTHOLD, JR. (1976) 

Psychology 

B.A.. Franklin and Marshall College: M.A. University 

of Iowa: Ph.D.. The University of Mas.sachusetts 
JON R. BOGLE (1976) 

Art 

B.F.A.. B.S.. M.F.A.. Tvler School of Art: 

Temple Universir^- 
CLARENCE W. BURCH (1962) 

Physical Education 

B.S.. M.Ed.. University of Pittsburgh 
JACK D. DIEHL. JR. (1971)** 

Biology 

6.5.. M.A.. Sam Houston State University: 

M.S., Ph.D.. University of Connecticut 



RICHARD R. ERICKSON (1973) 

Astronomy and Physics 

B.A.. University of Minnesota: 

M.S.. Ph.D.. University of Chicago 
BERNARD P. FLAM ( 1963) 

Spanish 

A.B., New York University: M.A.. Harvard Universirs-: 

Ph.D.. University of Wisconsin 
DAVID A. FRANZ (1970) 

Chemistry 

A.B.. Princeton University: M.A.T.. The Johns 

Hopkins University: Ph.D.. Universit^^ of Virginia 
CHARLES L. GETCHELL (1967) 

Mathematics 

B.S.. Universit}- of Massachusetts: 

M.A.. Ph.D.. Harvard Universit}' 
STEPHEN R. GRIFFITH (1970) 

Philosophy 

A.B.. Cornell Universit}': 

M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Pittsburgh 
DAVID K. HALEY (1980) 

Mathematics 

B.A.. Acadia University: M.S.. P.D.. Queen's 

University: Hahil.. Universitat Mannheim 
RICHARD A. HUGHES (1970)** 

Religion 

B.A.. Indiana Central College: 

S.T.B.. Ph.D.. Boston University 
BRUCE M. HURLBERT ( 1982) 

Director of Library Services 

B.A.. The Citadel: M.S.L.S.. Florida State Universit^■ 
EMILY R. JENSEN (1969) 

English 

B.A., Jamestown College: M.A.. Universit}- of Denver: 

Ph.D.. The Pennsylvania State University- 
MOON H. JO (1975) 

Sociology 

B.A.. Valparaiso Universit}-: M.A.. Howard University: 

Ph.D., New York Universit}- 
FORREST E. KEESBURY ( 1970) 

Education 

B.S.. Defiance College: M.A.. Bowling Green State 

Universin-: E.D.. Lehigh Universitx 
ROBERT H. LARSON ( 1969) 

History 

B.A.. The Citadel: M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Virginia 
PAUL A. MacKENZIE (1970) 

German 

A.B.. A.M.. Ph.D.. Boston Universit}- 
ROBERT J.B. MAPLES (1969) 

French 

A.B., Universit}- of Rochester: Ph.D.. Yale University 



74 



RICHARD J. MORRIS (1976) 


GARY M. BOERCKEL (1979) 


History 


Music 


B.A.. Boston State College: M.A.. Ohio 


B.A.. B.M.. Oberlin College: M.M.. Ohio University: 


Ulliversit^•: Ph.D.. New York University 


D.M.A.. University of Iowa 


DAVID J. RIFE (1970)** 


ROSE MARIE BOROCH ( 1984) 


English 


Nursing 


B.A.. University of Florida: M.A.. Ph.D.. 


B.S.N.^Ed. Wilkes College: 


Southern Illinois University 


M.A.. New York Universir}- 


STEVE ROBINSON (1979) 


ANDRZEJ J. BUCKI 


Religion 


Mathematics 


B.A.. M.A.. Brigham Young Universit}': 


B.S. Maria Curie-Sklodowska University 


Ph.D.. Duke University 


M.S. Maria Curie-Sklodowska University 


MICHAEL G. ROSKIN (1972) 


JOHN H. CONRAD (1959) 


Political Science 


Education 


A.B.. University of California at Berkeley: M.A.. 


B.S.. Mansfield Stale College: 


Universit}- of California at Los Angeles: Ph.D.. 


M.A.. New York Universit}- 


The American University 


SANTHUSHT S. DeSILVA ( 1983) 


ROGER D. SHIPLEY (1967) 


Mathematics 


Art 


B.Sc. Universit}- of Sri Lanka: 


B.A.. Otterbein College: M.F.A., 


M.A.. Ph.D.. Universit}- of Pittsburgh 


Cranbrook Academy of Art 


DAVID FISHER 


H. BRUCE WEAVER (1974) 


Physics 


Business Administration 


B.S.. The Pennsylvania State Universit}-: 


B.B.A.. Stetson University: J. D.. Vanderbilr Universit}-: 


M.S.. Ph.D.. Universit}- of Delaware 


M.B.A.. Florida Technological University 


EDWARD G. GABRIEL ( 1977) 


JOHN M. WHELAN. JR. (1971)* 


Biology 


Philosophy 


B.A.. M. A.. Alfred Universit}-: 


B.A.. Universit}- of Notre Dame: Ph.D.. 


M.S.. Ph.D.. The Ohio State Universit}- 


The Universit}- of Texas at Austin 


ELSAGILMORE(1985) 


STANLEY T. WILK (1973) 


Spanish 


Anthropology 


B.A... M.A . . Universit}- of Miami 


B.A.. Hunter College: Ph.D.. Universit}- of Pittsburgh 


ELSIE M. GOLD 


ROBERT A. ZACCARIA (1973) 


English 


Biology 


B.A.. Herbert Lehman College: 


B.A.. Bridgewater College: 


M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Rochester 


Ph.D.. University of Virginia 


GEOFFREY L. GORDON (1981) 




Business Administration 


*On Sabbatical Fall/Spring Semester 1985-86 


6.5.. Lehigh Universit}-: 


**0n Sabbatical Spring Semester 1985-86 


M.B.A.. Duke Universit}-: C.P.LM. 




FREDL. GROGAN(1977) 




Political Science 


ASSISTANT PROFESSORS 


Assistant Dean of the College 




A.B.. Bates College: M.A.. Arizona State Universit}-: 


JERRY D. ALLEN (1984) 


Ph.D.. Universit}- of Missouri 


Theatre 


THOMAS J. HENNINGER (1966) 


B.F.A.. M.F.A.. Utah State Universit}- 


Director of Computer Services; Mathematics 


RICHARD J. BARKER (1982) 


B.S.. Wake Forest College: M.A.. Universit}- of Kansas 


Spanish 


OWEN F. HERRING (1965) 


B.A.. Hamilton College: M.A.. Universit}- of Iowa: 


Philosophy 


Ph.D.. Universir}- of Oregon 


B.A.. Wake Forest College 


SUSAN K. BEIDLER (1975) 


JANET HURLBERT (1985) 


Collection Management Services Librarian 


Instructional Services Librarian 


B.A.. Universit}- of Delaware: 


B.A.. M.A.. Universit}- of Denver 


M.L.S.. Universit}- of Pittsburgh 





75 



MURIEL K. JACOBY (1984) 


RICHARD E. WIENECKE (1982) 


Nursing 


Accounting 


B.S.N.^. Hood College: 


A.B., Lycoming College: M.S.. Bucknell Universiiv 


M.S., University of Delaware 


M.B.A.. Long Lsland University: C.P.A. 


GRANT L. JEFFERS (1983) 


(Pennsylvania and New York) 


Music 


FREDRIC M. WILD, JR. (1978)** 


B.A.. Williams College; 


English 


M.M., University of Cincinnati: 


B.A., Emory University; M.A., Ph.D., Ohio State 


Ph.D.. Universit}' of California. Los Angeles 


University-; M.Div., Yale Divinity School 


WILLIAM E. KEIG(1980) 


MELVIN C. ZIMMERMAN (1979) 


Astronomy and Physics 


Biology 


A.B.. University' of California at Santa Cruz: 


B.S., SUNY at Cortkmd: 


M.S.. Ph.D., University of Chicago 


M.S., Ph.D.. Miami University- 


ELDON F. KUHNS, II (1979) 




Accounting 


**0n Sabbatical Spring Semester 1986 


A.B., Lycoming College: M. Accounting. 




Universit\- of Oklahoma: C.P.A. (Pennsylvania) 




CAROLE MOSES (1982) 


INSTRUCTORS 


English 




B.A., Adelphi University: M.A.. The Pennsylvania 


SALLY ANN ATKINSON (1983) 


State University-; Ph.D., SUNY at Binghamton 


Nursing 


DORIS P. PARRISH (1983) 


B.S.N., Te.uis Woman's University-; M.S.N., University 


Nursing 


of Texas, Health Science Center at San Antonio 


B.S., SUNY at Plattshurgh; M.S., Russell Sage College 


CHRIS A. CHERRINGTON (1983) 


JUDITH A. POTTMEYER (1984) 


Education 


Biology 


B.S., University of Oklahoma; 


B.S.. Clarion State College: 


M.Ed., University- of Virginia 


Ph.D., Washington State University 


DAVID B. HAIR (1979) 


KATHRYN M. RYAN (1981) 


Physical Education 


Psychology 


B.S., East Stroudshurg State College 


B.S., University of Illinois; 


DANIEL HARTSOCK (1982) 


M.S., Ph.D.. University- of Pittsburgh 


Visiting Instructor in English 


GENE D. SPRECHINI (1981) 


B.A.. The Pennsylvania State Universiry; 


Mathematics 


M.A.. Indiana University- of Pennsylvania 


B.S., Wilkes College; 


DEBORAH J. HOLMES (1976) 


M.A., Ph.D., SUNY at Binghamton 


Physical Education 


LARRY R. STRAUSER (1973) 


B.S., M.S.. The Pennsylvania State University 


Sociology 


BRADLEY NASON 


A.B.. Lyctmiing College; 


Mass Communication 


MP. A., Universit\- of Arizona 


A.B., Lycoming College; M. A. in Communications, 


FRED M. THAYER. JR. (1976) 


The American University- 


Music 


KATHLEEN D. PAGANA (1982)*** 


A.B., Syracu.w University: B.M.. Ithaca College; 


Nursing 


M.M., SUNY at Binghamton; DMA.. 


B.S.N. , University of Maryland; 


Cornell University 


M.S.N., University of Penn.sylvcmia 


EDWARD C. WALLACE (1985) 




Mathematics 


***On Leave of Absence 1985-86 


B.S., Miami University 




M.S., Rutgers State University 




Ph.D., The University of Texas at Austin 


LECTURERS & SPECIAL APPOINTMENTS 


BUDDF. WHITEHILL(1957) 




Physical Education 


NANCY B. COOLEY (1981) 


6.5., Lock Haven University- : M.Ed., 


Worksite Health Program Coordinator — CHIP 


The Pennsylvania State University 


A.B.. Lycoming College 



76 



BARBARA KEARNEY (1985) 

Nursing 

B.S.. The Pennsylvania Slate University: 

M.S.. Marywood College 
DON M. LARRABEE II (1972) 

Lecturer in Law 

A.B.. Franklin and Marshall College; 

LL.B.. Fordham University 
GREGORY SZYMANIAK (1984) 

Nursing 

B.S.. Albany College of Pharmacy: Phorm.D.. 

Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and Science 
JOHN J. TAMALIS (1976) 

Chaplain to Roman Catholic Students 

B.S.. Universir\' of Scranion: M.S.. Marywood College 



PART-TIME FACULTY 

MARY P. BAGGETT (1977) 

Chemistry 

B. A.. Regis College: M.A.. Wellesley College 
ADELLE DOTZEL (1981) 

Mathematics 

B.S.. King's College: M.A.. 

The Pennsylvania State University 
ROME A. HANKS (1982) 

Art 

B.A.. M.F.A.. The Pennsylvania State University 

NANCY WOLF (1985) 
Political Science 
B.A.. St. Mary's College 
MP A.. University of Michigan 



APPLIED MUSIC TEACHERS 

DONALD FREED (1983) 

Violin 

B.S.. West Chester State College: M.Ed., 

D.Ed.. The Pennsylvania State University 
GARY GUTH (1983) 

Guitar 

B.S.. Indiana University of Pennsylvania 
RICHARD J. LAKEY (1979) 

Organ and Piano 

A.B., Westminster Choir College: M.A., 

Indiana University of Penn.nivania 
ALBERT NACINOVICH (1972) 

Brass 

B.A. in Music Education. Mansfield Univer.sity 

M.S. in Music Education. Ithaca College 



CATHERINE PAYN (1983) 

Voice 

B.M.. B. Church M.. Westminster Choir College; 

M.M., Voice, West Virginia University 
MARY RUSSELL (1936)' 

Piano 

M.B., Susquehanna University : M .A.. 

The Pennsxlvania State Universitx 



ADJUNCT FACULTY & STAFF 

BROOKE BARRIE (1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson Atelier Technical Institiae of Sculpture 
MICHAEL R. J. FELIX (1980) 

Director, County Health Improvement Program 

B.S.. Cortland University 
JAMES WALTER HUFFMAN (1984) 

Assistant Technical Director of Arena Theatre 

B.A., in Studio Art, B.A., in Theatre, 

Bloomshurg University' 
JON LASH (1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture 
ANDRZEJ PITYNSKl (1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture 
ALBERT J. STUNKARD (1980) 

Director of institute of Community Health 

B.S., Yale University: M.D., Columbia University 
HERK VAN TONGEREN (1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture 

MEDICAL STAFF 

FREDERIC C. LECHNER. M.D. 

College Physician 

B.S.. Franklin and Marshall College: 
M.D.. Jeffer.wn Medical College 
ROBERT S. YASUL M.D. 

College Surgeon 

M.D.. Temple University 
EVELYNN L. SEAMAN, R.N. 

College Nurse 

Williamsport Hospital School of Nursing 
MARY J. VESTERMARK (1977) 

Counselor 

A.B., Oberlin: M.A.. Stetson University: 

Ph.D., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill 



77 



ATHLETICS STAFF 

JANIS ARP Field Hockey Coach 

RALPH AUGUSTINE Equipment Manager 

CLARENCE W. BURCH Men's Basicetball Coach 

ROBERT L. CURRY Assistant Athletic Director 

REES DANEKER Assistant Basketball Coach 

JOHN ECK Men's Basketball Statistician 

DAVID L. FORTIN Assistant Wrestling Coach 

ROBERT L. GEORGE Assistant Footbafl Coach 

FRANK L. GIRARDI Athletic Director. 

Head Football Coach 

C. MICHAEL GREEN Assistant Track Coach 

DENNIS E. HAMMOND Assistant Football Coach 

EUGENE HENDERSCHED Golf Coach 

DEBORAH J. HOLMES Women's Tennis Coach 

MICHAEL J. HUDOCK Assistant Basketball Coach 

TERRY B. MANTLE Assistant Football Coach 

JOSEPH G. MARK Men's Tennis Coach 

SCOTT R. McLEAN Assistant Football Coach 

J. SCOTT McNeill Soccer Coach 

ALAN J. MORGAN JV Basketball Coach 

JOHN F. PIPER. JR Cross Country Coach 

WADE POTTER Assistant Wrestling Coach 

KEVIN ROSENSTEEL Assistant Diving Coach 

W. PATRICK SCHEMERY Head Track. 

Assistant Football Coach 

BUDD WHITEHILL Wrestling Coach 

DONALD R. WHITFORD. JR Head Trainer 

STEVEN R. WISER Assistant Football Coach 



ADMINISTRATIVE ASSISTANTS 

Vicki B. Atwood.... Secretary, Office of Student Activities 

Katherine F. Baker Accounting Assistant 

Rebecca Bastian Data Entry Clerk 

Robert E. Bay Grounds Foreman 

Emily C. Biichle Coordinator 

Facilities Scheduling/Purchasing 

Joyce A. Billeck Faculty Secretary 

Helen J . Boe Typist/Clerk Admissions 

Barbara Bowes Bookstore Assistant 

Beth A. Brossman Gift Records Clerk 

Debra A. Brown Secretary to Registrar 

Pauline Brungard Student Loan Coordinator 

IB.S., Lycoming College) 

Barbara J. Carlin Secretary to 

Director of Admissions 

Kathy A. Confair Cashier/Bookkeeper 

Richard L. Cowher Press Operator 

Elizabeth G. Cowles Career Development Secretary 

June V. Creveling Secretary. Buildings & Grounds 

Patricia Cundiff Systems Analyst 



Mary Dahlgren Admissions Data Entry Assistant 

June L. Evans Secretary. Nursing 

Robert W. Faus Assistant Press Operator 

Mary M. Fleming Research Assistant. CHIP 

S. Jean Gair Secretary. Music and Art Department 

Imre Gajari, Jr Computer Programmer/Operator 

Irene V. Gohrig Secretary to Dean of Student Services 

Judith Hart. Secretary, Biology and Chemistry Departments 

Diane Hassinger Secretary to Executive 

Director of Institutional Advancement 

Mary C. Hendricks Supervisor of Housekeeping 

Esther L. Henninger Administrative Assistant 

for Admissions 

Bemadine G. Hileman Office Services Coordinator 

Phyllis M. Holmes Secretary to President 

Barbara E. Horn Secretary to Athletics Director 

Judy Knittle Faculty Secretary 

Denise M. Koch Secretary. Athletics Office 

Gale D. Laubacher Financial Aid Assistant 

Judy F. McConnell Library Assistant/Day 

Circulation Supervisor 

D. Maxine McCormick Records Clerk and 

Secretary to Assistant Dean of the College 

Doris F. McCoy Data Entry. Alumni 

Glenn E, McCreary Slide Clerk. Art 

Nancy L. Morrett CHIP Administrative Assistant 

Marilyn Mullings Faculty Secretary 

Phyllis B. Myers Secretary to 

Director of Alumni Relations 

Marion R. Nyman Secretary to Treasurer 

Kimberly A. Owen Library Assistant 

Rosalie Pfaff Switchboard Operator 

David W. Poeth Assistant to Director of 

Buildings and Grounds 

Pearl Ringler Bookstore Assistant 

Sheran L. Swank Faculty Secretary 

Patricia J. Triaca Library Assistant 

Sharon A. Vedder Computer Programmer/Operator 

Deborah E. Weaver Damage Assessment Clerk 

Vickie L. Weaver ....Secretary to Director of Financial Aid 

Geraldine H. Wescott Periodicals Assistant in Library 

Loretta M . Whipkey Secretary to Director of 

Public Relations 

Donald R. Whitford. Jr Athletic Trainer 

Cathleen R. Wild Interim Instructional 

Services Librarian 

Patricia S. Wittig Secretary. Campus Ministry Center 

Madlyn Wonderlich Secretary to Dean of the College 

Cheryl A. Yearick Library Assistant/Night 

Circulation Supervisor 
Gail M. Zimmerman AV/ILL Library Assistant 



78 



The Alumni Association 



The Alumni Association of Lycoming College has a mem- 
bership of nearly 1 1 ,000 men and women . It is governed by an 
executive board consisting of 24 members-at-large, elected 
through mail ballot by the membership of the association. The 
board also has members representing specific geographic 
areas, the senior class president, the student body president, 
and past presidents of the last graduating class and the Student 
Association of Lycoming College. The association annually 
designates one alumni representative as a nominee for a 
three-year term on the College board of trustees. The Director 
of Alumni and Parent Relations directs the activities of the 
alumni office. The Alumni Association has the following 
purpose as stated in its constitution: "As an off-campus 
constituency, the association's purpose is to seek ways of 
maintaining an active and mutually beneficial relationship 
between the College and its alumni, utilizing their talents, 
resources and counsel to further the objective and program of 
Lycoming College." 

All former students of Williamsport Dickinson Seminary 
and all former students who have successfully completed one 
year of study at Williamsport Dickinson Junior College or 
Lycoming College are considered members of the association. 

Acting as the representative of alumni on the campus and 
working also with undergraduates, the alumni office is respon- 
sible for keeping alumni informed and interested in the prog- 
rams, growth, and activities of the College through regular 
publications mailed to all alumni on record. Arrangements for 
Homecoming, class reunions, club meetings, and similar 
activities are coordinated through this office. Through the 
Lycoming College Fund, the alumni office is closely asso- 
ciated with the development program of the College. Commu- 
nications to the alumni association should be addressed to the 
Office of Alumni and Parent Relations. 



1985-86 ALUMNI ASSOCIATION 
EXECUTIVE BOARD 

Term Expires June 1986 

David G. Argall "80 — Deer Trail Lane, Lake Hauto. 

R.D. #1, Nesquehoning, PA 18240 
David E. Detwiler (Dr.) "75 — 503 East Church St., 

Martinsville, VA 24112 
Robert J. Glunk "59 — R.D. #3. Jersey Shore, PA 17740 
Donna Michael Heiney (Mrs.) "62 — R.D. #2, Hughes- 

ville. PA 17737 
Patricia MacBride Krauser (Mrs.) "68 — R.D. #1, Box 

10-L, Mt. Wolf, PA 17347 
Mary Landon Russell (Mrs.) "33 — 812 Lincoln Avenue, 

Williamsport, PA 17701 
Susan J. Stamm (Miss) "83 — 776 Providence Rd., Aldan, 

PA 19018 
Doris Heller Teufel (Mrs.) '54 — R.D. #1, P.O. Box 

852, Williamsport, PA 17701 



Term Expires June 1987 

Steven B. Barth "78 — R.D. #2. Box 378, Danville. 

PA 17821 
Romain F. Bastian "61 — 500 N. Front Street. Milton, PA 

17847 
Cindy L. Bell (Miss) '82 — 77 Yarmouth Rd., Rochester, 

NY 14610 
H. Ridge Canaday, Jr. "66 — 2816 Orchard Ave.. R.D. 

#3.^Montoursville, PA 17754 
Richard H. Felix "56 — 1230 Pennsylvania Avenue, Wil- 
liamsport, PA 17701 
Yvonne Smith Kaiser (Mrs.) '64 — 2430 Sheridan Street, 

Williamsport, PA 17701 
Wayne M. Moffatt '63 — R.D. #2, Box 307B, Montours- 

ville, PA 17754 
Dorothy Ferrell Sandmeyer (Mrs.) '43 & '63 — 47 E. 

Houston Ave.. Montgomery, PA 17752 

Term Expires June 1988 

Carolyn Moday Edwards (Mrs.) '61 — 1521 Elmira St., 
Williamsport, PA 17701 

Robert V. Haas '58 — 2805 Four Mile Dr.. R.D. #3, 
Montoursville, PA 17754 

Kay Stenger Huffman (Mrs.) '60 — 1315 Lose Avenue, 
Williamsport, PA 17701 

David L. Phillips (The Rev.) '63 — 590 Lincoln Avenue. 
Williamsport. PA 17701 

Mary Johnson Smith (Mrs.) '59 — 1439 Grampian Boule- 
vard. Williamsport. PA 17701 

Otto L. Sonder. Jr. (Dr.) '46 — 52 West Street, Oneonta, 
NY 13820 

Nancy Flory Spannuth (Mrs.) '64 — 333 Oakley Dr., 
State College, PA 16803 

Richard E. Wienecke '66 — 1636 Almond St., Williams- 
port, PA 17701 

Members of the Board 

Serving a One-Year Term 

Student Association of Lycoming College (SALC). 

President — Kenneth R. Schmidt "86 — Coral Springs, 

FL 
Senior Class President — Elizabeth J. Barrick '86 — 

Belvidere, NJ 

1985 Class President — Patricia L. Loomis '85 — R.D. 
#1, Box 439, Troy, PA 16947 

Immediate Past President of SALC — Patricia A. Ryan 
'85 — 828 Mt. Ave., Bound Brook, NJ 08805 

Alumni Representatives to 
Lycoming College Board of Trustees 

1986 — Mary R. Schweikle (Dr.) '63 — 2905 Orchard 
Avenue, Montoursville, PA 17754 

1987 — Robert W. Edgar (Congressman) '65 — POB 
128, Glen Riddle, PA 19037 



79 



1988 — Seth D. Keller "65 — 137 Lincoln Avenue, 
Williamsport. PA 17701 

Area Alumni Representalives 

Charles J. Kocian "50 — Washington, DC 

Ann E. Weitzel "79 — Southcentral Pennsylvania 

Kent T. Baldwin "64 — Greater Williamsport 

James G. Scott "70 — New England 

Patrick J. Cerillo "77 — Northern New Jersey 

Kimberly Martin Koehl '78 — Southern New Jersey 

Barry C. Hamilton '70 — Greater Philadelphia 

1984-85 ALUMNI ASSOCIATION OFFICERS* 

President — Robert V. Haas '58 — 2805 Four Mile 

Dr., R.D. #3, Montoursville, PA 17754 
Vice President for Campus Affairs — Nancy Flory Span- 

nuth (Mrs.) '64 — 333 Oakley Dr., State College, PA 

16803 
Vice-President for Regional Affairs — Donald E. Failor 

'68 — 12 Country Club Place, Camp Hill. PA 1701 1 
Secretary — Carolyn Moday Edwards (Mrs.) '61 — 1521 

Elmira St., Williamsport^ PA 17701 
Last Retiring President — Kent T. Baldwin '64 — 929 

Grampian Blvd., Williamsport, PA 17701 

*OtTicers are elected from among the 
Alumni Association Executive Board members. 



80 



Index 



Academic Advisement 8 

Academic Calendar 70 

Academic Honesty 11 

Academic Honors 11 

Academic Program 5 

Academic Standing 11 

Accounting Curriculum 20 

Accounting-Mathematics (EIM) 21 

Accreditation 4 

Administrative Assistants 78 

Administrative Staff 72 

Admission 62 

Admissions Deposit 64 

Admissions Office 63 

Admission Policy 62 

Admission Standards 62 

Advanced Placement 11 

Advanced Standing by Transfer 62 

Advisory Committees 8 

Health Professions 8 

Legal Professions 9 

Medical Technoloy 8 

Theological Professions 9 

Allopathic Medicine. Advisement for 9 

American Studies (EIM) 22 

Anthropology Curricululm 56 

Application Fee and Deposits 64 

Application Process 62 

Applied Music Requirements 48 

Art Curriculum 23 

Astronomy and Physics Curriculum .25 

Athletics Training 52 

Attendance, Class 11 

Audit 15 

Awards 12 

BFA Degree 5 

Biology Curriculum 27 

Board of Trustees 71 

Books and Supplies 64 

BSN Degree 5 

Business Administration Curriculum 29 

Calendar, Academic 70 

Campus Facilities 68 

Capitol Semester 17 

Career Development Services 60 

Chemistry Curriculum 30 

Christian Ministry. Advisement for.. 9 

Class Attendance 11 

College and the Church 4 

College Directory 71 

College Level Examination Program 

(CLEP) 11 

Community Scholarships 67 

Computer Science Curriculum 44 

Conduct. Standards of 61 



Contents 2 

Contingency Deposits 64 

Cooperative Programs 15 

Engineering 15 

Environmental Studies 16 

Forestry 16 

Medical Technology 16 

Military Science 17 

Optometry 16 

Podiatric Medicine 17 

Sculpture 17 

Counseling. Academic 8 

Counseling. Personal 60 

Course Credit by Examination 11 

Course Descriptions 21 

Criminal Justice (EIM) 32 

Curriculum 21 

Damage Charges 60 

Degree Programs 5 

Degree Requirements 5 

Dental School. Advisement for 8 

Departmental Honors 13 

Departmental Majors 7 

Deposits 64 

Deposit Refunds 64 

Distribution Requirements 6 

English 6 

Fine Arts 6 

Foreign Language 6 

History and Social Science 6 

Mathematics 6 

Natural Science 6 

Philosophy 6 

Religion 6 

Early Admission Procedure 62 

Economics Curriculum 35 

Education Curriculum 34 

Education Financing Plans 67 

Educational Opportunity Grants 66 

Engineering. Cooperative Program ..15 

English Curriculum 32 

English Requirement 6 

Entrance Examinations (CEEB) 11 

Entry Fees and Deposits 64 

Environmental Studies 16 

Established Interdisciplinary Major 

(EIM) 7 

Expenses 64 

Faculty 73 

Federal Grants and Loans 66 

Fees 64 

Financial Aid 65 

Financial Assistance 65 

Financial Information 65 

Fine Arts Requirements 6 



Foreign Language Requirement 6 

foreign Languages and 

Literatures Curriculum 36 

Forestry. Cooperative Program 16 

French Curriculum 37 

General Expenses 64 

German Curriculum 38 

Grading System 10 

Graduation Requirements 5 

Grants-in- Aid 66 

Greek Curriculum 38 

Health Professions Careers 8 

Health Services 61 

Hebrew Curriculum 38 

History Curriculum 39 

History of the College 4 

History Requirements 6 

Honor Societies 12 

Honors. Academic 12 

Honors, Departmental 13 

Independent Study 14 

Interdisciplinary Majors 7 

Established Majors (EIM) ,. 7 

Individual Majors (IIM) 7 

International Studies 42 

Internship Programs 14 

Interviews 62 

Johnson Atelier 23 

Legal Professions, Advisement for .. 9 

Literature (EIM ) 43 

Loans 66 

Location 4 

London Semester 17 

Major 7 

Admission to 7 

Departmental 7 

Interdisciplinary (EIM. IIM) 7 

Mass Communication (EIM) 43 

Mathematical Sciences 44 

Mathematics Requirements 6 

May Term 15 

Medical School. Advisement for 8 

Medical History 62 

Medical Staff 61 

Medical Technology 16 

Military Science 17 

Ministerial Grants-in-Aid 65 

Minor 8 

Music Curriculum 47 

National Direct Student Loans 

(NDSL) 66 

Natural Science Requirement 6 

Near East Culture and Archaeology 

(EIM) 48 

Non-Payment of Fees Penalty 65 



81 



Nursing 48 

Optometry 16 

Optomerty School, Advisement for.. 8 
Osteopathy School. Advisement for. 8 

Overseas Studies Opportunities 15 

Part-time Student Opportunities 15 

Payment of Fees 64 

Payments, Partial 64 

Penalty for Non-Payment of Fees ....65 

Personal Counseling 60 

Philadelphia Semester 18 

Philosophy Curriculum 50 

Philosophy Requirement 6 

Physical Education Curriculum 52 

Physics Curriculum 26 

Placement Services 60 

Podiatric Medicine, Cooperative 

Program 17 

Political Science Curriculum 52 

Psychology Curriculum 53 

Purpose and Objectives 3 

Reading Improvement Course 61 

Refunds 64 

Registration 9 



Regulations (Standards of Conduct) .61 

Religion Curriculum 54 

Religion Requirement 6 

Repeated Courses 10 

Requirements, Distribution 6 

Requirements for Admission 62 

Requirements for Graduation 5 

Reserve Officer Training Corps 

Program (ROTC) 17 

Residence 60 

Residence Halls 60 

Scholarships 65 

Scholarships (ROTC) 67 

Scholar Program 18 

Sculpture 23 

Selection Process 62 

Social Science Requirement 6 

Sociology-Anthropology Curriculum 56 

Spanish Curriculum 38 

Special Features 14 

Independent Study 14 

Internship Program 14 

May Term 15 

Overseas Studies Opportunities 15 



Standards of Admission 62 

Standards of Conduct 61 

State Grants and Loans 66 

Student Enrichment Semester (SES).17 

Student Records 1 1 

Student Services 60 

Study Abroad 15 

Summer Session Calendar 70 

Supplemental Educational Opportunity 

Grant (SEOG) 66 

Theatre Curriculum 58 

Theological Professions, 

Advisement 9 

Transfer 62 

Trustees 71 

Unit Course System 9 

United Nations Semester 17 

Veterans, Approval 62 

Veterinary School, Advisement for.. 8 

Washington Semester 17 

Withdrawal from College 64 

Work-Study Grants 66 




82 



'MS;-